Orban Optimod-TV 8382 Operating Manual

Operating Manual
OPTIMOD-TV
8382
Two-Channel Digital Audio Processor
for Analog Aural FM Carriers
Version 1.1 Software
IMPORTANT NOTE: Refer to the unit’s rear panel for your Model Number.
Model Number:
Description:
8382
OPTIMOD 8382 for analog aural FM carriers. Digital
I/O, Protection Structure, Two-Band Structure, MultiBand Structure, 115V (for 90-130V operation) or
230V (for 200-250V operation), switchable to 50µs or
75µs.
8382J
As above, but for 90-117V operation.
MANUAL:
Part Number:
Description:
96124.110.01
8382 Operating Manual
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK,
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
This symbol, wherever it appears, alerts you to
the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage
inside the enclosure ⎯ voltage that may be
sufficient to constitute a risk of shock.
This symbol, wherever it appears, alerts you to important
operating and maintenance instructions in the accompanying literature. Read the manual.
In accordance to the WEEE (waste electrical and electronic equipment) directive of the European Parliament, this product must not be discarded into the
municipal waste stream in any of the Member States. This product may be
sent back to your Orban dealer at end of life where it will be reused or recycled
at no cost to you.
If this product is discarded into an approved municipal WEEE collection site or
turned over to an approved WEEE recycler at end of life, your Orban dealer
must be notified and supplied with model, serial number and the name and
location of site/facility.
Please contact your Orban dealer for further assistance.
www.orban.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the appliance is operated.
Retain Instructions: The safety and operation instructions should be retained for future reference.
Heed Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.
Follow Instructions: All operation and user instructions should be followed.
Water and Moisture:
The appliance should not be used near water (e.g., near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, etc.).
Ventilation:
The appliance should be situated so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation. For example, the appliance should not be situated on a bed, sofa, rug, or similar surface that may block the ventilation openings; or, placed in a built-in installation, such as a
bookcase or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings.
Heat:
The appliance should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appliances (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
Power Sources:
The appliance should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked on
the appliance.
Grounding or Polarization: Precautions should be taken so that the grounding or polarization means of an appliance is not defeated.
Power-Cord Protection:
Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or
against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the appliance.
Cleaning: The appliance should be cleaned only as recommended by the manufacturer.
Non-Use Periods: The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time.
Object and Liquid Entry: Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
Damage Requiring Service: The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when: The power supply cord or the plug has
been damaged; or Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or The appliance has been exposed to rain; or The appliance
does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
Servicing:
The user should not attempt to service the appliance beyond that described in the operating instructions. All other servicing should be
referred to qualified service personnel.
The Appliance should be used only with a cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer.
Safety Instructions (European)
Notice For U.K. Customers If Your Unit Is Equipped With A Power Cord.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.
The cores in the mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
GREEN and YELLOW - Earth
BLUE - Neutral
BROWN - Live
As colours of the cores in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug marked with the letter E, or with the earth symbol, or coloured green, or green and yellow.
The core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal marked N or coloured black.
The core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal marked L or coloured red.
The power cord is terminated in a CEE7 / 7 plug (Continental Europe). The green / yellow wire is connected directly to the unit's chassis. If you need to
change the plug and if you are qualified to do so, refer to the table below.
WARNING: If the ground is defeated, certain fault conditions in the unit or in the system to which it is connected can result in full line voltage between
chassis and earth ground. Severe injury or death can then result if the chassis and earth ground are touched simultaneously.
Conductor
L
LIVE
WIRE COLOR
Normal
Alt
BROWN
BLACK
N
NEUTRAL
BLUE
WHITE
E
EARTH GND
GREEN-YELLOW
GREEN
AC Power Cord Color Coding
Safety Instructions (German)
Gerät nur an der am Leistungsschild vermerkten Spannung und Stromart betreiben.
Sicherungen nur durch solche, gleicher Stromstärke und gleichen Abschaltverhaltens ersetzen. Sicherungen nie überbrücken.
Jedwede Beschädigung des Netzkabels vermeiden. Netzkabel nicht knicken oder quetschen. Beim Abziehen des Netzkabels den
Stecker und nicht das Kabel enfassen. Beschädigte Netzkabel sofort auswechseln.
Gerät und Netzkabel keinen übertriebenen mechanischen Beaspruchungen aussetzen.
Um Berührung gefährlicher elektrischer Spannungen zu vermeiden, darf das Gerät nicht geöffnet werden. Im Fall von Betriebsstörungen darf das Gerät nur Von befugten Servicestellen instandgesetzt werden. Im Gerät befinden sich keine, durch den Benutzer
reparierbare Teile.
Zur Vermeidung von elektrischen Schlägen und Feuer ist das Gerät vor Nässe zu schützen. Eindringen von Feuchtigkeit und
Flüssigkeiten in das Gerät vermeiden.
Bei Betriebsstörungen bzw. nach Eindringen von Flüssigkeiten oder anderen Gegenständen, das Gerät sofort vom Netz trennen und
eine qualifizierte Servicestelle kontaktieren.
Safety Instructions (French)
On s'assurera toujours que la tension et la nature du courant utilisé correspondent bien à ceux indiqués sur la plaque de l'appareil.
N'utiliser que des fusibles de même intensité et du même principe de mise hors circuit que les fusibles d'origine. Ne jamais
shunter les fusibles.
Eviter tout ce qui risque d'endommager le câble seceur. On ne devra ni le plier, ni l'aplatir. Lorsqu'on débranche l'appareil,
tirer la fiche et non le câble. Si un câble est endommagé, le remplacer immédiatement.
Ne jamais exposer l'appareil ou le câble ä une contrainte mécanique excessive.
Pour éviter tout contact averc une tension électrique dangereuse, on n'oouvrira jamais l'appareil. En cas de dysfonctionnement,
l'appareil ne peut être réparé que dans un atelier autorisé. Aucun élément de cet appareil ne peut être réparé par l'utilisateur.
Pour éviter les risques de décharge électrique et d'incendie, protéger l'appareil de l'humidité. Eviter toute pénétration
d'humidité ou fr liquide dans l'appareil.
En cas de dysfonctionnement ou si un liquide ou tout autre objet a pénétré dans l'appareil couper aussitôt l'appareil
de son alimentation et s'adresser à un point de service aprésvente autorisé.
Safety Instructions (Spanish)
Hacer funcionar el aparato sólo con la tensión y clase de corriente señaladas en la placa indicadora de características.
Reemplazar los fusibles sólo por otros de la misma intensidad de corriente y sistema de desconexión. No poner nunca los fusibles en
puente.
Proteger el cable de alimentación contra toda clase de daños. No doblar o apretar el cable. Al desenchufar, asir el enchufe y no el
cable. Sustituir inmediatamente cables dañados.
No someter el aparato y el cable de alimentación a esfuerzo mecánico excesivo.
Para evitar el contacto con tensiones eléctricas peligrosas, el aparato no debe abrirse. En caso de producirse fallos de funcionamiento,
debe ser reparado sólo por talleres de servicio autorizados. En el aparato no se encuentra ninguna pieza que pudiera ser reparada por
el usuario.
Para evitar descargas eléctricas e incendios, el aparato debe protegerse contra la humedad, impidiendo que penetren ésta o líquidos
en el mismo.
En caso de producirse fallas de funcionamiento como consecuencia de la penetración de líquidos u otros objetos en el aparato,
hay que desconectarlo inmediatamente de la red y ponerse en contacto con un taller de servicio autorizado.
Safety Instructions (Italian)
Far funzionare l'apparecchio solo con la tensione e il tipo di corrente indicati sulla targa riportante i dati sulle prestazioni.
Sostituire i dispositivi di protezione (valvole, fusibili ecc.) solo con dispositivi aventi lo stesso amperaggio e lo stesso comportamento
di interruzione. Non cavallottare mai i dispositivi di protezione.
Evitare qualsiasi danno al cavo di collegamento alla rete. Non piegare o schiacciare il cavo. Per staccare il cavo, tirare la presa e mai
il cavo. Sostituire subito i cavi danneggiati.
Non esporre l'apparecchio e il cavo ad esagerate sollecitazioni meccaniche.
Per evitare il contatto con le tensioni elettriche pericolose, l'apparecchio non deve venir aperto. In caso di anomalie di funzionamento
l'apparecchio deve venir riparato solo da centri di servizio autorizzati. Nell'apparecchio non si trovano parti che possano essere riparate
dall'utente.
Per evitare scosse elettriche o incendi, l'apparecchio va protetto dall'umidità. Evitare che umidità o liquidi entrino nell'apparecchio.
In caso di anomalie di funzionamento rispettivamente dopo la penetrazione di liquidi o oggetti nell'apparecchio, staccare immediatamente
l'apparecchio dalla rete e contattare un centro di servizio qualificato.
PLEASE READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
Manual
The Operating Manual contains instructions to verify the proper operation of this unit and initialization of certain options.
You will find these operations are most conveniently performed on the bench before you install the unit in the rack.
Please review the Manual, especially the installation section, before unpacking the unit.
Trial Period Precautions
If your unit has been provided on a trial basis:
You should observe the following precautions to avoid reconditioning charges in case you later wish to return the unit to
your dealer.
(1) Note the packing technique and save all packing materials. It is not wise to ship in other than the factory carton. (Replacements cost $35.00).
(2) Avoid scratching the paint or plating. Set the unit on soft, clean surfaces.
(3) Do not cut the grounding pin from the line cord.
(4) Use care and proper tools in removing and tightening screws to avoid burring the heads.
(5) Use the nylon-washered rack screws supplied, if possible, to avoid damaging the panel. Support the unit when tightening the screws so that the threads do not scrape the paint inside the slotted holes.
Packing
When you pack the unit for shipping:
(1) Tighten all screws on any barrier strip(s) so the screws do not fall out from vibration.
(2) Wrap the unit in its original plastic bag to avoid abrading the paint.
(3) Seal the inner and outer cartons with tape.
If you are returning the unit permanently (for credit), be sure to enclose:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Manual(s)
The Registration / Warranty Card
The Line Cord
All Miscellaneous Hardware (including the Rack Screws and Keys)
The Extender Card (if applicable)
The Monitor Rolloff Filter(s) (OPTIMOD-AM only)
The COAX Connecting Cable (OPTIMOD-TV and OPTIMOD-TV only)
Your dealer may charge you for any missing items.
If you are returning a unit for repair, do not enclose any of the above items.
Further advice on proper packing and shipping is included in the Manual (see Table of Contents).
Trouble
If you have problems with installation or operation:
(1) Check everything you have done so far against the instructions in the Manual. The information contained therein is
based on our years of experience with OPTIMOD and broadcast stations.
(2) Check the other sections of the Manual (consult the Table of Contents and Index) to see if there might be some suggestions regarding your problem.
(3) After reading the section on Factory Assistance, you may call Orban Customer Service for advice during normal California business hours. The number is (1) 510 / 351-3500.
WARNING
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed
and used as directed by this manual, it may cause interference to radio communication. This
equipment complies with the limits for a Class A computing device, as specified by FCC
Rules, Part 15, subject J, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference when this type of equipment is operated in a commercial environment. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. If it does, the user will be
required to eliminate the interference at the user’s expense.
WARNING
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of
Communications. (Le present appareil numerique n’emet pas de bruits radioelectriques
depassant les limites applicables aux appareils numeriques [de las class A] prescrites dans le
Reglement sur le brouillage radioelectrique edicte par le ministere des Communications du
Canada.)
IMPORTANT
Perform the installation under static control conditions. Simply walking across a rug can generate a static charge of 20,000 volts. This is the spark or shock you may have felt when
touching a doorknob or some other conductive surface. A much smaller static discharge is
likely to destroy one or more of the CMOS semiconductors employed in OPTIMOD-TV. Static
damage will not be covered under warranty.
There are many common sources of static. Most involve some type of friction between two
dissimilar materials. Some examples are combing your hair, sliding across a seat cover or
rolling a cart across the floor. Since the threshold of human perception for a static discharge
is 3000 volts, you will not even notice many damaging discharges.
Basic damage prevention consists of minimizing generation, discharging any accumulated
static charge on your body or workstation, and preventing that discharge from being sent to or
through an electronic component. You should use a static grounding strap (grounded through
a protective resistor) and a static safe workbench with a conductive surface. This will prevent
any buildup or damaging static.
U.S. patents 4,208,548, 4,460,871, 5,737,434, 6,337,999, 6,434,241, 6,618,486, and 6,937,912
protect OPTIMOD 8382. Other patents pending.
Orban and Optimod are registered trademarks.
All trademarks are property of their respective companies.
This manual is part number 96124.110.01. Published December 2007.
© Copyright Orban
7970 South Kyrene, Tempe, AZ 85284 USA
Phone: (1) (480) 403-8300; Fax: (1) (480) 403-8301; E-Mail: [email protected]; Site: www.orban.com
Operating Manual
OPTIMOD-TV
8382
Two-Channel Digital Audio Processor
for Analog Aural FM Carriers
Version 1.1 Software
Table of Contents
Index.........................................................................................................................0-8
Section
1
Introduction
.........................................................................................................................................1-1
ABOUT THIS MANUAL.......................................................................................................1-1
THE OPTIMOD-TV 8382 DIGITAL AUDIO PROCESSOR ........................................................1-1
User-Friendly Interface............................................................................................1-2
Absolute Control of Peak Modulation...................................................................1-2
Flexible Configuration ............................................................................................1-3
Adaptability through Multiple Audio Processing Structures ...............................1-3
Controllable .............................................................................................................1-4
PRESETS IN OPTIMOD-TV ...............................................................................................1-5
Factory Presets .........................................................................................................1-5
User Presets ..............................................................................................................1-5
INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................1-5
Digital AES3 Left/right Input/output......................................................................1-6
Analog Left/right Input/output ..............................................................................1-7
Provisions for Subcarriers........................................................................................1-7
Remote Control Interface .......................................................................................1-7
Computer Interface .................................................................................................1-8
RS-232 Serial Port ............................................................................................................. 1-8
RJ45 Ethernet Connector ................................................................................................. 1-8
LOCATION OF OPTIMOD-TV............................................................................................1-8
Optimal Control of Peak Modulation Levels .........................................................1-8
Best Location for OPTIMOD-TV ..............................................................................1-9
If the transmitter is not accessible:.................................................................................. 1-9
If the transmitter is accessible: ...................................................................................... 1-10
STUDIO-TRANSMITTER LINK .............................................................................................1-11
Transmission from Studio to Transmitter.............................................................1-11
Digital Links .................................................................................................................... 1-11
Composite Baseband Microwave STLs........................................................................... 1-12
Dual Microwave STLs...................................................................................................... 1-13
Video microwave STLs with audio subcarriers:............................................................. 1-14
Analog Landline (PTT / Post Office Line)....................................................................... 1-14
STL and Exciter Overshoot ....................................................................................1-14
USING LOSSY DATA REDUCTION IN THE STUDIO..................................................................1-15
ABOUT TRANSMISSION LEVELS AND METERING ..................................................................1-15
Meters ....................................................................................................................1-15
Fig. 1-1: Absolute Peak Level, VU and PPM Reading.................................................... 1-16
Studio Line-up Levels and Headroom ..................................................................1-16
Transmission Levels................................................................................................1-17
LINE-UP FACILITIES .........................................................................................................1-17
Metering of Levels.................................................................................................1-17
Built-in Calibrated Line-up Tones.................................................................................. 1-17
Built-in Calibrated Bypass Test Mode............................................................................ 1-18
EAS TEST ......................................................................................................................1-18
PC CONTROL AND SECURITY PASSCODE ............................................................................1-19
WARRANTY, USER FEEDBACK ..........................................................................................1-19
User Feedback........................................................................................................1-19
LIMITED WARRANTY .............................................................................................1-19
INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY ...............................................................................1-20
EXTENDED WARRANTY ........................................................................................1-20
Section
2
Installation
.........................................................................................................................................2-1
INSTALLING THE 8382.......................................................................................................2-1
Figure 2-1: AC Line Cord Wire Standard)......................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2: Wiring the 25-pin Remote Interface Connector ........................................... 2-4
8382 REAR PANEL ...........................................................................................................2-5
INPUT AND OUTPUT CONNECTIONS .....................................................................................2-5
Cable.........................................................................................................................2-5
Connectors ...............................................................................................................2-6
Analog Audio Input.................................................................................................2-6
Analog Audio Output .............................................................................................2-6
AES3 Digital Input and Output...............................................................................2-7
Grounding................................................................................................................2-8
Power Ground..........................................................................................................2-8
Circuit Ground .........................................................................................................2-8
8382 FRONT PANEL .........................................................................................................2-9
STUDIO LEVEL CONTROLLER INSTALLATION (OPTIONAL) .......................................................2-11
If you are using Orban 8200ST Studio Level Controller......................................2-11
Figure 2-3: 8200ST Jumper Settings (*Factory Configuration) ..................................... 2-12
QUICK SETUP .................................................................................................................2-13
ANALOG AND DIGITAL I/O SETUP .....................................................................................2-21
AUTOMATION USING THE 8382’S INTERNAL CLOCK ............................................................2-26
SECURITY AND PASSCODE PROGRAMMING .........................................................................2-28
To Create a Passcode: ............................................................................................2-29
To Edit a Passcode:.................................................................................................2-29
To Delete a Passcode: ............................................................................................2-30
To Lock the Front Panel Immediately:..................................................................2-30
To Program local lockout: .....................................................................................2-30
To Unlock the Front Panel: ...................................................................................2-31
Dial-up Networking and the Passcode.................................................................2-31
If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode..................................................................2-31
REMOTE CONTROL INTERFACE PROGRAMMING ..................................................................2-32
NETWORKING AND REMOTE CONTROL ..............................................................................2-33
SYNCHRONIZING OPTIMOD TO A NETWORK TIME SERVER....................................................2-36
Table 2-1: NIST-referenced timeservers ......................................................................... 2-37
INSTALLING 8382 PC REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE ..........................................................2-39
Installing the Necessary Windows Services..........................................................2-39
Check Hardware Requirements ............................................................................2-40
Running the Orban Installer Program..................................................................2-41
Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections ...............................................2-41
Conclusion..............................................................................................................2-42
APPENDIX: SETTING UP SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS .............................................................2-43
Preparing for Communication through Null Modem Cable ..............................2-43
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Direct Serial Connection:..............................2-43
Connecting Using Windows XP Direct Serial Connection ..................................2-48
Preparing for Communication through Modems ...............................................2-53
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Modem Connection ......................................2-53
Connecting using Windows XP Modem Connection ..........................................2-59
UPDATING YOUR 8382’S SOFTWARE.................................................................................2-64
Section
3
Operation
.........................................................................................................................................3-1
8382 FRONT PANEL .........................................................................................................3-1
INTRODUCTION TO PROCESSING..........................................................................................3-2
Some Audio Processing Concepts.................................................................................... 3-2
Distortion in Processing ................................................................................................... 3-3
Loudness, Brightness and Distortion ............................................................................... 3-3
Controlling Dynamic Range............................................................................................. 3-4
Processing for Any Programming .................................................................................... 3-4
Adapting the 8382's Sound to Your Programming...............................................3-4
LESS-MORE........................................................................................................................ 3-4
ABOUT THE 8382’S SIGNAL PROCESSING FEATURES ..............................................................3-5
Signal Flow...............................................................................................................3-5
Two-Band Purist Processing ....................................................................................3-8
Input/output Delay..................................................................................................3-8
CUSTOMIZING THE 8382’S SOUND .....................................................................................3-8
Basic Modify.............................................................................................................3-9
Full Modify ...............................................................................................................3-9
Advanced Modify ..................................................................................................3-10
Gain Reduction Metering .....................................................................................3-10
To Create or Save a User Preset ............................................................................3-11
ABOUT THE PROCESSING STRUCTURES ...............................................................................3-12
FACTORY PROGRAMMING PRESETS ...................................................................................3-14
Table 3-1: Factory Programming Presets....................................................................... 3-15
EQUALIZER CONTROLS ....................................................................................................3-18
Table 3-2: Five-Band Equalization Controls .................................................................. 3-19
STEREO ENHANCER CONTROLS .........................................................................................3-23
Table 3-3: Stereo Enhancer Controls ............................................................................. 3-23
AGC CONTROLS ............................................................................................................3-23
Table 3-4: AGC Controls ................................................................................................. 3-24
Advanced AGC Controls........................................................................................3-27
CLIPPER CONTROLS .........................................................................................................3-28
Table 3-5: Clipper Controls ............................................................................................ 3-29
THE TWO-BAND STRUCTURE ...........................................................................................3-30
Customizing the Settings ......................................................................................3-31
Table 3-6: Two-Band Controls ....................................................................................... 3-31
The Two-Band Structure’s Full and Advanced Setup Controls ...........................3-31
Advanced Two-Band Controls ..............................................................................3-35
THE FIVE-BAND STRUCTURE ............................................................................................3-37
Putting the Five-Band Structure on the Air.........................................................3-37
Customizing the Settings ......................................................................................3-37
The Five-Band Structure’s Full and Advanced Setup Controls ...........................3-38
Table 3-7: Multiband Controls....................................................................................... 3-38
Table 3-8: MB Attack / Release Controls ....................................................................... 3-39
Table 3-9: MB Band Mix Controls .................................................................................. 3-40
Advanced Multiband Controls .............................................................................3-43
Table 3-10: Test Modes .................................................................................................. 3-44
TEST MODES .................................................................................................................3-45
USING THE 8382 PC REMOTE CONTROL SOFTWARE ...........................................................3-45
To set up a new connection:.................................................................................3-46
To initiate communication:...................................................................................3-46
To modify a control setting:..................................................................................3-47
To recall a preset:...................................................................................................3-47
To save a user preset you have created: ..............................................................3-48
To back up User Presets, system files, and automation files onto your computer’s
hard drive:..............................................................................................................3-48
To restore archived presets, system files, and automation files:........................3-49
To modify INPUT/OUTPUT and SYSTEM SETUP:............................................................3-50
To modify AUTOMATION: .........................................................................................3-50
To group multiple 8382s: ......................................................................................3-50
Navigation Using the Keyboard ...........................................................................3-50
To Quit the Program..............................................................................................3-51
About Aliases created by Optimod 8382 PC Remote Software .........................3-51
Multiple Installations of Optimod 8382 PC Remote ...........................................3-51
Section
4
Maintenance
.........................................................................................................................................4-1
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................................4-1
SUBASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT .......................................................................4-2
FIELD AUDIT OF PERFORMANCE..........................................................................................4-6
Table 4-1: Decoder Chart for Power Supervisor .............................................................. 4-8
Table 4-2: Layout Diagram of J7, with expected voltages on each pin ......................... 4-8
Table 4-3: Typical Power Supply Voltages and AC Ripple .............................................. 4-9
Section
5
Troubleshooting
.........................................................................................................................................5-1
PROBLEMS AND POTENTIAL SOLUTIONS ...............................................................................5-1
RFI, Hum, Clicks, or Buzzes ............................................................................................... 5-1
Poor Peak Modulation Control ........................................................................................ 5-1
Audible Distortion On-Air ................................................................................................ 5-2
Audible Noise on Air ........................................................................................................ 5-3
Whistle on Air, Perhaps Only in Stereo Reception.......................................................... 5-3
Interference from stereo into subcarriers........................................................................ 5-4
Shrill, Harsh Sound............................................................................................................ 5-4
Dull Sound......................................................................................................................... 5-4
Commercials Too Loud ..................................................................................................... 5-5
System Will Not Pass Line-Up Tones at 100% Modulation ............................................. 5-5
System Will Not Pass Emergency Alert System (“EAS” USA Standard) Tones at the
Legally Required Modulation Level ................................................................................. 5-5
System Receiving 8382’s Digital Output Will Not Lock................................................... 5-5
L–R (Stereo Difference Channel) Will Not Null With Monophonic Input ...................... 5-5
General Dissatisfaction with Subjective Sound Quality .................................................. 5-6
Security Passcode Lost (When Unit is Locked Out).......................................................... 5-6
Connection Issues between the 8382 and a PC, Modem, or Network ................5-6
Troubleshooting Connections.................................................................................5-7
You Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection to
the 8382: ..................................................................................................................5-7
OS-SPECIFIC TROUBLESHOOTING ADVICE ............................................................................5-8
Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect:..................................................5-8
Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect:...............................................5-9
Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect: ...................................................5-10
Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect: ................................................5-11
TROUBLESHOOTING IC OPAMPS .......................................................................................5-12
TECHNICAL SUPPORT.......................................................................................................5-13
FACTORY SERVICE...........................................................................................................5-13
SHIPPING INSTRUCTIONS ..................................................................................................5-13
Section
6
Technical
Data
.........................................................................................................................................6-1
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................................6-1
Performance.............................................................................................................6-1
Installation ...............................................................................................................6-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................6-4
Overview ..................................................................................................................6-4
Control Circuits ........................................................................................................6-5
User Control Interface and LCD Display Circuits ...................................................6-5
Input Circuits............................................................................................................6-7
Output Circuits.........................................................................................................6-8
DSP Circuit..............................................................................................................6-10
Power Supply .........................................................................................................6-10
ABBREVIATIONS .............................................................................................................6-11
PARTS LIST ....................................................................................................................6-13
Obtaining Spare Parts ...........................................................................................6-13
Base Board .............................................................................................................6-13
CPU Module ...........................................................................................................6-15
RS-232 Board..........................................................................................................6-16
Power Supply .........................................................................................................6-17
Input/Output (I/O) Board ......................................................................................6-18
DSP Board...............................................................................................................6-20
Display Board .........................................................................................................6-22
SCHEMATICS AND PARTS LOCATOR DRAWINGS ...................................................................6-22
Function
Chassis
Base Board
CPU Module
Description
Drawing
Page
Circuit Board Locator and Basic Interconnections
Glue logic; supports CPU module
and RS-232 daughterboard.
Contains:
System Connections
CPU module interface
Power Supply Monitor
CPLD, General Purpose Interface,
and Remotes
Control microprocessor. Services
front panel, serial port, Ethernet,
DSP board, and control board. Resides on base board.
Contains:
Ethernet
General Purpose Bus
Memory
Miscellaneous Functions
Top view
(not to scale)
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-25
Schematic 1 of 4
Schematic 2 of 4
Schematic 3 of 4
Schematic 4 of 4
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-31
Schematic 1 of 5
Schematic 2 of 5
Schematic 3 of 5
Schematic 4 of 5
6-32
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-26
RS-232 Board
Power and Ground Distribution
Supports Serial Port
Power Supply
±15V analog supply; ±5V analog
supply; +5V digital supply
I/O Board
Analog Input/output
AES3 Input/output
Contains:
L and R Analog Inputs
L and R Analog Outputs
Control and Digital I/O
Interface and Power Distribution
DSP Chips; Local +3.3V regulator.
Contains:
DSP Extended Serial Audio Interface (ESAI)
DSP Host Interface
DSP Serial Peripheral Interface,
Power, and Ground
ISA Bus 8-bit I/O
Serial Audio Interface and Clock
Generation
Power Distribution
No-Connects
Front-Panel LCD, LEDs, Buttons,
and Rotary Encoder
DSP Board
Display Board
DSP Block
Diagram
Shows signal processing
Schematic 5 of 5
Parts Locator
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1
Parts Locator
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
6-40
6-41
Schematic 1 of 4
Schematic 2 of 4
Schematic 3 of 4
Schematic 4 of 4
Parts Locator
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 7
6-42
6-43
6-44
6-45
6-46
Schematic 2 of 7
Schematic 3 of 7
6-48
6-49
Schematic 4 of 7
Schematic 5 of 7
6-50
6-51
Schematic 6 of 7
Schematic 7 of 7
Parts Locator
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1
6-52
6-53
6-54
6-47
6-55
6-56
Index
8
8200ST 2- · 11
8382 OPTIMOD-TV 1- · 1
archiving presets 3- · 48
attack 3- · 28
attack time controls 3- · 43
audio
connections 2- · 5
input, connecting 2- · 6
output 2- · 7
output, connecting 2- · 6
A
A/D converter
circuit description 5- · 8
Audio Precision 4- · 6
auditing performance 4- · 6
automation
add event 2- · 27
specification 6- · 2
Abbreviations 6- · 11
AC Line Cord Standard 2- · 2
Advanced Modify 3- · 10
AES/EBU I/O 2- · 7
AES3 status bits 2- · 19
AGC
delete event 2- · 28
edit event 2- · 28
automation 2- · 26
automation 3- · 50
B
bass attack control 3- · 28
bass coupling control 3- · 26
bass release control 3- · 28
bass threshold control 3- · 27
control list 3- · 23
crossover control 3- · 28
defeating 3- · 17, 24
drive control 3- · 24
dual band 3- · 26
external AGC setup 2- · 11
gate threshold control 3- · 25
idle gain control 3- · 27
master attack control 3- · 28
master release control 3- · 25
meter 2- · 10, 2
ratio control 3- · 27
window release control 3- · 27
window size control 3- · 27
AGC 3- · 6
allpass crossover 3- · 28
analog I/O 1- · 7
analog input
circuit description 6- · 7
ref level, I/O setup 2- · 21
analog input 2- · 6
analog landline 1- · 14
analog output
circuit description 6- · 9
analog output 2- · 6
anti-aliased 3- · 30, 43
B4>B5 coupling 3- · 7
backing up presets 3- · 48
balance adjust 2- · 22
balanced
inputs 2- · 6
output, simulates transformer 2- · 6
band coupling 3- · 42
base board
removing 4- · 3
replacing 4- · 5
baseband spectrum
control 3- · 6
Basic Modify 3- · 9
bass clip threshold 3- · 28
bass punch
and the bass clipper 3- · 29
bass threshold 3- · 27
battery
replacing 6- · 5
bit depth of internal processing 6- · 1
block diagram 6- · 56
Brilliance control 3- · 21
BTSC 1- · 10
buttons
escape 2- · 9
escape 3- · 2
modify 2- · 9
modify 3- · 1
next 2- · 9
connecting to 2- · 4
NEXT 3- · 1
interface, specifications 6- · 3
previous 2- · 9
troubleshooting connections 5- · 7
PREVIOUS 3- · 1
Windows 2000 5- · 8
RECALL 2- · 9
Windows XP 5- · 10
RECALL 3- · 1
computer interface
setup 2- · 9
RS-232 2- · 5
setup 3- · 1
soft buttons 2- · 9
buzz 5- · 1
bypass
local 1- · 18
serial 2- · 5
computer interface 1- · 8
connecting
through Win XP direct serial 2- · 48
connection to PC
PC remote 1- · 19
remote interface 1- · 18
troubleshooting 5- · 6
connectors
test mode 1- · 18
audio 2- · 5
input and output 2- · 6
C
cable
shielding 2- · 8
type recommended for analog I/O 2- · 5
contrast 2- · 9
contrast control 3- · 1
control knob 2- · 9
control knob 3- · 1
controls
contrast 2- · 9
chassis
contrast 3- · 1
getting inside 4 · 2
description 3- · 1
ground 2- · 8
circuit board locator drawing 6- · 25
circuit description
control 6- · 5
LCD display 6- · 5
user control interface 6- · 5
circuit description 6- · 4
CIT25 5- · 1
classical 3- · 17
cleaning front panel 4- · 1
clipper
soft buttons 3- · 1
SYNC DELAY 2- · 20
corrosion 4- · 1
CPU board
replacing 4- · 5
CPU module
removing 4- · 3
crossover
allpass 3- · 28
linear phase 3- · 28
modes 3- · 28
bass clip threshold control 3- · 28
control list 3- · 28
final clip drive control 3- · 29
clipper, bass 3- · 7
clock
battery 6- · 5
setting 2- · 26
commercial loudness 5- · 5
common-mode rejection 2- · 8
components
obtaining 6- · 13
composite baseband microwave STL 1- ·
12
compression
defined 3- · 3
compressor gate 3- · 25
computer
D
D/A converter
circuit description 6- · 9
specification 6- · 2
delay
setting processing 2- · 20
delay 3- · 8
Delay 6- · 1
delta release control 3- · 44
digital I/O 1- · 6
digital input
circuit description 6- · 8
digital links 1- · 11
digital output
circuit description 6- · 10
display assembly
removing 4 · 2
display board
F
factory presets
selecting 2- · 18
parts list 6- · 22
replacing 4 · 5
Display mode 2- · 20
distortion
excessive 5- · 6
on material with strong HF content 3- · 30
specification 6- · 1
tv 3- · 15
factory presets 1- · 5
factory service 5- · 13
final clip drive 3- · 29
Firewall 2- · 41, 46
Firmware
updating 8500 2- · 64
testing 4- · 10
troubleshooting 5- · 2
five-band
attack time controls 3- · 43
dither 2- · 25
DJ Bass control 3- · 22
downward expander 3- · 41
DSP
band coupling controls 3- · 42
band threshold control 3- · 40
delta release control 3- · 44
downward expander thresold control 3- · 41
block diagram 6- · 56
full modify control list 3- · 38
circuit description 6- · 10
HF clipper threshold 3- · 43
DSP board
high frequency limiter control 3- · 36, 43
removing 3- · 4
limiter attack control 3- · 44
replacing 4- · 5
maximum distortion control 3- · 36, 43
dual microwave STLs 1- · 13
dual mono 2- · 32
dual-mono 2- · 19
dual-mono 6- · 2
dull sound
multiband drive control 3- · 38
multiband gate threshold control 3- · 40
multiband limit threshold control 3- · 41
multiband limiter drive control 3- · 40
mutiband release control 3- · 39
output mix controls 3- · 42
troubleshooting 5- · 4
five-band 3- · 37
frequency response
E
specification 6- · 1
testing 4- · 9
EAS
modulation low 5- · 5
test tones 1- · 18
easy setup 2- · 13
equalizer
bass shelf 3- · 18
front panel 3- · 1
Full Modify 3- · 9
fuse 2- · 5
G
control list 3- · 18
parametric 3- · 20
equalizer 3- · 6
escape button 2- · 9
escape button 3- · 2
Ethernet 2- · 33, 41, 46
Ethernet cable
crossover 5- · 7
exciter overshoot 1- · 14
external AGC mode 2- · 15
gain redctions meters
toggling between L and R 2- · 10
gain reduction
meters 2- · 10
meters 3- · 2
gain reduction meters
toggling between L and R 3- · 2
gate
threshold control 3- · 40
gate 3- · 25
gate LED 2- · 10, 2
Gateway 2- · 41, 46
gateway address 2- · 34
getting inside the unit 4 · 2
GPI
I/O setup 2- · 21
input/output board
removing 4- · 3
specifications 6- · 3
GPI interface
testing 4- · 11
ground
inspection of package contents 2- · 1
installation procedure 2- · 1
Internet
cannot access 5- · 7
chassis 2- · 9
ground lift switch 2- · 3, 5
grounding
IP address 2- · 33
IP port 2- · 34
circuit 2- · 8
loss of 4- · 1
power 2- · 8
grounding 2- · 8
grouping 8382s 3- · 50
J
J.17
and 8382 digital I/O 1- · 6
and NICAM 1- · 12
H
deemphasis applied to digital audio input 6-
headphones
defined 1- · 6
·3
preemphasis applied to digital audio output
low-delay monitoring 2- · 16, 24
HF enhancer 3- · 7
High Frequency Enhancer 3- · 22
high frequency limiter
6- · 3
L
threshold 3- · 43
high frequency limiter 3- · 7, 36, 42, 43
high-pass filter
30 Hz 3- · 6, 22
latency 3- · 8
LEDs
gate 2- · 10, 2
hum 5- · 1
Less-More
I
Less-More 3- · 24
level
index 3- · 35
I/O
AES/EBU 2- · 7
connections 2- · 3
I/O board
replacing 4- · 5
IC opamps
troubleshooting 5- · 12
ICPM 5- · 1
idle gain 3- · 27
In>Mode 2- · 19
input
analog, connecting 2- · 6
analog, specifications 6- · 2
digital, specifications 6- · 2
meters 2- · 10
input level
line-up 1- · 16
input meters 1- · 17
input meters 3- · 2
input selector
metering 1- · 17
setup 2- · 15
transmission 1- · 17
limiter
attack 3- · 44
limiting
defined 3- · 3
line voltage 2- · 2
linear-phase crossover 3- · 28
line-up tones
system will not pass at 100% modulation 5- ·
5
line-up tones 1- · 17
location 1- · 8
lock
driven equipment cannot lock to 8382 output
5- · 5
lockout
immediate 2- · 30
programming local 2- · 30
unlocking front panel 2- · 31
look-ahead
limiting 3- · 3
multiband llimiter drive 3- · 40
multipath distortion 3- · 23
music/speech detector 3- · 36
lossy data reduction
in studio 1- · 15
NICAM 1- · 12
N
used in STLs · 11
loudness
insufficient 5- · 6
insufficient due to poor peak control 5- · 1
NAB Broadcast and Audio System Test CD
4- · 6
network
Loudness Controller
and 5-Band · 37
Loudness Controller 1- · 3
Loudness Controller 3- · 7, 13
threshold control · 34
loudness controller 5- · 5
Loudness Controller 5- · 37
loudness/distortion tradeoff 3- · 29
L–R will not null 5- · 5
timeserver 2- · 36
networking 2- · 33
NEXT button 2- · 9
NEXT button 3- · 1
NICAM 1- · 12
noise
specification 6- · 1
troubleshooting 5- · 3
null modem cable
communicating through 2- · 43
M
main board
null modem cable 2- · 40
O
reattaching 4 · 5
maximum distortion control 3- · 36, 43
measuring performance 4- · 6
meter
Orban 222 stereo enhancer 3- · 23
output
analog output level trim adjustment 4- · 9
circuit description 6- · 6
analog, connecting 2- · 6
gain reduction 3- · 10
analog, specifications 6- · 2
meters
digital, setting dither 2- · 25
AGC 2- · 10, 2
digital, setting sample rate 2- · 24
circuit description 6- · 6
digital, setting sync 2- · 25
gain reduction 2- · 10
digital, setting word length · 25
gain reduction 3- · 2
digital, specifications 6- · 3
input 2- · 10
input 3- · 2
studio 1- · 15
Mode>Out 2- · 20
modem
preparing for connection 2- · 53
recommended baud rate 2- · 54
setting up 2- · 34
specification for 2- · 40
Windows 2000 configuration 2- · 53
Windows XP configuration 2- · 59
modify button 2- · 9
modify button 3- · 1
modulation control
troubleshooting poor 5- · 1
multiband drive 3- · 38
multiband limit threshold 3- · 41
headphone monitoring, setup 2- · 16, 24
output level
I/O setup 2- · 23, 24
quick setup 2- · 17
output mix controls 3- · 42
overshoot
in exciter 1- · 14
overshoot
reduction 1- · 14
overshoot
excessive 5- · 1
overshoot 1- · 3
overshoot compensator drive 3- · 30
parts list 6- · 17
P
testing 4- · 8
parametric equalizer 3- · 7
parent preset 3- · 35
parts
power supply board
reattaching 4 · 4
removing 4 · 4
pre-emphasis
obtaining 6- · 13
defeating 2- · 16, 17
parts list
base board 6- · 13
CPU module 6- · 15
display board 6- · 22
DSP board 6- · 20
I/O board 6- · 18
quick setup 2- · 14
pre-emphasis 2- · 23
preset
restoring archived 3- · 49
presets
backup 3- · 48
power supply 6- · 17
classical 3- · 17
RS-232 board 6- · 16
customizing 3- · 8
parts list 6- · 13
passcode
factory 1- · 5
factory programming 3- · 14
and dial-up networking 2- · 31
five-band 3- · 12
creating 2- · 29
saving user 3- · 5, 11
deleting 2- · 30
two-band 3- · 13
editing 2- · 29
programming 2- · 28
recovering from lost 2- · 31
PC
Orban installer program 2- · 41
user presets 1- · 5
PREVIOUS button 2- · 9
PREVIOUS button 3- · 1
processing
AGC 3- · 6
PC board locator diagram 6- · 25
PC control
block diagram 6- · 56
distortion in 3- · 3
security 1- · 19
equalization 3- · 6
PC hardware requirements 2- · 40
PC Remote
intelligent clipping 3- · 8
introduction to 3- · 2
aliases 3- · 51
multiband compression 3- · 7
moving alias folders 3- · 52
signal flow 3- · 5
multiple coexisting versions 3- · 51
stereo enhancement 3- · 6
upgrading versions 3- · 51
structures 1- · 3
PC Remote Software 3- · 45
peak control criteria 1- · 8
peak overshoot 5- · 1
peak-to-average ratio 3- · 2
performance
structures 3- · 12
measuring 4- · 6
phase rotator 3- · 6, 23
phase-linear
two-band purist 30 · 8
processing structures
two-band 3- · 15
Proof of Performance 1- · 4
Proof of Performance 3- · 45
protect preset 3- · 17
punch
increasing 3- · 43
system group delay spec · 8
two-band purist processing 3- · 8
phase-linear 1- · 4
port, IP 2- · 34
Ports 2- · 41, 46
power
Q
quick setup 2- · 13
cord 2- · 2, 5
power 2- · 2
power supply
circuit description 6- · 10
R
rack-mounting unit 2- · 3
ratio
AGC 3- · 27
control 3- · 6
limit 3- · 23
rear panel 2- · 5
RECALL button 2- · 9
RECALL button 3- · 1
registration card 2- · 1
remote
PC Remote software 3- · 45
remote control
bypass 1- · 18
connecting 2- · 3
GPI, specifications 6- · 3
wiring 2- · 4
remote control 2- · 5
remote interface
functions controllable by 2- · 32
GPI 1- · 7
programming GPI 2- · 32
testing 4- · 11
wiring 2- · 4
remote interface connector 2- · 5
resolution
specification 6- · 1
RFI 5- · 1
right channel balance
I/O setup 2- · 22
RJ45 jack 2- · 34
routine maintenance 4- · 1
RS232
testing 4- · 11
RS232 board
replacing 4- · 5
RS-232 connector 2- · 5
RS-232 interface
circuit description 6- · 6
removing board 4- · 2
S
screen display 2- · 9
screen display 3- · 1
screens
System Setup 2- · 13
Security
lock immediately 2- · 30
security 1- · 19
security 2- · 28
Serial Communications
setting up 2- · 43
serial connection
setting up direct 2- · 35
serial connector 2- · 5
service 5- · 13
setup
I/O 2- · 21
quick 2- · 13
setup button 2- · 9
setup button 3- · 1
shelving equalizer
bass, slope of 3- · 7
shipping instructions 5- · 13
Show date 2- · 20
shrill sound
troubleshooting 5- · 4
signal flow diagram 6- · 56
soft buttons 2- · 9
soft buttons 3- · 1
Software
updating 8500 2- · 64
software updates 1- · 4
Sound Technology 4- · 6
spare parts
obtaining 6- · 13
specifications 6- · 1
spectrum analyzer 4- · 6
speech/music detector 3- · 36
Stanford Research Systems 4- · 6
station ID
setting 2- · 19
sample rate
at digital output 6- · 3
Status bits, AES3 2- · 19
stereo enhancer 3- · 23
STL
internal, specification 6- · 1
compatibility with 32 kHz sample rate 2- · 7
setting output 2- · 17
overshoot in uncomressed digital 2- · 7
sample rate converter
testing 4- · 10
saving user presets 3- · 5, 11
SCA
interference from stereo 5- · 4
modulation reduction 2- · 19
systems 1- · 11, 12
studio-transmitter link 1- · 11
subassembly removal and replacement 4- ·
2
subcarrier
modulation reduction 2- · 19
subcarrier inputs 1- · 7
subnet mask 2- · 34
switches
ground lift 2- · 3, 5
voltage select 2- · 2, 5
sync delay 2- · 20
system setup
U
unlock front panel 2- · 31
unpacking 2- · 1
Updating software 2- · 64
user presets
archiving 3- · 12
quick setup 2- · 13
creating 3- · 5, 9, 11
System Setup screen 2- · 13
user presets 1- · 5
T
V
TCP/IP
setting parameters 2- · 33
technical support 5- · 20, 13
telephone support 5- · 20, 13
test modes 3- · 45
Threshold
Multiband Speech 3- · 36
threshold control 3- · 40
time
daylight saving 2- · 14
voltage select switch 2- · 2, 5
VPN, setting up 2- · 41, 46
W
warranty 1- · 19
Warranty 1- · 19
warranty 6- · 4
whistle on-air
summer 2- · 14
time & date 2- · 14
timeserver 2- · 36
top cover
reattaching 4 · 5
troubleshooting 5- · 3
window
release control 3- · 27
window size control 3- · 27
Windows
removing 4 · 2
troubleshooting
installing services 2- · 39
Windows 2000
installation 5- · 1
adding direct serial connection 2- · 44, 48,
tv presets 3- · 15
two-band
54, 60
Direct Connect 5- · 8
bass attack control 3- · 36
direct serial connection 2- · 43
bass coupling control 3- · 33
modem connect 5- · 9
modem connection 2- · 53
bass threshold control 3- · 35
clipping control 3- · 34
Windows XP
crossover control 3- · 36
direct connect 5- · 10
drive control 3- · 32
modem configuration 2- · 59
modem connect 5- · 11
full modify controls 3- · 31
gate control 3- · 33
word length
high frequency clip threshold control 3- · 36
at output, specification 6- · 3
high frequency limiting control 3- · 34
setting output 2- · 25
master attack control 3- · 36
master compression threshold 3- · 35
release control 3- · 32
two-band processing structure 3- · 15
two-band structure 3- · 30
X
XLR connector
wiring standard 2- · 7
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Section 1
Introduction
About this Manual
The Adobe pdf form of this manual contains numerous hyperlinks and bookmarks. A
reference to a numbered step or a page number (except in the Index) is a live hyperlink; click on it to go immediately to that reference.
If the bookmarks are not visible, click the “Bookmarks” tab on the left
side of the Acrobat Reader window.
This manual has a table of contents and index. To search for a specific word or
phrase, you can also use the Adobe Acrobat Reader’s text search function.
The OPTIMOD-TV 8382 Digital Audio Processor
Orban’s all-digital OPTIMOD-TV 8382 Audio Processor can help you achieve excellent
audio quality in analog television broadcasting using TV aural carriers with 75 µs or
50 µs pre-emphasis. Because all processing is performed by high-speed mathematical calculations within Motorola DSP56362 Digital Signal Processing chips, the processing has cleanliness, quality, and stability over time and temperature that is unmatched by analog processors.
OPTIMOD-TV 8382 is descended from the industry-standard 8182 and 8282
OPTIMOD-TV audio processors. Thousands of these processors are on the air all over
the world. They have proven that the “OPTIMOD sound” attracts and keeps an audience even in the most competitive commercial environment.
Because OPTIMOD-TV incorporates several audio processing innovations exclusive to Orban products, you should not assume that it can be operated
in the same way as less sophisticated processors. If you do, you may get
disappointing results.
Take a little time now to familiarize yourself with OPTIMOD-TV. A small investment
of your time now will yield large dividends in audio quality.
The rest of Section 1 explains how OPTIMOD-TV fits into the TV broadcast facility.
Section 2 explains how to install it and set it up. Section 3 tells how to operate
OPTIMOD-TV. Sections 4 through 6 provide reference information.
1-1
1-2
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
For best results, feed OPTIMOD-TV unprocessed audio. No other audio processing is necessary or desirable.
If you wish to place level protection prior to your studio / transmitter link (STL), use
an Orban studio level control system expressly designed for this purpose. (At the
time of this writing, this is the Orban 8200ST OPTIMOD-Studio Compressor/limiter /
HF Limiter / Clipper.) The 8200ST can be adjusted so that it substitutes for the broadband AGC circuitry in OPTIMOD-TV, which is then defeated.
User-Friendly Interface
•
An LCD and full-time LED meters make setup, adjustment and programming
of OPTIMOD-TV easy—you can always see the metering while you’re adjusting
the processor. Navigation is by dedicated buttons, soft buttons (whose function is
context-sensitive), and a large rotary knob. The LEDs show all metering functions
of the processing structure (Two-Band or Five-Band) in use.
Absolute Control of Peak Modulation
•
The 8382 provides universal transmitter protection and audio processing
for TV broadcast. It can be configured to interface ideally with any commonly
found transmission system in the world, including EIAJ stereo, BTSC stereo, and
dual-carrier.
•
The 8382’s dual-mono mode allows entirely separate mono programs to be
processed, facilitating dual-language operation.
•
The 8382 provides pre-emphasis limiting for the two standard pre-emphasis
curves of 50µs and 75µs. Its pre-emphasis control is seldom audibly apparent,
producing a clean, open sound with subjective brightness matching the original
program. (For AM aural carriers without pre-emphasis, we recommend Orban’s
Optimod-DTV 6200 processor.)
•
The 8382 achieves extremely tight peak control at all its outputs—analog
left/right and AES3 left/right.
•
The 8382 prevents aliasing distortion in subsequent stereo encoders or transmission links by providing bandwidth-limiting and overshoot-compensated 15
kHz low-pass filters ahead of the 8382’s audio outputs and stereo encoder.
•
Anti-aliased clippers running at 256 kHz sample rate prevent any trace of
“digital clipper” sound.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Flexible Configuration
•
The 8382 includes analog and AES3 digital inputs and outputs. Both digital input and digital output are equipped with sample-rate converters and can operate at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz sample rates. The pre-emphasis
status and output levels are separately adjustable for the analog and digital
outputs.
•
The analog inputs are transformerless, balanced 10kΩ instrumentationamplifier circuits, and the analog outputs are transformerless, balanced, and
floating (with 50Ω impedance) to ensure highest transparency and accurate
pulse response.
•
The 8382 precisely controls the audio bandwidth to 15 kHz. This prevents
overshoots in uncompressed digital links operating at a 32 kHz-sample rate and
prevents interference to the pilot tone and RDS (or RBDS) subcarrier. Because
the stopband of these filters begins at 16 kHz, they are well matched to BTSC
stereo generators—the stereo generator will need to remove very little energy
to protect the pilot tone, minimizing peak modulation overshoot.
•
All input, output, and power connections are rigorously RFI-suppressed to
Orban’s traditional exacting standards, ensuring trouble-free installation.
•
The 8382 is designed and certified to meet all applicable international
safety and emissions standards.
Adaptability through Multiple Audio Processing Structures
•
A processing structure is a program that operates as a complete audio processing system. Only one processing structure can be on-air at a time. OPTIMODTV realizes its processing structures as a series of high-speed mathematical computations made by Digital Signal Processing (DSP) chips.
•
The 8382 features two processing structures: Five-Band for a spectrally consistent sound with good loudness control, and Two-Band with CBS Loudness
Controller for a transparent sound that preserves the frequency balance of the
original program material while also effectively controlling subjective loudness.
The CBS Loudness Controller is not needed with the Five-Band processing
because its spectral consistency creates consistent loudness as a desirable
byproduct.
•
A special Two-Band preset creates a no-compromise “Protect” function that is
functionally similar to the “Protect” structures in earlier Orban digital processors. The Five-Band and the Two-Band structures can be switched via a mute-free
crossfade
1-3
1-4
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
•
The 8382 rides gain over an adjustable range of up to 25dB, compressing dynamic range and compensating for both operator gain-riding errors and gain inconsistencies in automated systems.
•
The 8382’s Two-Band processing structure is phase-linear to maximize audible
transparency.
•
The 8382 uses Orban’s next-generation look-ahead technology to achieve outstandingly clean speech reproduction.
Controllable
•
The 8382 can be remote-controlled by 5-12V pulses applied to eight programmable, optically isolated “general-purpose interface” (GPI) ports.
•
8382 PC Remote software is a graphical application that runs under Windows
2000 and XP. It communicates with a given 8382 via TCP/IP over modem, direct
serial, and Ethernet connections. You can configure PC Remote to switch between many 8382s via a convenient organizer that supports giving any 8382 an
alias and grouping multiple 8382s into folders. Clicking an 8382’s icon causes PC
Remote to connect to that 8382 through an Ethernet network, or initiates a
Windows Dial-Up or Direct Cable Connection if appropriate. The PC Remote
software allows the user to access all 8382 features (including advanced controls
not available from the 8382’s front panel), and allows the user to archive and restore presets, automation lists, and system setups (containing I/O levels, digital
word lengths, GPI functional assignments, etc.).
•
OPTIMOD-TV contains a versatile real-time clock, which allows automation of
various events (including recalling presets) at pre-programmed times.
•
A Bypass Test Mode can be invoked locally, by remote control (from either the
8382’s GPI port or the 8382 PC Remote application), or by automation to permit
broadcast system test and alignment or “proof of performance” tests.
•
OPTIMOD-TV contains a built-in line-up tone generator, facilitating quick and
accurate level setting in any system.
•
OPTIMOD-TV's software can be upgraded by running Orban-supplied
downloadable upgrade software on a PC. The upgrade can occur remotely
through the 8382’s Ethernet port or serial port (connected to an external modem), or locally (by connecting a Windows® computer to the 8382’s serial port
through the supplied null modem cable).
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Presets in OPTIMOD-TV
There are two distinct kinds of presets in OPTIMOD-TV: factory presets and user
presets.
Factory Presets
The Factory Presets are our “factory recommended settings” for various program
formats or types. The description indicates the processing structure and the type of
processing. Each Factory Preset on the Preset list is really a library of more than 20
separate presets, selected by navigating to MODIFY PROCESSING / LESS-MORE and using the LESS-MORE control to adjust OPTIMOD-TV for less or more processing. The
factory presets are listed and described starting on page 3-13.
Factory Presets are stored in OPTIMOD-TV’s non-volatile memory and cannot be
erased. You can change the settings of a Factory Preset, but you must then store
those settings as a User Preset, which you are free to name as you wish. The Factory
Preset remains unchanged.
User Presets
User Presets permit you to change a Factory Preset to suit your requirements and
then store those changes.
You can store more than 100 User Presets, limited only by available memory in your
8382 (which will vary depending on the version of your 8382’s software). You can
give your preset a name up to 18 characters long.
User Presets cannot be created from scratch. You must always start by recalling a
Factory Preset. Make the changes, and then store your modified preset as a User
Preset. You can also recall a previously created user preset, modify it, and save it
again, either overwriting the old version or saving under a new name. In all cases,
the original Factory Preset remains for you to return to if you wish.
User Presets inherit the structure of their parent Factory Presets (Five-Band or TwoBand). The only way you can choose the structure of a factory preset is to edit it
from a Factory preset having that structure (or to edit it from an older User Preset
having the desired structure). You cannot change the structure that an existing User
Preset uses.
User Presets are stored in non-volatile memory that does not require battery
backup. To Create or Save a User Preset on page 3-11 has more about User Presets.
Input/output Configuration
OPTIMOD-TV simultaneously accommodates:
1-5
1-6
INTRODUCTION
•
Digital AES3 left/right inputs and outputs.
•
Analog left/right inputs and outputs.
ORBAN MODEL 8382
OPTIMOD-TV can be operated in either stereo or dual-mono mode. In dual-mono
mode, processing parameters that determine the “sound” of the processor are the
same on both channels.
Dual-mono or stereo mode is a global system parameter. You can change modes
manually, via the 8382’s GPI inputs, via 8382 PC Remote software, or via the 8382’s
built-in time-of-day automation. Further, the 8382 can be programmed to recognize
the “stereo” and “dual-mono” flags in the AES input bitstream and to switch modes
accordingly. It will also set these flags appropriately in its output AES bitstream.
Digital AES3 Left/right Input/output
The digital input and output conform to the professional AES3 standard. They both
have sample rate converters to allow operation at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz
sample frequency.
The left/right digital input is on one XLR-type female connector on the rear panel;
the left/right digital output is on one XLR-type male connector on the rear panel.
OPTIMOD-TV provides digital and analog inputs and outputs. You select whether
OPTIMOD-TV uses the digital or analog input either locally or by remote interface. If
OPTIMOD-TV is set to accept a digital input and the feed fails, OPTIMOD-TV will
automatically switch back to the analog input.
In dual-mono programming, the two programs must be combined into one AES3
stream to be accepted by the 8382. Similarly, the 8382 emits the two processed signals as one AES3 stream.
Level control of the AES3 input is accomplished via software control through System
Setup (see step 5 on page 2-23) or through PC Remote.
Both analog and digital outputs are active continuously.
The 8382’s output sample rate can be locked either to the 8382’s internal crystal
clock or to the sample rate present at its AES3 input.
The 8382 can apply J.17 de-emphasis to signals applied to its digital input and J.17
pre-emphasis to the processed signal emitted from its digital output. J.17 is a 6
dB/octave shelving pre-emphasis / de-emphasis standard with break points at 400 Hz
and 4 kHz. It is mainly used in older studio / transmitter links that use NICAM technology. The 8382’s provisions for J.17 make it fully compatible with systems using
this standard.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Analog Left/right Input/output
The left and right analog inputs are on XLR-type female connectors on the rear
panel. Input impedance is greater than 10kΩ; balanced and floating. Inputs can accommodate up to +27dBu (0dBu = 0.775Vrms).
The left and right analog outputs are on XLR-type male connectors on the rear
panel. Output impedance is 50Ω; balanced and floating. The outputs can drive 600Ω
or higher impedances, balanced or unbalanced. The peak output level is adjustable
from –6dBu to +24dBu.
Level control of the analog inputs and outputs is accomplished via software control
through System Setup (see step 3 on page 2-21 and step 7 on page 2-23) or through
PC Remote.
Provisions for Subcarriers
The correct peak level produced by the principal program modulation sometimes
depends on the number of subcarriers in use. Some regulatory authorities require
that total baseband peak modulation be maintained within specified limits. In this
case, the principal program modulation level must be reduced when a subcarrier is
turned on. The 8382’s remote control feature allows you to reduce the 8382’s output
level (thus reducing the principal program modulation level) by connecting an
on/off signal from your subcarrier generator. (See step 6 on page 2-3.) You define
the amount of reduction in percent using the procedure in step 19 on page 2-19.
See page 2-32 for information on programming the remote control interface.
Remote Control Interface
The Remote Control Interface is a set of eight optically isolated GPI inputs on a DB25 connector, which can be activated by 5-12V DC. They can control various functions of the 8382:
•
Recall any Factory Preset, User Preset, Test Mode state (Bypass or Tone), or exit
from a Test Mode to the previous processing preset.
•
Switch the 8382 to use either the analog input or the digital input.
•
Switch the 8382 between stereo and dual mono modes.
•
Reset the 8382’s internal clock to the nearest hour or to midnight.
You can reconfigure the functions of the eight inputs via System Setup.
For example, if you are not using the stereo encoder, the three inputs
ordinarily dedicated to controlling the state of the stereo encoder can instead be re-configured to call three additional presets.
See page 2-32 for information on programming the remote control interface.
1-7
1-8
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Computer Interface
On the rear panel of the 8382 are an RS-232 serial port and an Ethernet port for interfacing to IBM-compatible PCs. These computer interfaces support remote control
and metering, and allow downloading software upgrades.
Each 8382 package ships with 8382 PC Remote software, an application for any IBMcompatible PC running Microsoft Windows 2000 (Service Pack 3 or higher) or XP.
8382 PC Remote permits you to adjust any 8382 preset by remote control or to do
virtually anything else that you can do from the 8382’s front panel controls. The
program displays all of the 8382’s LCD meters on the computer screen to aid remote
adjustment.
RS-232 Serial Port
8382 PC Remote can communicate at up to 115 kbps via modem or direct connection
between the computer and the 8382 through their RS-232 serial ports.
RJ45 Ethernet Connector
The 8382 can be connected to any Ethernet network that supports the TCP/IP protocol.
See Networking and Remote Control on page 2-33 for more information.
Location of OPTIMOD-TV
Optimal Control of Peak Modulation Levels
The audio processing circuitry in OPTIMOD-TV produces a signal that is preemphasized to either the 50µs or 75µs standard pre-emphasis curve. It is precisely
and absolutely high-frequency-controlled and peak-controlled to prevent overmodulation, and is filtered at 15 kHz to protect the stereo pilot tone (in NTSC systems) and prevent distortion caused by aliasing-related non-linear crosstalk. If this
signal is fed directly into a stereo encoder, peak modulation levels on the air will be
correctly controlled. However, if the audio processor’s signal is fed to the stereo encoder through any circuitry with frequency response errors and/or non-constant
group delay, the peaks will be magnified. Peak modulation will increase, but average modulation will not. The modulation level must therefore be reduced to accommodate the larger peaks. Reduced average modulation level will cause reduced
loudness and a poorer signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver.
Landline equalizers, transformers, and 15 kHz low-pass filters and pre-emphasis
networks in stereo encoders typically introduce frequency response errors and nonconstant group delay. There are three criteria for preservation of peak levels
through the audio system:
1) The system group delay must be essentially constant throughout the frequency
range containing significant energy (30-15,000Hz). If low-pass filters are present,
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
this may require the use of delay equalization. The deviation from linear-phase
must not exceed ±10° from 30-15,000Hz.
2) The low-frequency −3 dB point of the system must be placed at 0.15Hz or lower
(this is not a misprint!). This is necessary to ensure less than 1% overshoot in a
50Hz square wave and essentially constant group delay to 30Hz.
3) Any pre-emphasis used in the audio transmission system prior to the stereo encoder must be canceled by a precisely complementary de-emphasis: Every pole
and zero in the pre-emphasis filter must be complemented by a zero and pole of
identical complex frequency in the de-emphasis network. An all-pole deemphasis network (like the classic series resistor feeding a grounded capacitor) is
not appropriate.
In this example, the network could be fixed by adding a second resistor
between ground and the capacitor, which would introduce a zero.
Low-pass filters (including anti-aliasing filters in digital links), high-pass filters, transformers, distribution amplifiers, and long transmission lines can all cause the above
criteria to be violated, and must be tested and qualified. It is clear that the above
criteria for optimal control of peak modulation levels are most easily met when the
audio processor directly feeds the stereo encoder.
Best Location for OPTIMOD-TV
The preferred location for OPTIMOD-TV is as close as possible to the transmitter, so
that its analog or AES3 audio output can be connected to the transmitter through a
circuit path that introduces the least possible change in the shape of OPTIMOD-TV’s
carefully peak-limited waveform—a short length of shielded cable. If this is impossible, an equivalently accurate arrangement is to feed the 8382’s AES3 digital output
through an all-digital, uncompressed path to the transmitter's exciter.
There are some situations where the stereo encoder and exciter are under the jurisdiction of an independent transmission authority, and where the programming
agency’s jurisdiction ends at the interface between the audio facility and the link
connecting the audio facility to the transmitter. (The link might be telephone / post
lines, analog microwave radio, or various types of digital paths.) This situation is not
ideal because artifacts that cannot be controlled by the audio processor can be introduced by the link to the transmitter, by transmitter peak limiters, or by the external stereo encoder.
If the transmitter is not accessible:
All audio processing must be done at the studio and you must tolerate any damage
that occurs later. In countries using the BTSC or EIAJ stereo systems, if you can obtain
a broadband (0-75 kHz) phase-linear link to the transmitter and the transmitter authority will accept the delivery of a baseband encoded signal, use the 8382 to drive a
stereo encoder at the studio location, and use the baseband output of the stereo
encoder to feed the STL. Then feed the output of the STL receiver directly into the
transmitter’s exciter with no intervening processing.
1-9
1-10
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
If an uncompressed AES3 digital link is available to the transmitter, this is also an excellent means of transmission. However, if the digital link employs lossy compression, it will disturb peak levels by up to 4 dB.
If only an analog or digitally compressed audio link is available, use the 8382’s left
and right audio outputs and feed the audio, without pre-emphasis, directly into the
link. If possible, request that any transmitter protection limiters be adjusted for
minimum possible action—OPTIMOD-TV does most of that work. Transmitter protection limiters should respond only to signals caused by faults or by spurious peaks introduced by imperfections in the link. To ensure maximum quality, all equipment in
the signal path after the studio should be carefully aligned and qualified to meet
the appropriate standards for bandwidth, distortion, group delay and gain stability,
and such equipment should be re-qualified at reasonable intervals. (See Optimal
Control of Peak Modulation Levels on page 1-8).
If the transmitter is accessible:
You can achieve the most accurate control of modulation peaks by locating
OPTIMOD-TV at the transmitter site or by using an uncompressed digital STL to pass
the processed output of OPTIMOD-TV to the transmitter. You can usually also obtain
good results by locating OPTIMOD-TV at the studio and connecting the baseband
output of an external stereo encoder (if used) to the transmitter through a composite baseband STL (see page 1-12). However, many composite baseband STLs do not
control peaks perfectly because of bounce (see page 1-14), and locating OPTIMODTV at the transmitter site (where it can control peaks just prior to the transmitter’s
RF exciter) is thus likely to maximize signal-to-noise ratio by making most efficient
use of the available peak carrier deviation..
Because OPTIMOD-TV controls peaks, it is irrelevant whether the audio link feeding
OPTIMOD-TV’s input terminals is phase-linear. However, the link should have low
noise, the flattest possible frequency response from 30-15,000Hz, and low non-linear
distortion.
If you use a stereo encoder, feed the encoder directly from the 8382’s left and right
analog outputs. If possible, bypass the pre-emphasis network and the input low-pass
filters in the encoder so that they cannot introduce spurious peaks. Because of their
special design, OPTIMOD-TV's pre-emphasis network and low-pass filters perform
the same functions while retaining tight peak control.
In BTSC countries, we recommend using an Orban or CRL BTSC Stereo Encoder, both of which are ideally matched to the 8382. Please see these
units’ Operating Manuals for instructions on how to interface them with
an audio processor. For both units, you will use the 8382’s analog left
and right outputs to do this.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Studio-Transmitter Link
Transmission from Studio to Transmitter
There are several types of studio-transmitter links (STLs) in common use in broadcast
service: uncompressed digital, digital with lossy compression (like MPEG, Dolby®, or
APT-x®), microwave, analog landline (telephone / post line), and audio subcarrier on
a video microwave STL.
STLs are used in three fundamentally different ways. They can either:
•
pass unprocessed audio for application to the 8382’s input, or
•
pass the 8382’s peak-controlled analog or digital left and right audio outputs, or
•
pass the composite stereo baseband output of an external stereo encoder
driven by OPTIMOD-TV’s analog or AES3 output.
The three applications have different performance requirements. In general, a link
that passes unprocessed audio should have very low noise and low non-linear distortion, but its transient response is not important. A link that passes processed audio
does not need as low a noise floor as a link passing unprocessed audio. However, its
transient response is critical. At the current state of the art, an uncompressed digital
link using digital inputs and outputs to pass audio in left/right format achieves best
results. We will elaborate below.
Digital Links
Digital links may pass audio as straightforward PCM encoding, or they may apply
lossy data reduction processing to the signal to reduce the number of bits per second required for transmission through the digital link. Such processing will almost
invariably distort peak levels, so such links must therefore be carefully qualified before you use them to carry the peak-controlled output of the 8382 to the transmitter. For example, the MPEG Layer 2 algorithm can increase peak levels up to 4 dB at
160 kB/sec by adding large amounts of quantization noise to the signal. While the
desired program material may psychoacoustically mask this noise, it is nevertheless
large enough to affect peak levels severely. For any lossy compression system the
higher the data rate, the less the peak levels will be corrupted by added noise, so
use the highest data rate practical in your system.
It is practical (though not ideal) to use lossy data reduction to pass unprocessed audio to the 8382’s input. The data rate should be at least of “contribution quality”—
the higher, the better. If any part of the studio chain is analog, we recommend using
at least 20-bit A/D conversion before encoding.
Because the 8382 uses multiband limiting, it can dynamically change the frequency
response of the channel. This can violate the psychoacoustic masking assumptions
made in designing the lossy data reduction algorithm. Therefore, you need to leave
“headroom” in the algorithm so that the 8382’s multiband processing will not un-
1-11
1-12
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
mask quantization noise. This is also true of any lossy data reduction applied in the
studio (such as hard disk digital delivery systems).
For MPEG Layer 2 encoding, we recommend 384 kB/second or higher.
Some links may use straightforward PCM (pulse-code modulation) without lossy
data reduction. If you connect to these through an AES3 digital interface, these can
be very transparent provided they do not truncate the digital words produced by
the devices driving their inputs. Because the 8382’s output is tightly band-limited to
15 kHz, it can be passed without additional overshoot by equally well by any link
with 32 kHz or higher sample frequency.
Currently available sample rate converters use phase-linear filters (which have constant group delay at all frequencies). If they do not remove spectral energy from the
original signal, the sample rate conversion, whether upward or downward, will not
add overshoot to the signal. This is not true of systems that are not strictly bandlimited to 15 kHz, where downward sample rate conversion will remove spectral energy and will therefore introduce overshoot.
If the link does not have an AES3 input, you must drive its analog input from the
8382’s analog output. This is less desirable because the link’s analog input circuitry
may not meet all requirements for passing processed audio without overshoot.
NICAM is a sort of hybrid between PCM and lossy data reduction systems. It uses
J.17 pre-emphasis and a block-companded floating-point representation of the signal.
Older technology converters (including some older NICAM encoders) may exhibit
quantization distortion unless they have been correctly dithered. Additionally, they
can exhibit rapid changes in group delay around cut-off because their analog filters
are ordinarily not group-delay equalized. The installing engineer should be aware of
all of these potential problems when designing a transmission system.
Any problems can be minimized by always driving a digital STL with the 8382’s AES3
digital output, which will provide the most accurate interface to the STL. The digital
input and output accommodate sample rates of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz,
and 96 kHz.
Composite Baseband Microwave STLs
The composite baseband microwave STL carries the stereo baseband in the BTSC and
EIAJ systems, and therefore receives the output of a stereo encoder located at the
studio site. The composite STL receiver’s output is the stereo baseband signal, which
is applied directly to the wideband input of the TV broadcast transmitter’s exciter.
Thus, no stereo encoder is needed at the transmitter.
In general, a composite microwave STL provides good audio quality as long as there
is a line-of-sight transmission path from studio to transmitter of less than 10 miles
(16 km). If not, RF signal-to-noise ratio, multipath distortion, and diffraction effects
can cause serious quality problems. Where a composite STL is used, use the 8382’s
stereo encoder to drive the composite STL transmitter.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Dual Microwave STLs
Dual microwaves STLs use two separate transmitters and receivers to pass the left
and right channels in discrete form. Dual microwave STLs offer greater noise immunity than composite microwave STLs. However, problems include gain- and phasematching of the left and right channels, overloads induced by pre-emphasis, and requirements that the audio applied to the microwave transmitters be processed to
prevent over-modulation of the microwave system.
Lack of transparency in the path will cause overshoot. Unless carefully designed,
dual microwave STLs can introduce non-constant group delay in the audio spectrum,
distorting peak levels when used to pass processed audio. Nevertheless, in a system
using a microwave STL, the 8382 is sometimes located at the studio and any overshoots induced by the link are tolerated or removed by the transmitter’s protection
limiter (if any). The 8382 can only be located at the transmitter if the signal-to-noise
ratio of the STL is good enough to pass unprocessed audio. The signal-to-noise ratio
of the STL can be used optimally if an Orban 8200ST Compressor/limiter / HF Limiter /
Clipper or an Orban Transmission Limiter protects the link from overload.
If the 8382 is located at the transmitter and fed unprocessed audio from a microwave STL, it may be useful to use a companding-type noise reduction system (like
dbx Type 2 or Dolby SR) around the link. This will minimize any audible noise
buildup caused by compression within the 8382.
Some microwave links can be modified such that the deviation from linear phase is
less than +10° from 20 Hz to 15 kHz and frequency response is less than 3 dB down
at 0.15Hz and less than 0.1 dB down at 20 kHz. This specification results in less than
1% overshoot with processed audio. Many such links have been designed to be easily configured at the factory for composite operation, where an entire stereo baseband is passed. The requirements for maintaining stereo separation in composite
operation are similar to the requirements for high waveform fidelity with low overshoot. Therefore, most links have the potential for excellent waveform fidelity if
they are configured for composite operation (even if a composite TV stereo signal is
not actually being applied to the link).
Nevertheless, in a dual-microwave system, the 8382 is usually located at the main TV
transmitter and is driven by the microwave receivers. One of Orban’s studio level
control systems, such as the 8200ST, protects the microwave transmitters at the studio from overload. The studio level control system also performs the gain riding
function ordinarily executed by the AGC section of the 8382’s processing and optimize the signal-to-noise ratio obtainable from the dual-microwave link.
If the STL microwave uses pre-emphasis, its input pre-emphasis filter will probably
introduce overshoots that will increase peak modulation without increasing average
modulation. If the studio level control system can produce a pre-emphasized output,
we strongly recommend defeating the microwave STL’s pre-emphasis and performing pre-emphasis in the studio level control system. This frees the system from potential overshoot.
The Orban 8200ST can be readily configured to produce a preemphasized output.
1-13
1-14
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Further, it is common for a microwave STL to bounce because of a large infrasonic
peak in its frequency response caused by an under-damped automatic frequency
control (AFC) phase-locked loop. This bounce can increase the STL’s peak carrier deviation by as much as 2dB, reducing average modulation. Many commercial STLs
have this problem.
Video microwave STLs with audio subcarriers:
Many video microwave STLs provide several audio subcarriers above the video baseband (typically between about 6 and 8 MHz). Some of these subcarriers have sufficient bandwidth to pass composite stereo, while others are only suited for 5015,000Hz audio.
The performance of such audio subcarriers should be qualified in exactly the same
way as composite and dual microwave STLs, respectively. Please refer to the discussions on composite and dual microwave STLs in this section of the manual.
Analog Landline (PTT / Post Office Line)
Analog landline quality is extremely variable, ranging from excellent to poor.
Whether landlines should be used or not depends upon the quality of the lines locally available, and upon the availability of other alternatives. Due to line equalizer
characteristics and phase shifts, even the best landlines tend to veil audio quality
slightly. They will certainly be the weakest link in a TV broadcast chain.
Slight frequency response irregularities and non-constant group delay characteristics
will alter the peak-to-average ratio, and will thus reduce the effectiveness of any
peak limiting performed prior to their inputs.
STL and Exciter Overshoot
Earlier in this section, we discussed at length what is required to prevent STLs from
overshooting. There are similar requirements for TV exciters. Nevertheless, in some
installations some overshoot is inevitable. If this is a problem in your installation, the
8382’s remote control feature offers the means to reduce the peak level of the
8382’s audio output as necessary. This way, you can still use the 8382’s line-up tone
to adjust the steady-state deviation to ±75 kHz. Yet, the reduced peak level of the
audio emitted from the 8382 ensures that the carrier deviates no further than ±75
kHz after overshoot. This overshoot reduction can be selected on the Input/output
screen, and the remote operation can be selected in System Setup: Network / Remote.
Note that it is normal for BTSC stereo encoders to introduce a moderate amount of
fast peak overshoot because their input low-pass filters are not overshoot compensated. This does not ordinarily cause any operational problems. Because the output
bandwidth of the 8382 is effectively limited to 16 kHz, these filters are required to
do a minimum amount of work, which minimizes such overshoot.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Using Lossy Data Reduction in the Studio
Many broadcasters are now using lossy data reduction algorithms like MPEG-1 Layer
2 or Dolby AC2 to increase the storage time of digital playback media. In addition,
source material is often supplied through a lossy data reduction algorithm, whether
from satellite or over landlines. Sometimes, several encode / decode cycles will be
cascaded before the material is finally presented to OPTIMOD-TV’s input.
All such algorithms operate by increasing the quantization noise in discrete frequency bands. If not psychoacoustically masked by the program material, this noise
may be perceived as distortion, “gurgling,” or other interference. Psychoacoustic
calculations are used to ensure that the added noise is masked by the desired program material and not heard. Cascading several stages of such processing can raise
the added quantization noise above the threshold of masking, making it audible.
In addition, at least one other mechanism can cause the noise to become audible at
the radio. OPTIMOD-TV’s multiband limiter performs an “automatic equalization”
function that can radically change the frequency balance of the program (sometimes by more than 10 dB). This can cause noise that would otherwise have been
masked to become unmasked because the psychoacoustic masking conditions under
which the masking thresholds were originally computed have changed. Accordingly,
if you use lossy data reduction in the studio, you should use the highest data rate
possible. This maximizes the headroom between the added noise and the threshold
where it will be heard. In addition, you should minimize the number of encode and
decode cycles because each cycle moves the added noise closer to the threshold
where the added noise is heard.
About Transmission Levels and Metering
Meters
Studio engineers and transmission engineers consider audio levels and their measurements differently, so they typically use different methods of metering to monitor
these levels. The VU meter is an average-responding meter (measuring the approximate RMS level) with a 300ms rise time and decay time; the VU indication usually
under-indicates the true peak level by 8 to 14dB. The Peak Program Meter (PPM) indicates a level between RMS and the actual peak. The PPM has an attack time of
10ms, slow enough to cause the meter to ignore narrow peaks and under-indicate
the true peak level by 5 dB or more. The absolute peak-sensing meter or LED indicator shows the true peak level. It has an instantaneous attack time, and a release
time slow enough to allow the engineer to read the peak level easily. Fig. 1-1 shows
the relative difference between the absolute peak level, and the indications of a VU
meter and a PPM for a few seconds of music program.
1-15
1-16
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
ABSOLUTE PEAK
PPM
VU
Fig. 1-1: Absolute Peak Level, VU and PPM Reading
Studio Line-up Levels and Headroom
The studio engineer is primarily concerned with calibrating the equipment to provide the required input level for proper operation of each device, and so that all devices operate with the same input and output levels. This facilitates patching devices
in and out without recalibration.
For line-up, the studio engineer uses a calibration tone at a studio standard level,
commonly called line-up level, reference level, or operating level. Metering at the
studio is by a VU meter or PPM (Peak Program Meter). As discussed above, the VU or
PPM indication under-indicates the true peak level. Most modern studio audio devices have a clipping level of no less than +21dBu, and often +24dBu or more. So the
studio standardizes on a maximum program indication on the meter that is lower
than the clipping level, so those peaks that the meter does not indicate will not be
clipped. Line-up level is usually at this same maximum meter indication. In facilities
that use VU meters, this level is usually at 0VU, which corresponds to the studio
standard level, typically +4 or +8dBu.
For facilities using +4dBu standard level, instantaneous peaks can reach +18dBu or
higher (particularly if the operator overdrives the console or desk). Older facilities
with +8dBu standard level and equipment that clips at +18 or +21dBu will experience noticeable clipping on some program material.
In facilities that use the BBC-standard PPM, maximum program level is usually PPM4
for music, PPM6 for speech. Line-up level is usually PPM4, which corresponds to
+4dBu. Instantaneous peaks will reach +17dBu or more on voice.
In facilities that use PPMs that indicate level directly in dBu, maximum program and
line-up level is often +6dBu. Instantaneous peaks will reach +11dBu or more.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
Transmission Levels
The transmission engineer is primarily concerned with the peak level of a program
to prevent overloading or over-modulation of the transmission system. This peak
overload level is defined differently, system to system.
In FM modulation (FM / VHF radio and television broadcast, microwave or analog
satellite links), it is the maximum-permitted RF carrier frequency deviation. In AM
modulation, it is negative carrier pinch-off. In analog telephone / post / PTT transmission, it is the level above which serious crosstalk into other channels occurs, or
the level at which the amplifiers in the channel overload. In digital, it is the largest
possible digital word.
For metering, the transmission engineer uses an oscilloscope, absolute peak-sensing
meter, calibrated peak-sensing LED indicator, or a modulation meter. A modulation
meter usually has two components—a semi-peak reading meter (like a PPM), and a
peak-indicating light, which is calibrated to turn on whenever the instantaneous
peak modulation exceeds the overmodulation threshold.
Line-Up Facilities
Metering of Levels
The meters on the 8382 show left/right input levels and left/right output modulation. Left and right input level is shown on a VU-type scale (0 to –40dB), while the
metering indicates absolute instantaneous peak (much faster than a standard PPM
or VU meter). The input meter is scaled so that 0 dB corresponds to the absolute
maximum peak level that the 8382 can accept (+26 dBu). If you are using the AES3
digital input, the maximum digital word at the input corresponds to the 0 dB point
on the 8382’s input meter.
Built-in Calibrated Line-up Tones
To facilitate matching the output level of the 8382 to the transmission system that it
is driving, the 8382 contains an adjustable test tone oscillator that produces sine
waves at 8382’s (analog or digital) left and right outputs.
When the 8382’s left/right analog output is switched to FLAT, a de-emphasis filter is
inserted between output of the 8382’s audio processing and its line output. Thus, as
the frequency of the test tone is changed, the level at the 8382’s line output will follow the selected de-emphasis curve. In most cases the pre-emphasis filter in the
driven equipment will undo the effect of the 8382’s internal de-emphasis, so the
8382’s output level should be adjusted such that the tone produces 100% modulation of the transmission link as measured after the link’s pre-emphasis filter. At
100Hz, switching the de-emphasis out or in will have negligible effect on the level
appearing at the 8382’s left and right audio outputs.
1-17
1-18
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
You can adjust the frequency and modulation level of the built-in line-up tone via
the front panel or PC Remote software. You can use the front panel, the PC Remote
software, or the opto-isolated remote control interface ports to activate the Test
Tone.
Built-in Calibrated Bypass Test Mode
A BYPASS Test Mode is available to transparently pass line-up tones generated earlier in the system. It will also pass program material, with no gain reduction or protection against overmodulation. It can transparently pass any line-up tone applied
to its input up to about 130% output modulation, at which point clipping may occur.
EAS Test
For stations participating in the Emergency Alert System (EAS) in the United States,
broadcast of EAS tones and data can be accomplished in three different ways:
1. Run EAS tones and data through the 8382.
Note that 8382 processing may not allow the full modulation level as required by
EAS standards. It may therefore be necessary to temporarily defeat the 8382’s
processing during the broadcast of EAS tones and data. Placing the 8382 in its
BYPASS Test Mode can defeat the processing. The BYPASS GAIN control sets a
fixed gain through the 8382. See “Test Modes,” on page 3-45 for more information.
2. Place the 8382 in Bypass mode locally.
A) Navigate to SETUP / MODE and set MODE to BYPASS.
You can set the bypass gain with the BYPASS GAIN control located to the
right of the MODE control.
B) Begin EAS broadcast.
After the EAS broadcast, resume normal processing:
C) Set the MODE to OPERATE.
This will restore the processing preset in use prior to the Test Mode.
3. Place the 8382 in Bypass mode by remote control. Then program any
two Remote Interface inputs for “Bypass” and “Exit Test,” respectively.
A) Connect two outputs from your station remote control system to the
REMOTE INTERFACE connector on the rear panel of the 8382, according to
the wiring diagram in Figure 2-2 on page 2-4.
B) Program two GPI ports for BYPASS and EXIT TEST according to the instructions
in Remote Control Interface Programming starting on page 2-32.
C) Place the 8382 in bypass mode by remote control.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INTRODUCTION
a) Switch the 8382 into BYPASS mode by a momentary command from your
station’s remote control to the GPI port programmed as BYPASS.
b) Begin EAS broadcast.
c) When the EAS broadcast is finished, switch the 8382 from BYPASS mode by
a momentary command from your station’s remote control to the GPI port
programmed as EXIT TEST.
You may also choose to insert EAS broadcast tones and data directly into the
transmitter, thus bypassing the 8382 for the duration of the EAS tones and data
broadcast.
PC Control and Security Passcode
PC software control provides access to OPTIMOD-TV via network, modem or direct
(null modem cable) connection, with IBM PC-compatible computers running Windows 2000 or XP. PC access is permitted only with a valid user-defined passcode.
PC remote control can be ended from the front panel; this feature effectively prevents simultaneous remote and local control.
See Security and Passcode Programming (starting on page 2-29) for more detail.
Warranty, User Feedback
User Feedback
We are very interested in your comments about this product. We will carefully review your suggestions for improvements to either the product or the manual. Please
email us at [email protected].
LIMITED WARRANTY
[Valid only for products purchased and used in the United States]
Orban warrants Orban products against defects in material or workmanship for a
period of two years from the date of original purchase for use, and agrees to repair
or, at our option, replace any defective item without charge for either parts or labor.
IMPORTANT: This warranty does not cover damage resulting from accident, misuse
or abuse, lack of reasonable care, the affixing of any attachment not provided with
the product, loss of parts, or connecting the product to any but the specified receptacles. This warranty is void unless service or repairs are performed by an authorized
service center. No responsibility is assumed for any special, incidental, or consequential damages. However, the limitation of any right or remedy shall not be effective
where such is prohibited or restricted by law.
1-19
1-20
INTRODUCTION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Simply take or ship your Orban products prepaid to our service department. Be sure
to include a copy of your sales slip as proof of purchase date. We will not repair
transit damage under the no-charge terms of this warranty. Orban will pay return
shipping. (See Technical Support on page 5-13.)
No other warranty, written or oral, is authorized for Orban Products.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights that vary
from state to state. Some states do not allow the exclusion of limitations of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts,
so the above exclusions and limitations may not apply to you.
INTERNATIONAL WARRANTY
Orban warrants Orban products against evident defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of original purchase for use. This warranty does not cover damage resulting from misuse or abuse, or lack of reasonable
care, or inadequate repairs performed by unauthorized service centers. Performance
of repairs or replacements under this warranty is subject to submission of this Warranty/Registration Card, completed and signed by the dealer on the day of purchase,
and the sales slip. Shipment of the defective item is for repair under this warranty
will be at the customer’s own risk and expense. This warranty is valid for the original
purchaser only.
EXTENDED WARRANTY
Any time during the initial two-year Warranty period (but not thereafter), you may
purchase a three-year extension to the Warranty (yielding a total Warranty period
of five years) by remitting to Orban ten percent of the gross purchase price of your
Orban product. This offer applies only to new Orban products purchased from an
authorized Orban Dealer. To accept the extended five-year warranty, please sign and
date below and fax this copy along with a copy of your original invoice (showing
date of purchase) to Gareth Paredes at (510) 351-0500.
I ACCEPT THE EXTENDED FIVE-YEAR WARRANTY
__________________________________________________________________________
DATE______________________________________________________________________
MODEL NUMBER: 8382
SERIAL NUMBER____________________________________________________________
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
Section 2
Installation
Installing the 8382
Allow about 2 hours for installation.
Installation consists of: (1) unpacking and inspecting the 8382, (2) checking the line
voltage setting, fuse, and power cord, (3) setting the Ground Lift switch, (4) mounting the 8382 in a rack, (5) connecting inputs, outputs and power, (6) optional connecting of remote control leads and (7) optional connecting of computer interface
control leads.
When you have finished installing the 8382, proceed to “Quick Setup,” on page 213.
DO NOT connect power to the unit yet!
1. Unpack and inspect.
If you note obvious physical damage, contact the carrier immediately to make a
damage claim. Packed with the 8382 are:
1ea.
Operating Manual
2ea.
Line Cords (domestic, European)
2ea.
Fuses ( ½-A-250V Slow-Blow for 115V; 250mA-250V for 230V)
2ea.
Fuse holders (gray for 115V fuses and black for 230V fuses)
4ea.
Rack-mounting screws, 10-32 x ½—with washers, #10
1ea.
Null modem cable (for software upgrades and PC Remote connection)
1ea.
PC Remote Software CD
Save all packing materials! If you should ever have to ship the 8382 (e.g., for servicing), it is best to ship it in the original carton with its packing materials because both the carton and packing material have been carefully designed to protect the unit.
Complete the Registration Card and return it to Orban. (please)
2-1
2-2
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
The Registration Card enables us to inform you of new applications, performance improvements, software updates, and service aids that may be
developed, and it helps us respond promptly to claims under warranty
without our having to request a copy of your bill of sale or other proof
of purchase. Please fill in the Registration Card and send it to us today.
(The Registration Card is located after the cover page).
Customer names and information are confidential and are not sold to
anyone.
2. Check the line voltage, fuse and power cord.
DO NOT connect power to the unit yet!
A) Check the VOLTAGE SELECT switch. This is on the rear panel.
The 8382 is shipped from the factory with the VOLTAGE SELECT switch set
to the 230V position. Check and set the VOLTAGE SELECT switch to your
local voltage requirements. To change the operating voltage, set the
VOLTAGE SELECT to 115V (for 90-130V) or 230V (for 200-250V) as appropriate.
B) Install the proper fuse and fuse holder, per your country’s standards.
The 8382 is shipped from the factory with the fuse, and fuse holder removed. Select the appropriate fuse holder and fuse from the supplied
parts in the accessory kit. Use the gray fuse holder for domestic / 115V
operation, or the black fuse holder for European / 230V operation. For
safety, use ½-A-250V Slow-Blow for 115V, or 250mA-250V for 230V.
TYPE 18/3 SVT COR, TYP
(3 x .82 mm 2 )
WIRE COLOR
CONDUCTOR
NORMAL
ALT
BLACK
L
LINE
BROWN
N
NEUTRAL
BLUE
WHITE
E EARTH GND GREEN-YELLOW
GREEN
PLUG FOR
115 VAC
(USA)
TYPE H05VV - F - 0.75
CONDUCTOR
WIRE COLOR
L
LINE
BROWN
N
NEUTRAL
BLUE
E EARTH GND GREEN-YELLOW
PLUG FOR
230 VAC
(EUROPEAN)
Figure 2-1: AC Line Cord Wire Standard)
C) Check the power cord.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
AC power passes through an IEC-standard mains connector and an RF filter designed to meet the standards of all international safety authorities.
The power cord is terminated in a “U-ground” plug (USA standard), or
CEE7 / 7 plug (Continental Europe), as appropriate to your 8382’s Model
Number. The green / yellow wire is connected directly to the 8382 chassis.
If you need to change the plug to meet your country’s standard and you
are qualified to do so, see Figure 2-1. Otherwise, purchase a new mains
cord with the correct line plug attached.
3. Set Ground Lift switch.
The GROUND LIFT switch is located on the rear panel.
The GROUND LIFT switch is shipped from the factory in the GROUND position, (to
connect the 8382’s circuit ground to its chassis ground). This is almost always optimum.
4. Mount the 8382 in a rack.
The 8382 requires two standard rack units (3 ½ inches / 12.7 cm).
There should be a good ground connection between the rack and the 8382 chassis—check this with an ohmmeter to verify that the resistance is less than 0.5Ω.
Mounting the unit over large heat-producing devices (such as a vacuum-tube
power amplifier) may shorten component life and is not recommended. Ambient
temperature should not exceed 45°C (113°F) when equipment is powered.
Equipment life will be extended if the unit is mounted away from sources of vibration, such as large blowers and is operated as cool as possible.
5. Connect inputs and outputs.
See the hookup and grounding information on the following pages.
TOPIC
PAGE
Audio Input and Audio Output Connections.............................................2-5
AES3 Digital Input and Output ...................................................................2-7
Grounding ...................................................................................................2-8
6. Connect remote control interface. (optional)
For a full listing of 8382’s extensive remote control provisions, refer to Remote
Control Interface Programming on page 2-32.
Optically isolated remote control connections are terminated in a type DB-25
male connector located on the rear panel. It is wired according to Figure 2-2. To
select the desired function, apply a 5-12V AC or DC pulse between the appropriate REMOTE INTERFACE terminals. The (−) terminals can be connected together
and then connected to ground at pin 1 to create a Remote Common. A currentlimited +12VDC source is available on pin 25. If you use 48V, connect a 2kΩ
2-3
2-4
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
±10%, 2-watt carbon composition resistor in series with the Remote Common or
the (+) terminal to provide current limiting.
In a high-RF environment, these wires should be short and should be run
through foil-shielded cable, with the shield connected to CHASSIS GROUND at
both ends.
PIN ASSIGNMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22-24.
25.
DIGITAL GOUND
REMOTE
1+
REMOTE
2+
REMOTE
3+
REMOTE
4+
REMOTE
5+
REMOTE
6+
REMOTE
7+
REMOTE
8+
TALLY
1
TALLY
2
N/C
ANALOG GROUND
REMOTE
1REMOTE
2REMOTE
3REMOTE
4REMOTE
5REMOTE
6REMOTE
7REMOTE
8N/C
+12 VOLTS DC
REMOTE INTERFACE
Figure 2-2: Wiring the 25-pin Remote Interface Connector
7. Connect to a computer
You can connect to a computer via the 8382’s serial connector or via an Ethernet
network. (See Networking on page 2-33.)
Because procedures and instructions for connecting to a PC are subject to development and change, we have placed these instructions in a file called
8382_Vxxx_installation.pdf (where xxx represents the version number of
the software). You can access this file from the Orban / Optimod 8382 folder in
your computer’s Start Menu after you have run Orban’s PC Remote installer
software.
You must have the 8382 PC Remote application installed on your computer before you upgrade your 8382’s firmware because 8382 PC Remote
manages the upgrade.
You can use Adobe’s .pdf reader application to open and read this file. If you do
not have the .pdf reader, it is available for free download from www.adobe.com.
See Installing 8382 PC Remote Control Software on page 2-39 for more detail.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
This file is also available from the / 8382 / Documentation / Vxxx folder at Orban’s
ftp site, ftp.orban.com.
8382 Rear Panel
The Ground Lift Switch can be set to connect the 8382’s circuit ground to its chassis ground (in the GROUND position). In the LIFT position, it breaks that connection.
(See Set Ground Lift switch on page 2-3.)
The Voltage Select switch can be set to 115V (for 90-130V operation) or 230V (for
180-260V operation).
Fuse values can be changed to support 115V or 230V operation. For safety, use ½-A250V Slow-Blow for 115V, or 250mA-250V for 230V.
The Power Cord is detachable and is terminated in a “U-ground” plug (USA standard), or CEE7 / 7 plug (Continental Europe), as appropriate to your 8382’s Model
Number.
An RS-232 (PC Remote) Computer Interface, labeled SERIAL PORT, is provided to
connect the 8382 to IBM PC-compatible computers, directly or via modem, for remote control, metering and software downloads.
A Remote Interface Connector allows you to connect the 8382 to your existing
transmitter remote control or other simple contact-closure control devices. The 8382
remote control supports user-programmable selection of up to eight optically isolated inputs for any one of the following parameters: recalling any factory- or user
presets, tone or bypass modes, selecting stereo encoder modes (stereo, dual-mono),
selecting analog, digital or digital+J.17 input, overshoot compensation, SCA modulation compensation, and clock synchronization. (See Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2-32.) The 8382 remote control accepts a DB-25 connector.
The Ethernet Port accepts a 10Mb/second or 100Mb/second Ethernet connection
terminated with an RJ45 connector.
Digital AES3 Input and Output are provided to support two-channel AES3standard digital audio signals through XLR-type connectors.
Analog Inputs and Outputs are provided to support left and right audio signals
through XLR-type connectors.
Input and Output Connections
Cable
We recommend using two-conductor foil-shielded cable (such as Belden 8451 or
equivalent) for the audio input and output connections because signal current flows
2-5
2-6
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
through the two conductors only. The shield does not carry signal and is used only
for shielding.
Connectors
•
Input and output connectors are XLR-type connectors.
In the XLR-type connectors, pin 1 is CHASSIS GROUND, while pin 2 and
pin 3 are a balanced, floating pair. This wiring scheme is compatible with
any studio-wiring standard: If pin 2 or 3 is considered LOW, the other pin
is automatically HIGH.
Analog Audio Input
•
Nominal input level between –14dBu and +8dBu will result in normal operation
of the 8382.
(0dBu = 0.775Vrms. For this application, the dBm @600Ω scale on voltmeters can be read as if it were calibrated in dBu.)
•
The peak input level that causes overload is +27.0dBu.
•
The electronically balanced input uses an ultra low noise and distortion differential amplifier for best common mode rejection, and is compatible with most professional and semi-professional audio equipment, balanced or unbalanced, having a source impedance of 600Ω or less. The input is EMI suppressed.
•
Input connections are the same whether the driving source is balanced or unbalanced.
•
Connect the red (or white) wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#2 or #3)
that is considered HIGH by the standards of your organization. Connect the black
wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2) that is considered LOW by
the standards of your organization.
•
In low RF fields (like a studio site not co-located with an RF transmitter), connect
the cable shield at 8382 input only—it should not be connected at the source
end. In high RF fields (like a transmitter site), also connect the shield to pin 1 of
the male XLR-type connector at the 8382 input.
•
If the output of the driving unit is unbalanced and does not have separate
CHASSIS GROUND and (–) (or LOW) output terminals, connect both the shield and
the black wire to the common (–) or ground terminal of the driving unit.
Analog Audio Output
•
Electronically balanced and floating outputs simulate a true transformer output.
The source impedance is 50Ω. The output is capable of driving loads of 600Ω or
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
higher; the 100% modulation level is adjustable with the AO 100% control over
a –6dBu to +24dBu range. The outputs are EMI suppressed.
•
If an unbalanced output is required (to drive unbalanced inputs of other equipment), it should be taken between pin 2 and pin 3 of the XLR-type connector.
Connect the LOW pin of the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2, depending on your
organization’s standards) to circuit ground; take the HIGH output from the remaining pin. No special precautions are required even though one side of the
output is grounded.
•
Use two-conductor foil-shielded cable (Belden 8451, or equivalent).
•
At the 8382’s output (and at the output of other equipment in the system), do
not connect the cable’s shield to the CHASSIS GROUND terminal (pin 1) on the
XLR-type connector. Instead, connect the shield to the input destination. Connect the red (or white) wire to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#2 or #3) that
is considered HIGH by the standards of your organization. Connect the black wire
to the pin on the XLR-type connector (#3 or #2) that is considered LOW by the
standards of your organization.
AES3 Digital Input and Output
There are two AES3 inputs (one AES3 audio and one AES11 sync) and one AES3 output. The program input and output are both equipped with sample rate converters
and can operate at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, and 96 kHz. The sync input can receive AES11
house sync. You can force the output sample rate to be genlocked to signal appearing at either the sync input or the audio input. The output can also sync to the
8382’s internal clock.
Per the AES3 standard, each digital input or output line carries both the
left and right stereo channels. The connection is 110Ω balanced. The
AES3 standard specifies a maximum cable length of 100 meters. While
almost any balanced, shielded cable will work for relatively short runs (5
meters or less), longer runs require used of 110Ω balanced cable like
Belden 1800B, 1801B (plenum rated), multi-pair 180xF, 185xF, or 78xxA.
Single-pair category 5, 5e, and 6 Ethernet cable will also work well if you
do not require shielding. (In most cases, the tight balance of Category
5/5e/6 cable makes shielding unnecessary.)
The AES3id standard is best for very long cable runs (up to 1000 meters).
This specifies 75Ω unbalanced coaxial cable, terminated in BNC connectors. A 110Ω/75Ω balun transformer is required to interface an AES3id
connection to your Optimod’s digital input or output.
The digital input clip level is fixed at 0 dB relative to the maximum digital
word. The maximum digital input will make the 8382 input meters display 0dB. The reference level is adjustable using the DI REF control.
The 8382 is a “multirate” system and its internal sample rate is 32 kHz
and multiples thereof (up to 512 kHz). The output is strictly band-limited
to 16 kHz. Therefore, the output can pass through a 32 kHz uncompressed link with bit-for-bit transparency. Because sample rate conversion
2-7
2-8
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
is a phase-linear process that does not add bandwidth, the 8382’s output
signal will continue to be compatible with 32 kHz links even if it undergoes intermediate sample rate conversions (for example, 32 kHz to 48
kHz to 32 kHz).
Grounding
Very often, grounding is approached in a “hit or miss” manner. However, with care
it is possible to wire an audio studio so that it provides maximum protection from
power faults and is free from ground loops (which induce hum and can cause oscillation).
In an ideal system:
•
All units in the system should have balanced inputs. In a modern system with
low output impedances and high input impedances, a balanced input will provide common-mode rejection and prevent ground loops—regardless of whether
it is driven from a balanced or unbalanced source.
•
The 8382 has balanced inputs. Its subcarrier inputs are unbalanced, but frequency response is rolled off at low frequencies to reject hum.
•
All equipment circuit grounds must be connected to each other; all equipment
chassis grounds must be connected together.
•
In a low RF field, cable shields should be connected at one end only—preferably
the source (output) end.
•
In a high RF field, audio cable shields should be connected to a solid earth
ground at both ends to achieve best shielding against RFI.
•
Whenever coaxial cable is used, shields are automatically grounded at both ends
through the terminating BNC connectors.
Power Ground
•
Ground the 8382 chassis through the third wire in the power cord. Proper
grounding techniques never leave equipment chassis unconnected to power /
earth ground. A proper power ground is essential for safe operation. Lifting a
chassis from power ground creates a potential safety hazard.
Circuit Ground
To maintain the same potential in all equipment, the circuit (audio) grounds must be
connected together:
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
•
Circuit and chassis ground should always be connected by setting the 8382’s
GROUND LIFT switch to its GROUND connect position.
•
In high RF fields, the system is usually grounded through the equipment rack in
which the 8382 is mounted. The rack should be connected to a solid earth
ground by a wide copper strap—wire is completely ineffective at VHF because of
the wire’s self-inductance.
8382 Front Panel
•
Screen Display labels the four soft buttons and provides control-setting information.
•
Screen Contrast button adjusts the optimum viewing angle of the screen display.
•
Four Soft buttons provide access to all 8382 functions and controls. The functions of the soft buttons change with each screen, according to the labels at the
bottom of each screen.
•
Next and Prev (← and →) buttons scroll the screen horizontally to accommodate menus that cannot fit in the available space. They also allow you to move
from one character to the next when you enter data into your 8382.
These flash when they are ready to perform a function. Otherwise, they
are dark.
•
Control Knob is used to change the setting that is selected by the soft buttons.
To change a value, you ordinarily have to hold down a soft button while you are
turning the control knob.
•
Recall button allows you recall a Factory or User Preset.
Selecting the Recall button does not immediately recall a preset. See step
17 on page 2-18 for instructions on recalling a preset.
•
Modify button brings you to list of controls that you can use to edit a Factory or
User Preset. If you edit a Factory Preset, you must save it as a new User Preset to
retain your edit.
•
Setup button accesses the technical parameters necessary to match the 8382 to
your transmission system.
•
Escape button provides an escape from current screen and returns the user to
the next higher-level screen. Repeatedly pressing Escape will always return you
to the Idle screen, which is at the top level of the screen hierarchy.
2-9
2-10
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
•
Input meters show the peak input level applied to the 8382’s analog or digital
inputs with reference to 0 = digital full-scale. If either input meter’s red segment
lights up, you are overdriving the 8382’s analog to digital converter. This is a very
common cause of audible distortion.
•
AGC meter shows the gain reduction of the slow two-band AGC processing that
precedes the multi-band compressor. Full-scale is 25 dB gain reduction. You can
switch the meter so that it reads the gain reduction of the Master (above-200
Hz) band, the Bass (below-200Hz) band, or the difference between the gain reductions in the Master and Bass bands.
The latter reading is useful for assessing the dynamic bass equalization
that the AGC produces, and it helps you set the AGC BASS COUPLING
control.
•
Gate LED indicates gate activity, lighting when the input audio falls below the
threshold set by the AGC gate threshold control (via the Full Modify screen’s
AGC GATE control). When this happens, the AGC’s recovery time is slowed to
prevent noise rush-up during low-level passages.
There is also an independent gate for the multiband compressor (2-band
and 5-band). You can only see its action from the Optimod PC Remote
software.
•
Gain Reduction meters show the gain reduction in the multiband compressor.
Full-scale is 25 dB gain reduction.
When the Multiband structure is operating, all the meters indicate gain
reduction.
When the Two-Band structure is operating, the two leftmost meters indicate gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands, the two middle meters
indicate the gain reduction in the two-band high frequency limiter, and
the rightmost meter indicates the action of the HF Enhancer.
When the processing is in dual-mono mode, the gain reduction meters
can be toggled between channel 1 or channel 2 via SETUP/METERMODE or,
when you are in the Main screen, by pressing the PREV button for channel 1 and the NEXT button for channel 2. Meanwhile, the PC Remote application displays both channels’ gain reductions simultaneously.
•
Output Level meters show the instantaneous peak output of the processed audio in units of percentage modulation.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
Studio Level Controller Installation (optional)
[Skip this section if you are not using a studio level controller ahead of the 8382.
Continue with “Quick Setup” on page 2-13.]
If you are using Orban 8200ST Studio Level Controller
If the STL uses pre-emphasis, its input pre-emphasis network will probably introduce
overshoots that will increase peak modulation without any increase in average
modulation. We therefore strongly recommend that the STL transmitter’s preemphasis be defeated (freeing the STL from such potential overshoot), and that the
8200ST be used to provide the necessary pre-emphasis.
If the STL transmitter’s pre-emphasis cannot be defeated, then configure the 8200ST
for flat output. In this case, average modulation levels of the STL may have to be reduced to accommodate the overshoots. These issues are extensively discussed starting on page 1-8.
1. Configure the 8200ST’s internal jumpers.
A) Remove all screws holding the 8200ST’s cover in place; then lift it off.
Refer to Figure 2-3 on page 2-12.
B) Place jumper JA in the CLIPPER ON position.
C) If you have defeated the STL transmitter’s pre-emphasis, place jumpers JE and
JF in the PRE-EMPHASIZED position.
D) If you cannot defeat the STL transmitter’s pre-emphasis, place jumpers JE and
JF in the FLAT position.
E) Replace the top cover, and then replace all screws snugly. (Be careful not to
strip the threads by fastening the screws too tightly.)
2. Install the 8200ST in the rack. Connect the 8200ST’s audio input and output.
Refer to the 8200ST Operating Manual if you require information about installation, audio input, and audio output connections to the 8200ST.
3. Set 8200ST Output Level with tone.
A) Press the TONE button on the 8200ST.
The TONE lamp should light and the modulation meters should indicate
“0.” If they do not, re-strap jumpers JB and JC to “peak.” (Refer to Figure
2-3 on page 2-12.)
The 8200ST is now producing a 400Hz sine wave at each output. The
peak level of this tone corresponds to 100% modulation.
2-11
2-12
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
JE
JF
TOP OF MAIN BOARD
JB
JA
Clipper Jumpers
*CLIPPER ON
Output Pre-Emphasis Jumpers
*FLAT
PRE-EMPHASIZED
CLIPPER OFF
LEFT
OUTPUT
JA
JC
JA
RIGHT
OUTPUT
JE
JF
Line-up Level Jumpers
*PEAK
LEFT
OUTPUT
JB
AVG
RIGHT
OUTPUT
JC
LEFT
OUTPUT
JB
RIGHT
OUTPUT
JC
Figure 2-3: 8200ST Jumper Settings (*Factory Configuration)
LEFT
OUTPUT
JE
RIGHT
OUTPUT
JF
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
B) Adjust the 8200ST’s L OUT and R OUT controls so that the STL transmitter is being driven to 100% modulation.
The L OUT and R OUT controls are now correctly calibrated to the transmitter. If no significant overshoot occurs in the transmitter, the MODULATION
meter will now give an accurate indication of peak modulation of the
STL.
C) Turn off the tone by pressing the TONE button.
If the STL transmitter suffers from bounce or overshoot, you may have to
reduce the L OUT and R OUT control settings to avoid peak overmodulation caused by overshoots on certain audio signals.
4. Set controls for normal operation with program material.
The following assumes that a VU meter is used to determine 8200ST line drive
levels with program material.
A) Set the controls as follows:
HF LIMITER... Set to match the pre-emphasis of the transmission system
L&R Out ............................................................................... do not change
GATE .................................................................................................... 12:00
RELEASE ............................................................................................... 12:00
VOICE ......................................................................................................OFF
AGC ..........................................................................................................ON
COUPLE ....................................................................................................ON
B) Feed the 8200ST either with tone at your system reference level (0VU), or with
typical program material at normal levels.
C) Adjust the GAIN REDUCTION control for the desired amount of gain reduction.
If the STL uses pre-emphasis, its input pre-emphasis network will probably introduce overshoots that will increase peak modulation without any
increase in average modulation. We therefore strongly recommend that
the STL transmitter’s pre-emphasis be defeated (freeing the STL from
such potential overshoot), and that the 464A be used to provide the necessary pre-emphasis.
We recommend 8-15 dB gain reduction for most formats.
If the STL transmitter’s pre-emphasis cannot be defeated, configure the
8200ST for flat output. In this case, average modulation levels of the STL
may have to be reduced to accommodate the overshoots.
Quick Setup
Quick Setup guides you through 8382 setup. It is appropriate for users without special or esoteric requirements. Following this section, you can find more detailed information regarding setup beyond the Quick Setup screens. In most cases, you will
not need this extra information.
2-13
2-14
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
For the following adjustments, use the appropriately labeled soft button to choose
the parameter you wish to adjust. To change a parameter (like an output level), it is
usually necessary to hold down the soft button while turning the knob. However, if
there is only one parameter on a screen (like choosing 50 or 75µs pre-emphasis), you
can change this with the knob alone. (You do not have to hold down a button.) Let
the text on the screen guide you through the process.
1. Press the front-panel Setup button.
2. Press the Quick Setup soft button when its label appears on the display.
Quick Setup presents a guided sequence of screens into which you must insert information about your particular requirements. In general, the screens are selfexplanatory.
Use the NEXT and PREV buttons to navigate between screens. These buttons will
flash to indicate that they are active.
3. Set the time.
A) Press the NEXT button.
The set time screen appears.
B) Hold down the appropriate soft button while turning the knob to enter the
hour, minute, and seconds. Enter seconds slightly ahead of the correct time.
C) Wait until the entered time agrees with the correct time. Then press the
ENTER TIME button to set the clock.
4. Set the date.
Hold down the appropriate soft button while turning the knob to enter the day,
month, and year.
5. Set up Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time).
A) Turn the knob to specify the date at which Daylight Saving Time begins in
your area.
B) Press the NEXT button.
C) Turn the knob to specify the date at which Daylight Saving Time ends in your
area.
6. Set pre-emphasis.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) Select the pre-emphasis (either 75µS or 50µS) used in your country by turning
the knob.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
7. Set external AGC mode.
Most of the processing structures in the 8382 control level with a preliminary
AGC (Automatic Gain Control). If you are using a suitable Automatic Gain Control at the studio (such as an Orban 8200ST OPTIMOD-Studio or 464A CoOperator), the AGC in the 8382 should be defeated. This is so that the two AGCs
do not “fight” each other, and so they do not simultaneously increase gain, resulting in increased noise.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) Set external AGC mode by turning the knob.
a) Set the field to YES if you have a external AGC (such as an Orban 8200ST
OPTIMOD-Studio, Orban 464A Co-Operator, or similar AGC) installed at
your studio feeding the studio-to-transmitter link. This setting
appropriately defeats the 8382’s AGC for all presets.
b) Set the field to NO If you do not have a external AGC installed; this setting
enables the 8382 AGC status to be determined by the selected preset.
If you are using an Orban 4000 Transmission Limiter, set field to NO (so
that the AGC function in the 8382 continues to work). The Orban 4000 is
intended for transmission system overload protection; it is normally operated below threshold. It is not designed to perform an AGC or gainriding function and it cannot substitute for the AGC function in the 8382.
8. Select your primary input (analog or digital).
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) If your main input source is digital, turn the knob to select DIGITAL or
DIGITAL+J17. Otherwise, select ANALOG.
The only digital encoding that typically uses J.17 pre-emphasis (of which
we are aware) is NICAM. DIGITAL, not DIGITAL+J17, is appropriate for almost anyone using the digital input.
9. Set operating levels.
You will set the operating levels of the 8382 to match the input levels it is receiving so the 8382’s AGC can operate in the range for which it was designed. There
are separate settings for the analog and digital inputs. If you provide both analog and digital inputs to the 8382, optimum adjustment is achieved when the
gain reduction meters show the same amount of processing for both analog and
digital inputs.
This will allow you to switch between analog and digital inputs without
sudden level changes.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) Feed normal program material to the 8382.
C) Play program material from your studio, peaking at normal program levels
(typically 0VU if your console uses VU meters).
2-15
2-16
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
D) [Skip this step if you are not using the analog input.]
Hold down the ANALOG soft button and adjust the knob so that the AGC
meter indicates an average of 10 dB gain reduction.
E) [Skip this step if you are not using the digital input.]
Hold down the DIGITAL soft button and adjust the knob so that the AGC
meter indicates an average of 10 dB gain reduction.
10. Set the analog output source.
If you do not need the 8382’s analog output to drive a transmitter, you can configure it to receive the output of a special low-delay version of the multiband
compressor. This signal is suited for driving headphones for talent speaking live
on-air. The input/output delay is approximately five milliseconds. Even though
normal 8382 presets have a delay of about 20 ms (which most talent can learn to
use without discomfort, although they may need some time to become accustomed to it), the low-delay output will cause less bone conduction comb filtering. However, in most cases, the low-delay output will not be necessary to ensure
adequate talent comfort.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) [Skip this step if you will not be using the analog output.]
To configure the Analog Output for low-delay monitoring, turn the knob
to choose MONITOR. Otherwise, choose XMITTER.
If you configured the Analog Output for low-delay monitoring, sure that
you set the analog output pre-emphasis control to FLAT in step 11 above.
CAUTION: The low-delay output has no peak limiting and is therefore
not suited for driving a transmitter. If you use the low delay output, you
must drive your transmitter with the AES3 digital output.
If you use the low-delay output to drive your studio monitor speakers as
well as talent headphones (which may be necessary if your facility has
only one monitor input for both), then we recommend connecting a lossof-carrier alarm to one of the 8382’s GPI inputs. Program this input to
mute the monitor output in the event that carrier is lost. This simulates
normal “off air” monitor functionality and immediately alerts the staff if
the transmitter goes off the air unexpectedly.
You can program any GPI input for Monitor Mute functionality. See step
(19.C) on page 2-19 for information on how to program a GPI input.
11. Set analog output to be flat or pre-emphasized.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) [Skip this step if you will not be using the analog output.]
Turn the knob to choose PRE-E (for pre-emphasis) or FLAT.
If you will use the analog output to drive a stereo encoder, PRE provides
the best performance because the stereo encoder that receives the analog output does not have to restore the pre-emphasis. However, if you
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
cannot defeat the pre-emphasis in your stereo encoder, or if you will use
the analog output for monitoring, set the output Flat.
If you are sending the analog output of the 8382 through a digital link
that uses lossy compression (like MPEG, APT-X, or Dolby), set the output
FLAT. Lossy codecs cannot handle pre-emphasized signals.
If you are going to use the analog output for headphone monitoring (see
step 10 below), set the output FLAT.
12. Set digital output to be flat or pre-emphasized.
(See the notes in step 11 on page 2-16.)
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) [Skip this step if you will not be using the digital output.]
Turn the knob to choose PRE-E (for a 50 or 75µs pre-emphasized output),
J.17 (for a J.17 pre-emphasized output), PRE+J17 (for 50 or 75µs preemphasis cascaded with J.17 pre-emphasis), or FLAT (which applies 50 or
75µs de-emphasis after the processing).
Regardless of the setting of this control, the processing is always internally pre-emphasized and thus always controls peaks to follow the 50 or
75µs pre-emphasis curve.
13. Set the digital output sample rate.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) [Skip this step if you will not be using the digital output.]
Turn the knob to set the Digital OUTPUT SAMPLE RATE to 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2,
or 96 kHz.
The internal sample rate converter sets the rate at the 8382’s digital output. This adjustment allows you to set the output sample rate to ensure
compatibility with equipment requiring a fixed sample rate. In all cases,
the 8382’s fundamental sample rate is 32 kHz, ensuring that the output
bandwidth is always strictly limited to 16 kHz and that the processed signal can be passed through a 32 kHz uncompressed STL without addition
of overshoot.
14. Prepare to set output levels.
A) Press the NEXT button.
You can use either program material or tone to set the output level (and
thus, the on-air modulation).
•
To use tone, press the YES button.
•
To use program material, press the NO button.
2-17
2-18
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
15. Set the digital output level.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) [Skip this step if you are not using the digital output.]
Turn the knob to set the desired digital output level corresponding to
100% modulation, in units of dB below full-scale.
The most accurate way to set this control is by observing a modulation
monitor or analyzer connected to your transmitter.
16. Set the analog output level.
A) Press the NEXT button.
B) [Skip this step if you are not using the analog output.]
Turn the knob to set the desired analog output level corresponding to
100% modulation, in units of dBu (0 dBu = 0.776 Vrms).
The most accurate way to set this control is by observing a modulation
monitor or analyzer connected to your transmitter.
If you have set Analog Output Feeds: Monitor in step 10 on page 2-16,
the peak level will not be well controlled because no peak limiting has
been applied to this signal.
C) Press the NEXT button.
If you activated the modulation setup tone in step (14.A) on page 2-17,
the tone will turn off automatically.
D) Press the NEXT button.
17. Choose a processing preset.
A) Turn the knob until your desired preset is visible in the lower line of the display.
B) Press the RECALL NEXT button to put your desired preset on-air.
This step selects the processing to complement various program formats.
After this step, you can always select a different processing preset, program the 8382 to automatically change presets on a time / date schedule,
use a GPI input to trigger preset changes, modify presets to customize
your sound, and store these presets as User Presets.
Preset names are just suggestions. Feel free to audition different presets
and to choose those whose sound you prefer.
You can easily modify a preset later with the 8382’s one-knob LESS-MORE
feature. Refer to Section 3.
Congratulations! You are now on the air with your initial sound. Feel free to
read the material in Section 3 of this manual, which describes the various presets
and how you can customize them to achieve your desired signature sound.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
18. Complete Station ID (optional).
The Station ID is an optional setting that you can provide to associate the 8382
with the station providing the program material (e.g., “Z-100”). The name can be
up to eight characters long. It is used to identify your 8382 to Orban’s 8382 PC
Remote application, and appears on the Main Screen when the 8382 is being
controlled by the PC Remote application.
A) Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / TIME DATE AND ID / STATION ID.
B) Use the knob to set the each character in the ID. Use the NEXT and PREV buttons to control the cursor position.
C) When finished entering your name, press the SAVE button. If you escape to
the main screen from Setup, you can now see the station name toggle on the
main screen.
19. Set up modulation reduction to compensate for subcarriers (optional).
In most television applications, this function will not be needed.
A) Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / MODULATION REDUCTION.
B) Hold down the appropriate MODULATION REDUCTION button and turn the knob
to set the amount of modulation reduction produced by the MODULATION
REDUCTION 1 and MODULATION REDUCTION 2 functions.
You can program these to be activated via any rear-panel GPI input, or by
the 8382’s clock-based automation.
When both modulation reduction functions are active, the modulation
reduction is the sum of their settings.
The Modulation Reduction function is active as long as signal is applied
to its associated GPI input.
C) Program the GPI input(s).
a) Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / NETWORK&REMOTE / REMOTE INTERFACE.
b) Using the NEXT button, scroll the screen until you see the button
corresponding to the GPI terminal you wish to program.
c) Hold down this button and turn the knob until you see MOD. REDUCTION 1 or
MOD. REDUCTION 2 as desired.
To program clock-based automation to activate modulation reduction, follow
the instructions found in Automation on page 2-26.
20. Set up handling of AES3 status bits (optional).
The default behavior of the 8382 is to ignore AES status bits because many pieces
of external equipment handle these incorrectly. However, the 8382 allows the
AES3 “channel mode” determine its operating mode (stereo or dual-mono). The
AES3 channel mode specification provides for “two-channel mode” (corresponding to 8382 dual-mono mode) with bits 1-4 in byte 1 in the pattern “0001,” and
2-19
2-20
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
“stereophonic mode” (corresponding to 8382 stereo mode) with these bits in the
pattern “0100.”
The 8382 can also emit these status bits at its digital output to control downstream equipment.
A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG OUT CALIB and set the DIGITAL FORMAT to AES.
SPDIF cannot be used to handle status bits.
B) To enable the 8382 to change its operating mode in response to AES status
bits received at its AES input:
a) Navigate to SETUP / NETWORK&REMOTE / AES STAT BITS.
b) Set IN>MODE to ON.
Unless you are sure that upstream equipment will correctly format these
bits, set IN>MODE to OFF.
c) Make sure that the equipment driving the 8382 is formatting its output as
AES3. SPDIF will not work.
C) To send “two-channel mode” and “stereophonic mode” bits indicating the
8382's current operating mode, set MODE>OUT to ON.
If this parameter is set to OFF, then the 8382 will output “0000” (“mode
not indicated’). This is probably the safest available mode if you are uncertain whether downstream equipment can respond appropriately to
these bits.
21. Set the Processing Delay (optional).
[20 ms], [30 fps], [29.97 fps], [25 fps], [24 fps]
OPTIMOD-TV can add time delay to make its input/output delay exactly one
frame, using a variety of different standards. The selections are MINIMUM (depends on processing structure in use; typically between 20 and 23 ms), 30 fps,
29.97 fps (NTSC color video), 25 fps (most PAL video), and 24 fps (film).
Navigate to SETUP / I/O CALIB / DIG OUT CALIB / PROC DELAY and set the delay as
required.
22. Set the main display mode (optional).
You can choose how the main display indicates on-air operating parameters by
navigating to SETUP / SHOW DATE. Choose YES to make the display toggle automatically once every two seconds, displaying the largest range of information.
Choose NO to make the display static, showing the time, the on-air preset, the
active input, and whether the stereo or dual-mono mode is active.
The following material provides detailed instructions on how to set up the 8382. If
QUICK SETUP does not fully address your setup needs or if you wish to customize
your system beyond those provided with QUICK SETUP, then you may need the additional information in the sections below. However, for most users, this material is
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
only for reference because QUICK SETUP has enabled them to set up the 8382 correctly.
Analog and Digital I/O Setup
For the following adjustments, use the appropriately labeled soft button to choose
the parameter to be adjusted. To change a parameter (like an output level), it is
usually necessary to hold down the soft button while turning the knob.
1. Temporarily set the external AGC mode to “No.”
A) Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / NEXT / EXT AGC and set EXT AGC to NO.
If you are using a external AGC like the Orban 8200ST, you should restore
this setting to YES after the setup procedure is complete.
2. Adjust Input selector.
A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / ANLG IN CALIB / INPUT.
B) Set the INPUT to Analog.
The 8382 will automatically switch to analog input if signal lock is unavailable at the AES3 input.
3. Adjust Analog Input Reference Level.
[−9dBu to +13dBu (VU), or –2 to +20dBu (PPM)] in 0.5 dB steps
The reference level VU and PPM (Peak) settings track each other with an offset
of 8dB. This compensates for the typical indications with program material of a
VU meter versus the higher indications on a PPM.
This step sets the center of the 8382’s gain reduction range to the level to which
your studio operators peak their program material on the studio meters. This assures that the 8382’s processing presets will operate in their preferred range.
You may adjust this level with a standard reference / line-up level tone from your
studio or with program material.
Note that in this step, you are calibrating to the normal indication of the studio
meters; this is quite different from the actual peak level.
If you know the reference VU or PPM level that will be presented to the 8382, set
the reference level to this level, but please verify it with the steps shown directly
below.
A) Press the RECALL button.
B) Turn the knob until 5B GENERAL PURP appears in the lower line of the display.
C) Press the RECALL NEXT button.
2-21
2-22
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
D) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / ANLG IN CALIB / AI REF (VU or PPM, depending on
which metering system you use).
E) Calibrate using Tone.
[Skip to step (F) if you are using Program material to calibrate the 8382 to
your standard studio level.]
a) Verify EXT AGC is set to NO.
Refer to step 1 on page 2-21.
b) Feed a tone at your reference level to the 8382
If you are not using a studio level controller, feed a tone through your
console at normal program levels (typically 0VU if your console uses VU
meters).
If you are using a studio level controller that performs an AGC function,
such as an Orban 8200ST OPTIMOD-Studio, adjust it for normal operation.
c) Adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) control to make the 8382’s AGC meter
indicate 10 dB gain reduction.
d) Skip to step (G).
F) Calibrate using Program.
[Skip this step if you are using Tone to calibrate the 8382 to your standard studio level—see step (D) above.]
a) Verify EXT AGC is set to NO.
Refer to step 1 on page 2-21.
b) Feed normal program material to the 8382
Play program material from your studio, peaking at the level to which
you normally peak program material (typically 0VU if your console uses
VU meters).
c) Adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) control to make the 8382’s AGC meters
indicate an average of 10 dB gain reduction when the console’s VU meter
or PPM is peaking at its normal level.
If the AGC gain reduction meter averages less than 10 dB gain reduction
(higher on the meter), re-adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) to a lower level.
If the AGC gain reduction meter averages more gain reduction (lower on
the meter), re-adjust the AI REF (VU or PPM) to a higher level.
G) When finished, reset EXT AGC to YES, if required (e.g., if that was its setting
prior to setting AI REF (VU or PPM) level).
Refer to step 1 on page 2-21.
4. Adjust Right Channel Balance.
[Skip this step if the channels are already satisfactorily balanced.]
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
[−3 dB to +3dB] on right channel only, 0.1 dB steps
Adjust the R CH BAL control to achieve correct left/right channel balance.
This is not a balance control like those found in consumer audio products. This control changes gain of the right channel only. Use this control
if the right analog input to the 8382 is not at exactly the same level as
the left input. Be certain that the imbalance is not caused by one program source, but is instead introduced through distribution between the
console output and 8382 input. This adjustment is best accomplished by
playing program material that is known to be monophonic or by setting
the mixing console into mono mode (if available).
5. Adjust the Digital Input Reference Level and Right Balance controls.
[Skip this step if you will not be using the digital input.]
A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG IN CALIB / INPUT and set the input to Digital.
B) Repeat steps 1 through 4 (starting on page 2-21), but use the DI REF (VU OR
PPM) and R CH BAL controls for the digital section.
6. Configure Pre-emphasis Outputs
Navigate to SETUP / STEREO MODE / NEXT / PRE-EMPH. Set the pre-emphasis to 50µs
or 75µs, depending on your country’s standard.
You can specify the amount by which the 8382 automatically reduces main and
stereo subchannel modulation to accommodate subcarriers within the modulation limits specified by the governing authority. See step 19 on page 2-19.
7. Set analog output and configuration level.
A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / ANLG OUT CALIB / AO PRE-E. Set the analog output pre-emphasis to PRE-E (for pre-emphasis) or FLAT.
If you will use the analog output to drive a stereo encoder, PRE-E provides the best performance because the stereo encoder does not have to
restore the pre-emphasis. However, if you cannot defeat the preemphasis in your stereo encoder or if you will use the analog output for
monitoring, set the output FLAT.
If you are sending the analog output of the 8382 through a digital link
that uses lossy compression (like MPEG, APT-X, or Dolby), set the output
Flat. Lossy codecs cannot handle pre-emphasized signals.
If you are going to use the analog output for headphone monitoring [see
step (C) below], set the output FLAT.
B) You can use either program material or tone to set your output level (and
thus, your on-air modulation). If you want to use tone, turn on the 400Hz
calibration tone. To do this:
a) Navigate to SETUP / TEST.
b) Set the MODE to TONE.
c) Set TONE FREQ to 400 HZ.
2-23
2-24
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
d) Set TONE LVL to 100%.
e) Press the NEXT key.
f) Set TONE CHAN to L+R.
g) Verify that PILOT is ON.
h) When you have finished with the tone, set the MODE to OPERATE.
C) Using the AO FEEDS button, set the analog output source to XMITTER or
MONITOR.
See step 10 on page 2-16.
If have set the source to Monitor, be sure to set analog pre-emphasis to
Flat. See step (A).
D) Using the AO 100% button, set the desired analog output level corresponding
to 100% modulation, using units of dBu (0 dBu = 0.776 Vrms).
The most accurate way to set this control is by observing a modulation
analyzer connected to your transmitter.
If you have (inappropriately) set AO FEEDS: MONITOR in step (C) above, the
peak level will not be well controlled because no peak limiting has been
applied to this signal.
If you are using program material, make sure that the program material
is loud enough to produce peaks of frequent recurrence that hit the
8382’s peak limiting system, thereby defining the maximum peak level
that the 8382 will produce. In the U.S., we recommend using 900µs peak
weighting on the peak modulation indicator, as permitted by F.C.C. rules.
This will cause the monitor to ignore very low energy overshoots and will
result in the highest peak modulation permitted by law.
In other countries, use a peak-indicating instrument as specified by the
regulatory authority in your country.
If you are transmitting BTSC stereo, note that it is normal for the input
filters in BTSC stereo encoders to introduce a moderate amount of overshoot. It is particularly important to use peak weighting to measure
modulation in the BTSC system. If you do not, you are likely to set average modulation too low, causing an irritating drop in audio level when a
viewer switches to your channel.
8. Set digital output and configuration level.
[Skip this step if you will not be using the digital output.]
[See the notes immediately above.]
A) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG OUT CALIB.
B) Set the DO PRE-E control to PRE-E (for pre-emphasis), PRE+J17, J.17 or FLAT.
C) Set the DO RATE to 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz.
The 8382’s fundamental sample rate is always 32 kHz, ensuring that the
output bandwidth is always strictly limited to 16 kHz and that the processed signal can be passed through a 32 kHz uncompressed STL without
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
addition of overshoot. However, the internal sample rate converter sets
the rate at the 8382’s digital output. This adjustment allows you to set
the output sample rate to ensure compatibility with equipment requiring
a fixed sample rate.
D) Set the DO SYNC.
You can choose INTERNAL (the output sample rate is synchronized to the
8382’s internal crystal-controlled clock), INPUT (the output sample rate is
synchronized to the sample rate appearing at the 8382’s AES3 input), or
SYNC IN (the output sample rate is synchronized to the sample rate appearing at the 8382’s AES3 sync input).
E) Press NEXT. Then set the desired output WORD LEN (word length).
[14], [16], [18], [20], or [24], in bits
The largest valid word length in the 8382 is 24 bits
The 8382 can also truncate its output word length to 20, 18, 16 or 14 bits.
The 8382 can add dither for input material that is insufficiently dithered
for these lower word lengths (see the next step).
F) Adjust DITHER to IN or OUT, as desired.
[In] or [Out]
When set to In, the 8382 adds “high-pass” dither before any truncation
of the output word. The amount of dither automatically tracks the setting of the WORD LEN control. This is first-order noise shaped dither that
considerably reduces added noise in the midrange by comparison to
white PDF dither. However, unlike extreme noise shaping, it adds a
maximum of 3 dB of excess total noise power when compared to white
PDF dither. Thus, it is a good compromise between white PDF dither and
extreme noise shaping.
If the source material has already been correctly dithered (as is true for
virtually all commercially recorded material), you may set this control to
OUT. However, particularly if you use the Noise Reduction feature, the
processing can sometimes attenuate input dither so that it is insufficient
to dither the output correctly. In this case, you should add dither within
the 8382.
G) Set DIGITAL FORMAT to AES or SPDIF
H) Press the PREV button.
I) Using a modulation monitor or modulation analyzer, adjust the DO 100% control to make the modulation monitor read 100% modulation (usually ±75 kHz
deviation).
See the notes in step (7.D) on page 2-24
J) Set the 8382’s response to AES3 status bits. See step (20.B) on page 2-20.
K) Choose whether the 8382 digital output will emit status bits according to
whether the 8382 is in stereo or dual mono modes. See step (20.C) on page 220.
2-25
2-26
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
9. End Analog and Digital I/O setup.
If you are using a external AGC and you temporarily set the EXT AGC to NO in
step 1 on page 2-21, set the EXT AGC to YES.
10. Select a processing preset.
See step 17 on page 2-18.
Automation Using the 8382’s Internal Clock
1. If you have not already done so, set the system clock.
[You can also set the clock automatically via PC Remote or the Internet. See
Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Time Server starting on page 2-36.]
A) Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / TIME DATE AND ID / SET TIME.
a) Set hours and minutes.
b) Enter seconds slightly ahead of the correct time.
c) Wait until the entered time agrees with the correct time. Then press the
ENTER TIME button to set the clock.
B) Press the SET DATE button.
a) Set today’s date, using the days, month, and year buttons.
b) Press the ENTER DATE button.
C) Press the DAYLIGHT TIME button.
a) Using the Daylight Saving (DT MONTH and DT WEEK) buttons, set the month
and week when Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) begins, or OFF.
b) Using the Standard Time (ST MONTH and ST WEEK) buttons, set the month
and week when Daylight Saving Time (Summer Time) ends.
Note that setting DT MONTH, DT WEEK, ST MONTH, or ST WEEK to OFF will
defeat Daylight Time functionality.
c) Press the Escape key to back out of the daylight saving screen.
D) (Optional) Press the STATION ID button to specify your station’s identifier (call
sign or call letters).
a) Use the knob to select characters. Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move
the cursor.
b) When you are finished, press SAVE.
2. Navigate to Setup / Next / Automation.
If the AUTOMATION button reads DISABLED, hold it down and turn the knob to enable automation.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
This button allows you to easily enable or disable all automation events without
having to edit individual automation events.
3. To add an automation event:
A) Push the ADD EVENT button.
B) Choose whether you wish to program an event that occurs only once or an
event that follows a daily or weekly schedule.
C) For events that occur only once:
a) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor over the word “DAILY:”
and turn the knob so that is reads “DATE:” instead.
b) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor to the day, month, and
year when the automation event will occur. Set the desired values with the
knob.
c) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor set the hour, minute,
and second (in 24-hour format) when the automation event is to occur. Set
the desired values with the knob.
D) For events that occur on a daily or weekly schedule:
a) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor the each day of the
week in turn, and use the rotary encoder to turn the day on or off.
You can program the event to occur on as many days of the week as you
wish.
b) Use the PREV and NEXT buttons to move the cursor set the hour, minute,
and second (in 24-hour format—e.g., 18:00:00 for 6:00 PM) when the
automation event is to occur. Set the desired values with the knob.
Automation events have a “start” time but no “stop” time. The 8382 will
indefinitely remain in the state specified by an existing automation event
until its state is changed by another automation event or by another action (such as a user’s interacting with the front panel or PC Remote software).
E) For all events:
a) Press the SELECT EVENT button.
b) Turn the knob to set the desired event. The available events are:
•
Recall factory preset
•
Recall user preset
•
stereo mode
•
dual-mono (DUALMONO) mode
This mode processes the two input channels independently.
•
bypass mode
2-27
2-28
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
•
exit test (restores the operating preset that was on-air before a test
mode was invoked)
•
mod. reduction 1
•
mod. reduction 2
•
exit mod. reduction
F) When you have programmed an event to your satisfaction, press the SAVE
EVENT button.
You will return to the automation menu.
4. To edit an existing event:
A) Press the VIEW / EDIT EVENT button.
B) Turn the knob until you see the event you wish to edit.
C) Press the EDIT EVENT button.
D) Edit the event as desired. Use the same technique as adding an event.
See step 3 on page 2-27.
E) Press the SAVE EVENT button to store your edits.
5. To delete an event:
A) Press the DELETE EVENT button.
B) Choose the event to delete with the knob.
You can search by date or by event (i.e., recalling a given preset). Use the
NEXT button to navigate from one type of search to the other type.
C) When you have located the event you want to remove, press the DELETE
EVENT button.
This action will immediately delete the event. There is no “are you sure”
warning message. To abort the deletion, press the ESC button, not the
DELETE EVENT button.
Security and Passcode Programming
[Skip this step if you do not plan to use PC Remote software or do not plan to lock
out the front panel locally.]
The 8382 has several levels of security to prevent unauthorized people from changing its programming or operating state. Security controls access to the front panel
and to anyone connecting to the 8382 through a direct serial connection, dial-up
networking (through modems), or its Ethernet port.
The security levels are:
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
1. All Screens (i.e., administrator level)
2. All Screens except Security
3. All screens except Modify and Security
4. Presets, Modify, Save, Memory, and Automation
5. Presets and Automation
6. Presets
There is no default passcode. The Optimod’s front panel cannot be locked out unless
the Optimod has been assigned at least one All Access passcode.
Your Optimod secures User Presets by encrypting them (using the Advanced Encryption Standard algorithm with the session passcode as its key) when PC Remote
fetches them. Hence, a packet sniffer cannot intercept User Presets in plaintext form.
PC Remote then writes the fetched User Presets in encrypted form on your hard
drive, where they remain for the duration of your PC Remote session.
If PC Remote exits normally, it will erase these temporary User Preset files
from your computer’s hard disk. If it does not exit normally, these files
will remain in encrypted form. However, the next time that PC Remote
starts up, it will automatically clean up any orphaned files.
To Create a Passcode:
A) Navigate to SETUP / SECURITY / ADD PASSCODES.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with All Access privileges.
B) Use the four soft buttons, labeled“1,” “2,” “3,” and “4,” to create a passcode.
Passcodes can be up to eight characters long but can only contain the
characters “1,” “2,” “3,” and “4.” This limitation makes it easy to enter a
passcode using the four available soft buttons.
C) When you have finished entering your new passcode, write it down so you do
not forget it. Then press the NEXT button.
If you wish to discard the passcode you just entered, press the ESC button
instead. Then return to step (B).
D) The PERMISSIONS screen appears. Turn the knob to choose the permission level
for the passcode you just created.
If you wish to discard the passcode you just entered, press the PREV button to return to the Enter Passcode screen or ESC to return to the Security screen.
E) Press the NEXT button to save your new passcode.
To Edit a Passcode:
A) Navigate to SETUP / SECURITY / VIEW-EDIT PASSCODES.
2-29
2-30
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with ALL ACCESS privileges.
B) Turn the knob until you see the passcode you want to edit.
C) Press the NEXT button. The Permissions screen appears.
D) Turn the knob to set the desired permission level for the passcode you are editing.
E) Press the NEXT button to confirm your choice.
Your new permission level is stored and the Security menu appears.
To Delete a Passcode:
A) Navigate to SETUP / SECURITY / DELETE PASSCODES.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with All Access privileges.
B) Turn the knob until you see the passcode you want to delete.
C) Press the NEXT button. The Confirm Delete screen appears.
D) Press the YES soft button to delete the passcode. Press the NO or ESCAPE
buttons to abort deleting the passcode.
To Lock the Front Panel Immediately:
After you have adjusted the processor, to maximize security you will often want
to lock it immediately without waiting for the timeout. To do so:
A) Press the SETUP button.
B) Press the LOCK NOW soft button.
To Program local lockout:
A) Navigate to SETUP / SECURITY.
If the front panel is already password protected, you can only access this
screen by entering a passcode with ALL ACCESS privileges.
B) Hold down the AUTOLOCK soft button and turn the knob to set the desired
lockout time (if any).
You can program the lockout delay time (in hours:minutes) from 15 minutes to 8 hours, or OFF. This is the time delay between the last access to a
local front panel control and when the front panel automatically locks itself out, requiring entering a passcode to obtain front panel control of
the 8382.
Autolock can only be turned on if at least one passcode exists with ALL
ACCESS privileges because an ALL ACCESS passcode is required to fully
unlock the panel or to turn off the Autolock function.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
C) Press the ESCAPE button to leave the Security menu.
To Unlock the Front Panel:
A) On the 8382 front panel, operate any button or the knob.
The PASSCODE screen will appear.
B) Enter a passcode using the four soft buttons.
The 8382 functionality that you can access depends on the security level
of the passcode that you entered.
After you have finished working, the panel will automatically re-lock after the time delay you set in SETUP / SECURITY / AUTOLOCK. (You can set a
new delay at any time if you have an ALL ACCESS passcode.)
Dial-up Networking and the Passcode
When you make a Windows Dial-up Networking connection, Windows will ask you
for your passcode. To allow the connection to occur, enter any passcode that you set
at the 8382’s front panel. Once your PC is connected to the 8382, you will be able to
access the 8382 functionality corresponding to the security level of your passcode.
If you have not set a passcode, leave the Windows dialog box blank.
If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode
You can reset factory defaults and wipe out security passcodes (in case you forgot
your ALL ACCESS passcode).
A) Remove power from the 8382.
B) While pressing both the ESCAPE and SETUP buttons, restore power.
The Restore Defaults screen appears.
C) To gain access to the 8382, press the ERASE ALL PASSCODES soft button.
D) Reprogram passcodes as necessary; see To Create a Passcode on page 2-29.
The RESTORE DEFAULTS button (in the Restore Defaults screen) restores all
System Setup and Input/output parameters to their factory default settings. It also erases all passcodes. You should never need to use this button in an existing installation, although it is a convenient way to make
the 8382 “factory fresh” if it is being installed in a different facility.
The RESTORE DEFAULTS button takes you to a screen that allows you to
keep or erase any user presets that exist in your unit.
2-31
2-32
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Remote Control Interface Programming
[Skip this step if you do not wish to program the GPI (contact closure) remote control interface.]
1. Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / NETWORK & REMOTE / REMOTE INTERFACE.
2. Program one or more remote control interfaces.
A) Navigate to the desired Remote Interface button (1 through 8) by repeatedly
pressing the NEXT button.
B) Hold down the button while turning the knob to select the desired function
for the interface.
Use either button below the appropriate graphics; both work the same.
A momentary pulse of voltage will switch most functions, except as
noted.
•
Preset Name: switches the named preset on the air. The control interface
can recall any factory or user preset.
•
Input: Analog: selects the analog inputs.
•
Input: Digital: selects the digital input and but does not apply deemphasis to it.
•
Input: Digital+J.17: selects the digital input and applies J.17 de-emphasis
to it.
•
Bypass: switches the Bypass Test Mode on the air.
•
Tone: switches the Tone Test Mode preset on the air.
•
Exit Test: If a test preset is presently on the air, EXIT TEST reverts to the
previous processing preset.
•
Stereo: connects the 8382’s left and right inputs to the left and right inputs of the processing and stereo-couples the processing.
•
Dual Mono: connects the 8382’s left and right inputs to the left and right
inputs of the processing and removes all stereo coupling from the processing so that the two channels of the processing operate as independent
processors, sharing only the on-air preset.
The two channels of the processing can never operate with different presets.
•
Mod Reduction 1, or Mod Reduction 2: reduces the program modulation by the percentage programmed in SETUP / NEXT / MODULATION REDUCTION
(see step 19 on page 2-19). When voltage is removed, these functions are
deactivated.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
•
Monitor Mute: mutes the analog output if it is set for “monitor” (not
“transmitter”). By connecting this output to a loss-of-carrier alarm, you
can simulate an “off-the-air” condition that mutes the control room
monitor, thereby immediately alerting the talent or operator.
•
Reset Clock To Hour: resets the internal clock to the nearest hour. For
example, 3:03:10 would be reset to 3:00:00, while 3:53:40 would be reset
to 4:00:00. Use this function to periodically re-sync the 8382’s internal
clock to your station’s master clock.
•
Reset Clock to Midnight: Resets the clock to 0:00:00. You can use this
function to periodically re-sync the 8382’s internal clock to your station’s
master clock.
•
No Function: remote input is disabled.
3. End remote control interface programming.
When you are finished programming the remote control interface, press the Escape button to return to higher menu levels.
Networking and Remote Control
[Skip this step if you do not wish to connect to your 8382 remotely, either for
downloading software upgrades or for PC Remote Control.]
The 8382 has a built-in Ethernet connector that can be used with 10 Mbps or 100
Mbps networks using the TCP/IP protocol. You can also connect a PC to the 8382
through the 8382’s RS-232 serial port, either by modem or directly through a null
modem cable.
1. Prepare the 8382 for an Ethernet network connection:
[Skip this step if you will not be using an Ethernet connection.]
•
See your network administrator to get the data required in the following
procedure.
•
Note that if you wish to do this from the 8382 PC Remote software, then you
must first be able to connect to the 8382. Therefore, you will usually perform
this procedure from the 8382’s front panel to prepare it for connection.
A) Navigate to SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE / NEXT.
B) Press the SET IP ADDRESS soft button.
The IP Address Screen appears.
a) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
IP address. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat until
2-33
2-34
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
you have selected all the numbers in the IP address assigned by your
network administrator
b) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
C) Set the Subnet Mask assigned by your network administrator if necessary:
a) Press the SET SUBNET MASK soft button.
b) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
subnet mask. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat
until you have selected all the numbers in the subnet mask assigned by
your network administrator
c) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
D) Set the Gateway Address assigned by your network administrator if necessary:
a) Press the GATEWAY ADDRESS soft button.
b) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
gateway address. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat
until you have selected all the numbers in the gateway address assigned by
your network administrator
c) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
E) Set the IP Port assigned by your network administrator if necessary:
a) Press the IP PORT soft button.
b) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the IP
port. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat until you
have selected all the numbers in the IP port assigned by your network
administrator
c) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
F) Connect your Ethernet network to the RJ45 jack on the rear panel of your
8382.
•
If you are connecting to a hub or router, use a standard Ethernet cable.
•
If you are connecting directly to the Ethernet jack on a computer, use a
“crossover” or “reverse” Ethernet cable.
G) Press the NEXT button.
2. Prepare the 8382 for modem connection through the serial port:
[Skip this step if you will not be using a modem connection.]
A) Navigate to SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE.
B) Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see
MODEM on the display.
C) Press the MODEM INIT soft button.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
D) If the string that appears in the display is S0=4, this is correct. Press the
ESCAPE button and skip steps (E) and (F) below.
S0=4 is the 8382 default setting. This activates auto-answer functionality
in the modem.
E) Set the InIT STRING to S0=4. Use the NEXT and PREV KEYs to move the cursor in
turn to each character in the modem initialization string. Use the knob to set
the character to the desired value. Repeat until you have set all the characters
in the initialization string.
F) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
3. Modem setup:
You will need two modems and two available phone lines, one of each for your
PC and your 8382. Orban Customer Service supports only the 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT on the 8382 side of your connection, although other
56kbps modems will often work OK.
You can use either an internal or an external modem with your PC.
A) Connect the telephone line from the wall phone jack to the wall connection
icon on the back of the modem (modem in).
B) Connect the modem to the 8382’s serial port with a standard (not null) modem cable.
The cable provided with your 8382 is a null modem cable and will not
work.
C) Set the modem to AUTO ANSWER and turn it on.
For 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT, set dipswitches 3, 5,
and 8 in the down position to activate the AUTO ANSWER setting. All other
dipswitches should be set to the up position.
4. Prepare the 8382 for direct serial connection through the serial port:
[Skip this step if you will not be using a modem connection.]
A) Navigate to SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE.
B) Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see
DIRECT on the display.
You are now ready to connect your computer to your 8382 through a null
modem cable connected to your computer’s serial port. Refer to Installing
8382 PC Remote Control Software on page 2-39.
2-35
2-36
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Synchronizing Optimod to a Network Time Server
[Skip this section if you do not wish to automatically synchronize your Optimod’s
internal clock to a network timeserver, which may be part of your local network or
located on the Internet.]
1. Navigate to SETUP / NEXT / TIME DATE AND ID / NEXT / TIME SYNC.
A) Use the PROTOCOL control to choose either TIME PROT or SNTP.
• Select TIME PROT if the Optimod is behind a firewall that does not pass UPD
packets. TIME PROT selects the Time Protocol as described in the standard
RFC868. This method uses TCP on port 37.
• Select SNTP if your network timeserver supports the Simple Network Time
Protocol as described in standard RFC1769. This method uses UDP on port
123.
Ask your network administrator which protocols are available. SNTP is
slightly more accurate.
B) Using SYNC PERIOD, choose how often your Optimod will automatically update
its internal clock to the timeserver you selected.
The choices are OFF, 8 HOURS, and 24 HOURS.
If the connection to the timeserver fails (due to network overload or
other problems), your Optimod will try once per hour to synchronize until it is successful.
C) Set the OFFSET to the difference (in hours) between your time zone and Universal Time (UTC).
UTC is also known as GMT, or Greenwich Mean Time.
• The value can range between –12 and +12 hours. If this value is set to 0,
your Optimod’s time will be the same as UTC.
• You can empirically adjust this value until the correct time for your location
is displayed after you synchronize your Optimod to a timeserver.
2. Choose a timeserver.
http://www.boulder.nist.gov/timefreq/service/time-servers.html provides a current list of timeservers available on the Internet. You network may also have a
local timeserver; ask your network administrator.
As of April 2004, NIST’s list was as follows:
Name
time-a.nist.gov
time-b.nist.gov
time-a.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov
time-b.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov
IP Address
129.6.15.28
129.6.15.29
132.163.4.101
132.163.4.102
Location
NIST, Gaithersburg, Maryland
NIST, Gaithersburg, Maryland
NIST, Boulder, Colorado
NIST, Boulder, Colorado
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
Name
time-c.timefreq.bldrdoc.gov
utcnist.colorado.edu
time.nist.gov
time-nw.nist.gov
nist1.datum.com
nist1-dc.glassey.com
nist1-ny.glassey.com
nist1-sj.glassey.com
nist1.aol-ca.truetime.com
nist1.aol-va.truetime.com
INSTALLATION
IP Address
132.163.4.103
128.138.140.44
192.43.244.18
131.107.1.10
66.243.43.21
216.200.93.8
208.184.49.9
207.126.98.204
207.200.81.113
205.188.185.33
Location
NIST, Boulder, Colorado
University of Colorado, Boulder
NCAR, Boulder, Colorado
Microsoft, Redmond, Washington
Datum, San Jose, California
Abovenet, Virginia
Abovenet, New York City
Abovenet, San Jose, California
TrueTime, AOL facility, Sunnyvale, CA
TrueTime, AOL facility, Virginia
Table 2-1: NIST-referenced timeservers
3. Press the NEXT button to set up timeserver parameters.
The TIME SERVER button is located on the second page of the TIME SYNC functions. (You can access this function from anywhere in the Optimod menu tree by
navigating to SETUP / NEXT / TIME DATE AND ID / NEXT / TIME SYNC / NEXT.)
You can specify the timeserver either from your Optimod’s front panel or from
its PC Remote software. From the front panel, you can only enter the timeserver’s IP address (for example, 192.43.244.18). If you specify the timeserver
from PC Remote, you can specify either its named address (for example,
time.nist.gov) or its IP address.
4. Specify the time sync parameters from your Optimod’s front panel:
[Skip this step if you wish to specify the timeserver and time sync parameters
from your Windows XP computer.]
A) Press the TIME SERVER button.
The timeserver IP Address Screen appears.
a) Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the cursor in turn to each digit in the
IP address. Use the knob to set the digit to the desired value. Repeat until
you have selected all the numbers in the desired IP address.
b) Press the SAVE soft button to confirm your setting.
B) Press the SYNC NOW soft button to test your settings. Your Optimod’s display
should indicate that it is connecting to the IP address that you specified. When
the connection is successful, the Optimod’s clock will automatically synchronize to the timeserver.
• If the connection is not successful within five seconds, the display will indicate that the connection failed. This means either that the timeserver is too
busy or that your setup cannot connect to the timeserver. Double-check the
IP address. If you are behind a firewall, make sure that port 123 is open.
• If your connection failed, the gateway address might not be set correctly
on your Optimod. The gateway address for the timeserver connection is the
same gateway address that you set in step (1.D) on page 2-34. If you do not
know the correct gateway address, you can often discover it by connecting
2-37
2-38
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
a Windows computer to the same Ethernet cable that is ordinarily plugged
into your Optimod. Ascertain that the computer can connect to the Internet. At the command prompt, type ipconfig. The computer will return
the “Default Gateway.”
5. Specify the time sync from the Optimod PC Remote software:
[Skip this step if you wish to specify the timeserver and time sync parameters
from your Optimod’s front panel.]
Optimod PC Remote software can automatically set your Optimod’s local time,
OFFSET, and TIME SERVER to reflect the Windows settings in the machine running
PC Remote software.
If you are running Windows 2000, you cannot specify the timeserver from
your computer. However, you can still set your Optimod’s clock and offset.
A) In Windows, navigate to the CONTROL PANEL / DATE AND TIME / TIME ZONE tab.
B) Set time zone to correspond to your local time zone.
C) In Windows, navigate to the CONTROL PANEL / DATE
tab.
AND
TIME / INTERNET TIME
D) If you are running Windows XP:
a) Check “Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server” to set your
Optimod’s SYNC PERIOD to “24.”
b) Set “Server” to the desired timeserver.
c) Click the “Update Now” button to synchronize your computer’s clock to
the selected timeserver. If this is successful, this means that you can connect
to the selected timeserver over your network.
• The INTERNET TIME tab is not available in Windows 2000. If you are running
Optimod PC Remote on Windows 2000, you must enter the timeserver from
your Optimod’s front panel as an IP address (step 4 on page 2-37).
• If the timeserver you selected in Windows is a named address not an IP address the 2300 will resolve it correctly, but the IP address that appears in
your Optimod’s display will be 0.0.0.0.
• To use PC Remote to turn off your Optimod’s automatic synchronization,
uncheck “Automatically synchronize with an Internet time server” on your
PC. Then click the “Update Now” button on PC Remote.
E) Navigate to Optimod PC Remote’s SETUP/ UTILITY tab and click the SET 2300
CLOCK button.
• If you are running Windows XP, PC Remote will download your computer’s
currently specified timeserver into your Optimod.
• PC Remote will adjust your Optimod’s OFFSET setting to correspond to your
computer’s time zone setting.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
• PC Remote will synchronize your Optimod’s clock with your computer’s
clock.
F) It is wise to disconnect from PC Remote and then to press the SYNC NOW button on your Optimod [step (B) on page 2-37]. This is to test the ability of your
Optimod to synchronize to the selected timeserver and to ensure that your
Optimod’s clock is set accurately.
NOTE: Manually setting your Optimod’s clock via Set Time, Set Date, Daylight
Time, and the remote contact closure Reset to Hour and Reset to Midnight will
not work when the automatic synchronization function is active. To inactivate
this function (thereby permitting manual setting to work), set the SYNC PERIOD to
OFF.
Installing 8382 PC Remote Control Software
This section briefly summarizes the procedure for installing 8382 PC Remote software on existing 8382s. If required, you will find more detailed instructions in the
.pdf file automatically installed on your computer by Orban’s installer program,
Setup8382_x.x.x.x.exe, where “x.x.x.x” represents the software version you are
installing. (For example, for version 1.0 software, this would be 1.0.0.0.)
The PC Remote software is supplied on a CD shipped with your 8382. You can also
download it from ftp.orban.com/8382.
Instructions for using the PC Remote software are found in Section 3 of this manual.
Installing the Necessary Windows Services
The 8382 PC Remote application uses Windows’ built-in communications and networking services to deal with the low-level details necessary to communicate with
the 8382’s serial port. (These services are also used to upgrade your 8382’s firmware
when updates are available from Orban.) The exact process will vary, depending on
how you wish to set up the communications. That is:
•
If you want to communicate through a local PC, you will need to establish a connection between a serial (COM) port of the PC and the COM port of your 8382
through a null modem cable (supplied with your 8382). You will then use Windows Direct Serial Connect to make the basic connection.
•
If you want to communicate through a pair of modems, you will use the Windows Dial-Up networking service to make the connection.
You must install the appropriate communications services in Windows (if they
are not already installed) before you can run 8382 Remote software. You may
therefore need to have access to the Windows install disk(s)—or have their image copied onto your computer’s hard drive—before you attempt to use the
8382 PC Remote application.
2-39
2-40
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
In all cases, regardless of whether your PC communicates to the 8382
through its serial port or Ethernet connector, it uses the ppp and the
TCP/IP protocols to communicate with the 8382.
Check Hardware Requirements
To connect your PC to your 8382, regardless of the method you choose, you will
need the following:
•
Orban 8382 OPTIMOD-TV.
•
If connecting by serial cable: a null modem cable (also called a “reverse” cable),
supplied by Orban with your 8382 when it was shipped. This cable has DB9 female connectors at both ends for connecting the 8382 to the serial port on your
computer. If your computer has a DB25 connector, you will need to obtain an
adapter.
•
If connecting by modem: a 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT and
normal (not null) modem cable for the 8382 side of the connection. Note that
Orban Customer Service does not support any other type of modem for connecting to the 8382.
•
If connecting by network: a standard Ethernet cable (with RJ45 connectors) to
connect to a network hub or router, or a crossover Ethernet cable to connect directly to your PC’s Ethernet jack.
•
PC running Windows 2000 (SP3 or higher) or XP.
8382 PC Remote will not run on older Windows versions.
Recommended Components
Computer.................................................................... Pentium II or higher
Available Disk Space .......................................................................... 25MB
RAM .................................................................................................. 256MB
Display................................................................................. SVGA or higher
Microsoft Windows................. 2000 SP3 (or higher) or XP (Home or Pro)
COM Port .......................................................16550 (or compatible) UART
WARNING!
When connecting your 8382, use shielded cable to protect the pins in the RS-232
connector from electrostatic discharge.
The following subsections provide steps for connecting to your 8382 OPTIMOD-TV
software using the Windows 2000 / XP Direct Cable Connect or via modem connection.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
Running the Orban Installer Program
Insert the installer CD into your computer’s CD drive.
The installer should start up and ask you if you wish to install the PC Remote application on your computer. If it fails to do so, navigate to Start \ Run on your computer, and type X:setup (where “X” is the drive letter of your CD drive).
Follow the prompts on your screen to install the PC Remote software automatically
on your computer.
•
You might have obtained the automatic installer application from some other
source than Orban’s CD, like Orban’s ftp site or another computer on your network. If so, just run the application and follow the on-screen instructions.
•
This program installs the necessary files and adds an Orban / Optimod 8382
folder to your computer’s Start Menu. This folder contains shortcuts to the PC
Remote application and to the documentation. If you accepted the option during installation, there is also a shortcut to the PC Remote application on your
desktop.
You have now installed all files necessary to use the PC Remote software. If you are
using a direct serial or a modem connection, the next step is to install and configure
the Windows communications services that allow your computer to communicate
with your 8382. Appendix: Setting Up Serial Communications on page 2-43 provides
details.
Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections
If you are using an Ethernet connection and your computer can successfully connect
to the Internet through its Ethernet port, it already has the correct (TCP/IP) networking set up to communicate with the 8382. In most cases, all you need is your 8382’s
IP address, Port, and Gateway number, as set in step 1 on page 2-33. You will enter
these when you create a “connection” to your 8382 from the 8382 PC Remote application—see step E) on page 3-46. If your computer does not have a working
Ethernet port, you will need to add one and then following the instructions provided by Microsoft to set it up to enable TCP/IP networking.
If you are using a crossover Ethernet cable to connect your Optimod directly to your
computer, you must set your Windows networking to provide a static IP address for
your computer because your Optimod does not contain a DHCP server.
If you wish to connect to your 8382 through your LAN or VPN (through a WAN or
the Internet), consult your network administrator. Note that to cross subnets, you
must specify a gateway. If the PC and 8382 are on the same subnet, then it is unnecessary to specify a gateway.
If you are behind a firewall, you must open the port you specified in step (1.E) on
page 2-34. If the gateway and firewall (if used) are configured correctly, it is possible
to connect 8382 PC Remote to an 8382 via a VPN.
2-41
2-42
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Conclusion
By carefully following the instructions in the Appendix, you should have successfully
installed the necessary Windows services and connected to your 8382. However, if
you experience any problems with this process, or have any other 8382 questions,
please contact Orban Customer Service:
phone: +1 510 351-3500
email: [email protected]
For details on your new 8382 software, from new features to operational suggestions, refer to our FTP site (ftp.orban.com/8382).
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
Appendix: Setting Up Serial Communications
This appendix provides instructions for setting up both direct serial and modem
connections from your 8382 to your PC. You must do this when you define a new
connection from the 8382 PC Remote application. The appendix provides procedures
for both the Windows 2000 and Windows XP operating systems. (Note that the
screen shots were prepared for Orban’s Optimod-FM 8300 and refer to that product.
They are directly applicable to the 8382 as well.)
Preparing for Communication through Null Modem Cable
1. Configure your 8382.
A) On your 8382’s front panel, navigate to SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE.
B) Hold down the PC CONNECT soft button and turn the knob until you see
DIRECT on the display.
2. Connect the cable.
A) Connect one end of the null modem cable that we supplied with your 8382 to
the DB9 serial connector on the 8382’s rear panel.
Be sure to use a null modem cable. A normal serial cable will not work.
B) Connect the other end of the cable to your computer’s COM port.
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Direct Serial Connection:
Ordinarily, a direct serial connection through a null modem cable is used only when
you are controlling one 8382 per available COM port on your computer. If you wish
to control multiple local 8382s, it is better to use an Ethernet network connection.
However, in principle you could control multiple 8382s serially from one COM port,
using a hardware serial switch to select the 8382 you wish to control. In this case,
you should set up a separate 8382 “connection” for each 8382 to be controlled, following the instructions below. All connections should reference the same COM port.
This connection is used both for upgrading your 8382 and for connecting the 8382
PC Remote application to your 8382.
Important: The Direct Serial Connection must have exclusive access to the PC COM
port that connects to your 8382. Make sure than any software that monitors this
COM port (such as HotSync manager, etc) is disabled before running Direct Serial
Connection.
If you have already configured your direct serial cable connection, skip to step 2 on
page 2-48.
If you cannot access the Internet after making a Direct or Modem connection, you
will have to reconfigure certain networking parameters in Windows. Please see You
2-43
2-44
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection of the 8382
on page 5-7.
1. Add and configure a Direct Connection for Windows 2000:
A) Create a New Windows
2000 Direct Connection:
a) Launch
Remote.
8382
PC
b) Choose “Connect / New
8382”
c) Give your 8382 a name
(e.g., “KABC”) by entering this name in the
“8382 Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have
8382
PC
Remote
remember
the
password
for
this
Optimod, enter the
pass-word
in
the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click “Add.”
g) Select “Connect Directly
to another computer.”
h) Click “Next.”
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
i) In the drop-down box, select the serial
port you will be using to make the
connection.
j) Click “Next.”
k) Select either “For all users” or “Only
for myself.”
The correct setting depends on
how your network and security
are configured.
Your wizard may not display this
field if your computer is set up
for a single user only.
l) Click “Next.”
m)Enter a name for your Connection such
as: “Connection to 8382.”
n) Click “Finish.”
INSTALLATION
2-45
2-46
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
o) Click “Yes.”
B) Edit your new Direct
Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
b) Click the “General”
tab.
c) Select the device you
set up in step (i) on
page 2-45.
This will usually be
“Communications
cable between two
computers (COM1).”
d) Click “Configure.”
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
e) Set “Maximum
“115200.”
INSTALLATION
speed
(bps)”
to
f) Check “Enable hardware flow control.”
g) Make sure that all other boxes are
not checked.
h) Click “OK.”
i) Select the Networking tab.
j) Make sure that “PPP: Windows 95 /
98 / NT 4 / 2000, Internet” appears in
the “Type of dial-up server I am
calling” field.
k) Make sure that “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave “File and Printer
Sharing for Microsoft Networks”
and “Client for Microsoft Networks” checked if you like.
l) Click “OK.”
m)When
the “Connection properties”
window appears, click “OK.”
2-47
2-48
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
2. Launch an existing Windows 2000 Direct connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying Direct Connect in the 8382 PC
Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-46), choosing this
connection from 8382 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows Direct Connection to your 8382.
You can connect by selecting
the desired connection from
the drop-down list in the
CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking the connection in
the “Connection List” window.
A dialog bubble will appear
on the bottom right hand corner of the screen verifying
your connection if the connection is successful.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to OS Specific Troubleshooting
Advice: Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect on page 5-8. If you have
trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instructions
above, try restarting your computer to clear its serial port.
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-44).
Connecting Using Windows XP Direct Serial Connection
If you have already configured your direct serial cable connection, skip to step 2 on
page 2-52.
If you cannot access the Internet after making a Direct or Modem connection, you will have to reconfigure certain networking parameters in
Windows. Please see You Cannot Access the Internet After Making a Direct or Modem Connection of the 8382 on page 5-7.
1. Add and configure a Direct Connection for Windows XP:
A) Create a New Windows XP Direct Connection:
a) Launch 8382 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect / New 8382”
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
c) Give your 8382 a name (e.g., “KABC”)
by entering this name in the “8382
Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have 8382 PC Remote
remember the password for this
Optimod, enter the password in the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click the “Add” button.
g) Choose “Connect directly to another
computer.”
h) Click “Next.”
i) In the drop-down box, select the serial
port you will be using to make the
connection.
j) Click “Next.”
INSTALLATION
2-49
2-50
INSTALLATION
k) Type in a name for your
Connection
such
as:
“Connection to 8382.”
l) Click “Finish.”
m)Click “Yes.”
B) Edit your new Direct
Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
ORBAN MODEL 8382
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
b) Click the “General” tab.
c) Select the device you set up in step (i)
on page 2-49. This will usually be
“Communications cable between two
computers (COM1).”
d) Click “Configure.”
e) Set the “Maximum Speed (bps)” to
115200.
f) Check “Enable hardware flow control.”
g) Make sure all other hardware features
are unchecked.
h) Click “OK.”
INSTALLATION
2-51
2-52
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
i) Select the Networking tab.
j) Make sure that “PPP:
Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4 /
2000, Internet” appears in
the “Type of dial-up server I
am calling” field.
k) Make sure that “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave “File and
Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” and
“Client for Microsoft
Networks” checked if
you like
l) Click “OK.”
m)When
the
“Connection
properties”
window
appears, click “OK.”
2. Launch an existing Windows XP Direct connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying Direct Connect in the 8382 PC
Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-46), choosing this
connection from 8382 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows Direct Connection to your 8382.
You can connect by selecting the
desired connection from the dropdown list in the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by doubleclicking the connection in the
“Connection List” window.
A dialog bubble will appear on the
bottom right hand corner of the
screen verifying your connection if
the connection is successful.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to Troubleshooting Windows XP
Direct Connect on page 5-10. If you have trouble the first time after creating a
connection according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to
clear its serial port.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-44).
Preparing for Communication through Modems
1. Prepare your 8382 for a modem connection through the serial port.
See step 2 on page 2-34.
2. If you have not already done so, create an 8382 passcode.
See To Create a Passcode on page 2-29.
3. Modem setup:
You will need two modems and two available phone lines, one of each for your PC
and your 8382.
Reminder: Orban supports only the 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax
modem EXT on the 8382 side (although other 56kbps modems will often
work OK).
Connect the modem to the 8382’s serial port with a standard (not null) modem cable. The cable provided with your 8382 is a null modem cable and will not work.
You can use either an internal or an external modem with your PC.
A) Connect the telephone line from the wall phone jack to the wall connection
icon on the back of the modem (modem in).
B) Connect the modem cable from the modem to the serial port of the 8382.
C) Set the modem to AUTO ANSWER and turn it on.
For 3Com / U.S. Robotics® 56kbps fax modem EXT, set dipswitches 3, 5,
and 8 in the down position to activate the AUTO ANSWER setting. All
other dipswitches should be set to the up position.
Connecting Using Windows 2000 Modem Connection
This connection is used both for upgrading your 8382 and for connecting the 8382
PC Remote application to your 8382.
1. Add and configure modem for Windows 2000:
If your modem is already installed, skip to Launch a Windows 2000 Modem connection on page 2-58.
A) Install Windows 2000 modem:
2-53
2-54
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.
a) If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port on
your PC and make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line.
b) On your PC, click “Start / Settings / Control Panel / Phone and Modem
Options.”
c) Click the “Modems” tab.
d) Verify that your modem appears in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed.”
e) Verify that your modem is “Attached to” the correct port.
If your modem is unavailable or not attached to the correct port, you will
need to Add it. See your Windows documentation.
f) If your modem is available in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed” and it is attached to the correct port, then click
“Properties” for that modem.
g) Make sure the port speed is set at 115200.
h) Click “OK.”
B) Create a New Windows 2000 Dial-Up Connection:
a) Click “Start / Settings / Network and Dial-up Connections / Make New
Connection.”
b) Once the New Connection Wizard has opened, Click “Next.”
C) Create a New Windows 2000 Direct
Connection:
a) Launch 8382 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect / New 8382”
c) Give your 8382 a name (e.g.,
“KABC”) by entering this name
in the “8382 Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have 8382 PC
Remote
remember
the
password for this Optimod,
enter the password in the
“Password“ field.
e) Select “Serial Connection.”
f) Click the “Add” button.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
g) Select “Dial-up to private network.”
h) Click “Next.”
i) Enter the phone number of the modem
connected to the 8382 that you are
setting up.
j) Click the “Next” button.
k) Select either “For all users” or “Only for
myself.”
The correct setting depends on how
your network and security are configured.
This screen may not appear in computers set up for single users.
INSTALLATION
2-55
2-56
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
l) Click the “Next” button.
m)Type in a name for your
Connection
such
as:
“Connection to 8382–
Modem.”
n) Click
the
button.
“Finish”
o) Click “Yes.”
D) Edit your new Direct
Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
b) Click the “General” tab.
c) In the “Connect using” field, select
the modem you will be using to make
the connection on the PC side.
d) Click “Configure.”
e) Set “Maximum
“115200.”
f) Check
“Enable
control.”
speed
(bps)”
hardware
to
flow
g) Check “Enable modem error control.”
h) Check “Enable mcdem compression.”
i) Make sure that all other boxes are not
checked.
j) Click “OK.”
2-57
2-58
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
k) Select the Networking
tab.
l) Make sure that “PPP:
Windows 95 / 98 / NT
4 / 2000, Internet”
appears in the “Type
of dial-up server I am
calling” field.
m)Make
sure
that
“Internet
Protocol
(TCP/IP) is checked.
You may leave
“Client for Microsoft Neworks”
checked if you
like.
n) Click “OK.”
o) When the “Connection properties” window appears, click
“OK.”
2. Launch a Windows 2000 Modem connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying a modem connection in the 8382
PC Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-46), choosing
this connection from 8382 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows modem
connection to your 8382.
You can connect by selecting the desired connection from the drop-down list in
the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking
the connection in the “Connection List”
window.
If the connection is successful, a dialog
bubble will appear on the bottom right
hand corner of the screen verifying your
connection.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to OS Specific Troubleshooting
Advice: Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect on page 5-9. If you
have trouble the first time after creating a connection according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to clear its serial port.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-54).
Connecting using Windows XP Modem Connection
1. Add and configure modem for Windows XP:
Skip this step if your modem is already configured and working.
A) Configure the Windows XP PC ports:
Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.
a) If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port on
your PC.
b) Make sure the modem is connected to a working phone line.
c) Click “Start / Control Panel / Systems.”
d) Go to the “Hardware” tab and click “Device Manager.”
e) In the Device Manager dialog box click the “+” next to the “Ports (COM
and LPT)” icon.
A list will branch off, showing your available ports.
f) Double-click “Communications Port (COM1) or (COM2),” depending on
how you set up your system.
The “Communications Port (Comx) Properties” dialog box opens.
Not all PCs have a COM2.
IMPORTANT: The COM port you choose at this point must match the
COM port to which you connected your modem.
g) From the tabs at the top, choose “Port Settings” and configure the settings
to match your PC modem.
If you are using a U.S. Robotics® external modem, the settings will be:
Bits per second= 115200, Data bits = 8, Parity = None, Stop bits = 1, Flow
Control = None.
h) When you are finished, click the OK button to close the “Communications
Port (Comx) Properties” dialog box.
i) Click the OK button in the “Systems Properties” dialog window.
j) Close the “Control Panel” window.
If your modem is already installed, skip to Launch an existing Windows XP modem
connection on page 2-63.
B) Install the Windows XP modem:
a) Use either an internal modem or external modem with your computer.
2-59
2-60
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
If you are using an external modem, connect the modem to a serial port
on your PC and make sure the modem is connected to a working phone
line.
b) On your PC, click “Start / Settings / Control Panel / Phone and Modem
Options.”
c) Click the “Modems” tab.
d) Verify that your modem appears in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed.”
e) Verify that your modem is “Attached to” the correct port.
If your modem is unavailable or not attached to the correct port, you will
need to Add it. See your Windows documentation.
f) If your modem is available in the list available under “The following
Modems are installed” and it is attached to the correct port, then click
“Properties” for that modem.
g) Make sure the port speed is set at 115200.
h) Click “OK.”
C) Create a new Windows XP modem
connection:
a) Launch 8382 PC Remote.
b) Choose “Connect / New 8382.”
The Connection Properties window opens.
c) Give your 8382 a name (e.g.,
“KABC”) by entering this name
in the “8382 Alias” field.
d) If you wish to have 8382 PC
Remote remember the password
for this Optimod, enter the password in the “Password“ field.
You must enter a valid
password to connect. This
means that at least one
8382 passcode must have
been assigned via the
8382’s front panel. (See
To Create a Passcode on
page 2-29.)
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
e) Click “Add.”
The Windows New Connection
Wizard starts up.
f) Select “Serial Connection.”
g) Click the “Add” button.
h) Select “Dial-up to private network.”
i) Click “Next.”
j) Enter the phone number of the modem
connected to the 8382 you are setting
up.
k) Click “Next.”
l) Type in a name for your Connection
such as: “Connection to 8382 – Modem”
m)Click the “Finish” button.
INSTALLATION
2-61
2-62
INSTALLATION
n) Click “Yes.”
D) Edit your new Direct Connection properties:
a) Click “Settings.”
b) Click the “General” tab.
c) Select the modem you
will be using to make
the connection on the
PC side.
d) Click “Configure.”
ORBAN MODEL 8382
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
e) Set “Maximum
“115200.”
INSTALLATION
speed
(bps)”
to
f) Check “Enable hardware flow control.”
g) Check “Enable modem error control.”
h) Check “Enable mcdem compression.”
i) Make sure that no other box is checked.
j) Click “OK.”
k) Select the Networking tab.
l) Make sure that “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 /
NT4 / 2000, Internet” ap–pears in the
“Type of dial-up server I am calling”
field.
m)Make sure that
(TCP/IP) is checked.
“Internet
Protocol
You may leave “Client for Microsoft
Networks” checked if you like.
n) Click “OK.”
o) When the “Connection properties”
window ap-pears, click “OK.”
2. Launch an existing Windows XP modem connection.
Once you have set up a “connection” specifying a modem connection in the 8382
PC Remote application (see To set up a new connection on page 3-46), choosing
this connection from 8382 PC Remote automatically opens a Windows modem
connection to your 8382.
2-63
2-64
INSTALLATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
You can connect by selecting the desired connection from the drop-down
list in the CONNECT menu.
You can also connect by double-clicking
the connection in the “Connection List”
window.
If the connection is successful, a dialog bubble will appear on the bottom right
hand corner of the screen verifying your connection.
If you have trouble making a connection, refer to Troubleshooting Windows XP
Modem Connect on page 5-11. If you have trouble the first time after creating a
connection according to the instructions above, try restarting your computer to
clear its serial port.
3. To change the properties of an existing connection:
Right-click the connection in the “connection List” window and choose “Properties.” The “Connection properties” window opens (see page 2-54).
Updating your 8382’s Software
The software version number of PC Remote must be the same as the version number
of the software running within your 8382. If the software version of PC Remote is
higher than the version running in your 8382, PC Remote will automatically detect
this and will offer to update your 8382’s software automatically.
1. If you have not already done so, prepare your computer and the 8382
for a direct serial, modem, or Ethernet connection.
See Networking and Remote Control starting on page 2-33.
2. Install the latest version of 8382 PC Remote software on your computer.
This is available from
ftp://orban.com/8382
See Installing 8382 PC Remote Control Software on page 2-39.
See the readme8382_x.x.x.x.htm file (where x.x.x.x is the version number) for details about the upgrade not given in this manual. The PC Remote installer will install this file on your computer’s hard drive.
3. If you have not previously done so, start 8382 PC Remote and set up a
“connection” to the 8382 you will be updating.
See To set up a new connection on page 3-46.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
INSTALLATION
4. Update your 8382.
A) Attempt to initiate communication to your 8382 via your connection.
See To initiate communication on page 3-46.
8382 PC Remote will automatically detect that the 8382 software version
on your 8382 is not the same as the version of 8382 PC Remote. PC Remote will then offer to update your 8382 automatically.
This procedure will only work for a connection using an “all-screens”
(administrator) passcode.
B) Choose YES and wait for the update to complete. Note that this will cause an
interruption in the audio of approximately 3 seconds when your 8382 automatically reboots after the update is complete. If you cannot tolerate such an
interruption, choose NO or CANCEL to abort the update.
Please be patient; this will take several minutes. (The exact time will depend on whether the 8382 has to do any “housekeeping” to its flash
memory as part of the update.)
Completion will be indicated by the updater’s command-line window’s
closing automatically and your 8382’s rebooting.
Your 8382 will continue to pass audio normally while the update is occurring. However, the audio will be interrupted for approximately 3 seconds
when your 8382 reboots.
Do not interrupt power to your 8382 or your computer, close PC Remote
or the update application’s command-line window, or reboot your computer during this time. While doing any of these things is unlikely to
damage your 8382 (because of extensive backup and error-checking provisions in your 8382), they will certainly cause the update to fail.
C) When the 8382 screen display returns after its automatic reboot, the 8382 will
be running with the updated software.
If the update fails for some reason, try repeating the procedure in steps
(A) through (C) again.
D) If the 8382 screen remains blank for more than one minute after the update
has completed, manually reboot the 8382 by removing AC power from the
8382 for at least ten seconds and then powering the 8382 back up.
E) The 8382 software update is now complete. You should now be able to connect to your 8382 via PC Remote.
NOTE: If you cannot make a connection after a software upgrade, manually reboot the 8382 with a normal “power-off/power-on” sequence.
2-65
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
Section 3
Operation
8382 Front Panel
•
Screen Display labels the four soft buttons and provides control-setting information.
•
Screen Contrast button adjusts the optimum viewing angle of the screen display.
•
Four Soft buttons provide access to all 8382 functions and controls. The functions of the soft buttons change with each screen, according to the labels at the
bottom of each screen
•
Next and Prev (← and →) buttons scroll the screen horizontally to accommodate menus that cannot fit in the available space. They also allow you to move
from one character to the next when you enter data into your 8382.
These buttons flash when a scrolling menu is in use. Otherwise, they are
dark.
•
Control Knob changes the setting that is selected by the soft buttons. To
change a value, you usually have to hold down a soft button while you are turning the control knob.
•
Recall button allows you to recall a Factory or User Preset.
Selecting the RECALL button does not immediately recall a preset. See
step 17 on page 2-18 for instructions on recalling a preset.
•
Modify button brings you to list of controls that you can use to edit a Factory or
User Preset.
If you edit a Factory Preset, you must save it as a new User Preset to retain your edit.
•
Setup button accesses the technical parameters necessary to match the 8382 to
your transmission system.
3-1
3-2
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
•
Escape button provides an escape from current screen and returns user to the
next higher-level screen. Repeatedly pressing Escape will always return you to
the Idle screen, which is at the top level of the screen hierarchy.
•
Input meters show the peak input level applied to the 8382’s analog or digital
inputs with reference to 0 = digital full-scale. If the input meter’s red segment
lights up, you are overdriving the 8382’s analog to digital converter, which is a
very common cause of audible distortion.
•
AGC meter shows the gain reduction of the slow two-band AGC processing that
precedes the multi-band compressor. Full-scale is 25 dB gain reduction. You can
switch the meter so that it reads the gain reduction of the Master (above-200
Hz) band, the Bass (below-200Hz) band, or the difference between the gain reductions in the Master and Bass bands. The meter mode always reverts to
MASTER when the user leaves Full Modify.
The latter reading is useful for assessing the dynamic bass equalization
that the AGC produces and it helps you set the AGC BASS COUPLING
control.
•
Gate LED indicates gate activity, lighting when the input audio falls below the
threshold set by the AGC gate threshold control (via the Full Modify screen’s
AGC GATE control). When this happens, the AGC’s recovery time is slowed to
prevent noise rush-up during low-level passages.
•
Gain Reduction meters show the gain reduction in the multiband compressor.
Full-scale is 25 dB gain reduction.
When the Multiband structure is operating, all the meters indicate gain
reduction.
When the Two-Band structure is operating, the two leftmost meters indicate gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands, the two middle meters
indicate the gain reduction in the two-band high frequency limiter, and
the rightmost meter indicates the action of the HF Enhancer.
When the processing is in dual-mono mode, the gain reduction meters
can be toggled between channel 1 or channel 2 via SETUP/METERMODE or,
when you are in the Main screen, by pressing the PREV button for channel 1 and the NEXT button for channel 2. Meanwhile, the PC Remote application displays both channels’ gain reductions simultaneously.
•
Output Level meters show the instantaneous peak output of the processed audio in units of percentage modulation.
Introduction to Processing
Some Audio Processing Concepts
Reducing the peak-to-average ratio of the audio increases loudness. If peaks are reduced, the average level can be increased within the permitted modulation limits.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
The effectiveness with which this can be accomplished without introducing objectionable side effects (such as pumping or intermodulation distortion) is the single
best measure of audio processing effectiveness.
Compression reduces the difference in level between the soft and loud sounds to
make more efficient use of permitted peak level limits, resulting in a subjective increase in the loudness of soft sounds. It cannot make loud sounds seem louder.
Compression reduces dynamic range relatively slowly in a manner similar to riding
the gain: Limiting and clipping, on the other hand, reduce the short-term peak-toaverage ratio of the audio.
Limiting increases audio density. Increasing density can make loud sounds seem
louder, but can also result in an unattractive busier, flatter, or denser sound. It is important to be aware of the many negative subjective side effects of excessive density
when setting controls that affect the density of the processed sound.
Clipping sharp peaks does not produce any audible side effects when done moderately. Listeners will perceive excessive clipping as audible distortion.
Look-ahead limiting is limiting that prevents overshoots by examining a few milliseconds of the unprocessed sound before it is limited. This way the limiter can anticipate peaks that are coming up.
The 8382 uses look-ahead techniques in several parts of the processing to minimize
overshoot for a given level of processing artifacts (among other things).
Distortion in Processing
In a competently designed processor, distortion occurs only when the processor is
controlling peaks to prevent the audio from exceeding the peak modulation limits
of the transmission channel. The less peak control that occurs, the less likely that the
listener will hear distortion. However, to reduce the amount of peak control, you
must decrease the drive level to the peak limiter, which causes the average level
(and thus, the loudness) to decrease proportionally.
Loudness, Brightness and Distortion
In processing, there is a direct trade-off between loudness, brightness, and distortion. You can improve one only at the expense of one or both of the other two.
Thanks to Orban's psychoacoustically-optimized designs, this is less true of Orban
processors than of any others. Nevertheless, all competent processor designers must
acknowledge and work within the laws of physics as they apply to this trade-off.
Perhaps the most difficult part of adjusting a processor is determining the best
trade-off for a given situation. In television audio, excessive or insufficient loudness
(by comparison to other channels) is simply a viewer irritant. The advantage of
Orban's optimized processing is that the processing can be adjusted to create the
desired loudness while remaining free from irritating artifacts like audible clipping
distortion or dullness caused by excessive high-frequency limiting.
3-3
3-4
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Controlling Dynamic Range
The most crucial commandment in film and television audio is this: dialog must always be intelligible. Television audio is usually heard under less-than-ideal conditions, and the dynamic range of television audio must be controlled accordingly.
Apartment-dwellers must limit the loudness of their television sets to avoid disturbing neighbors or even other members of the family. At the quiet side, intelligibility
of dialog is often impacted by environmental noise such as children playing or a
dishwasher going in the kitchen. When one considers the fact that the hearing acuity of a significant portion of the audience is somewhat impaired compared to that
of a healthy 20-year-old, one concludes that the dynamic range of dialog in television audio must not exceed 15dB if it is to be intelligible to 99% of viewers under
common domestic viewing conditions. Feature-film dynamic range is completely inappropriate for television audio, and the dynamic range of a significant portion of
television source material must be compressed to best serve the audience. The challenge (which Optimod-TV effectively meets) is to compress dynamic range unobtrusively.
Processing for Any Programming
OPTIMOD-TV can be adjusted so that the output sounds as close as possible to the
input at all times (using the Protection Limiter Structure), or so that it sounds open
but more uniform in frequency balance than the input (using the Two-Band structure or slow Five-Band structures), or so that it sounds dense, quite squashed, and
very loud (using the fast Five-Band structure).
The dense, loud setup is almost always inappropriate for television audio unless the
station has unusual programming and goals. Most stations will want to use the Protection structure when broadcasting material that has been carefully produced by
people cognizant of the dynamic range limitations of television audio. For most
other program material the Two-Band or Slow Five-Band structures are appropriate.
Adapting the 8382's Sound to Your Programming
The subjective setup controls on the 8382 give you the flexibility to adapt the processing to individual program segments. In most cases, your goal should be to choose
the type of processing that best optimizes dynamic range while controlling the
loudness of the loudest sounds so that they are not irritating and are consistent with
the loudness of other stations.
When you start with one of our factory presets, there are three levels of subjective
adjustment available to you to let you customize the factory preset to your requirements: Basic, Full, and Advanced Control.
LESS-MORE
The LESS-MORE control is the most important part of Basic Modify. It affects the dynamics processing, allowing you to set the amount of average dynamic range reduction provided by the processing. As you go from less to more, the loudness of loud
sounds will stay about the same but the loudness of quieter sounds will increase. Because of the 8382's sophisticated gating circuits, very quiet material like background
sounds, quiet underscoring, hiss, and hum will not be pumped up.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
We have designed these presets so that the loudest sounds will be at the same level
as the loudest sounds produced by our older analog Model 8182A Optimod-TV
processor when set for general programming according to the recommended settings shown in its manual. This facilitates installation of the 8382 in a market that is
already using 8182As, guaranteeing that loudness will be uniform as a viewer
changes channels, thus preventing viewer irritation.
The music presets are essentially different. They provide “FM radio-style” processing
nd are based on Five-Band presets from Orban's 8400 FM digital processor. As you
go from less to more with these presets, the air sound will become louder, but (as
with any processor) processing artifacts will increase. The single LESS-MORE control
changes many different subjective setup control settings simultaneously according
to a table that we have created in the 8382's permanent ROM (Read-Only Memory).
In this table are sets of subjective setup control settings that provide, in our opinion,
the most favorable tradeoff between loudness, density, brightness, and audible distortion for a given amount of processing.
We believe that most 8382 users will never need to go beyond the LESS-MORE level
of control, because the combinations of subjective setup control settings produced
by this control have been optimized by Orban's audio processing experts on the basis of years of experience designing audio processing, and upon hundred of hours of
listening tests.
Please note that the highest LESS-MORE settings for the four music presets are purposely designed to cause unpleasant distortion and processing artifacts! This helps
assure you that the setting of the LESS-MORE control that you choose is optimum,
because turning the control up to this point will cause the sound quality to become
obviously unacceptable.
About the 8382’s Signal Processing Features
Signal Flow
The signal flows through the 8382 through the following blocks (see page 6-56):
•
Input Conditioning, including sample rate conversion, defeatable 30Hz highpass filtering, and defeatable phase rotation
•
Stereo Enhancement
•
Two-Band Gated AGC, with target-zone window gating and silence gating
•
Equalization, including high-frequency enhancement
•
Multiband Compression with embedded HF clipping and additional HF limiter
•
“Intelligent” Clipping with distortion control, distortion cancellation, and
anti-aliasing
3-5
3-6
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
•
Overshoot Compensation
•
DSP-derived Stereo Encoder (stereo generator)
Despite myths circulating in the marketplace regarding the alleged superiority of
higher sample rates in TV stereo processors, 32 kHz is, in fact, preferable to higher
rates as a basic sample rate for these devices. 32 kHz allows us to use DSP horsepower more efficiently, adding features that really improve the sound. By strictly
limiting the output bandwidth to 16 kHz, it also makes it easier to spectrally protect
the BTSC stereo pilot tone and SAP subcarrier.
The 8382’s digital output will pass through any uncompressed digital STL (including
those operating at 32 kHz sample rate) without added overshoot and without the
need for distortion-producing overshoot compensation schemes.
A defeatable 30Hz 18 dB/octave highpass filter and a defeatable phase rotator complete the input-conditioning block. These have both been features in Orban TV
processors for many years. Most users will defeat the 30Hz filter and leave the phase
rotator in-circuit, although the choice is always yours.
Stereo Enhancement: The 8382 provides a stereo enhancement algorithm based
on Orban’s patented analog 222 Stereo Enhancer, which increases the energy in the
stereo difference signal (L–R) whenever a transient is detected in the stereo sum signal (L+R). By operating only on transients, the 222 increases width, brightness, and
punch without unnaturally increasing reverb (which is usually predominantly in the
L–R channel).
Gating circuitry detects “mono” material with slight channel or phase imbalances
and suppresses enhancement so this built-in imbalance is not exaggerated. It also
allows you to set a “width limit” to prevent over-enhancement of material with significant stereo content, and will always limit the ratio of L–R / L+R to unity or less.
Two-Band Gated AGC: The AGC is a two-band device, using Orban’s patented
“master / bass” band coupling. It has an additional important feature: target-zone
gating. If the input program material’s level falls within a user-settable window
(typically 3dB), then the release time slows to a user-determined level. It can be slow
enough (0.5 dB/second) to effectively freeze the operation of the AGC. This prevents
the AGC from applying additional, audible gain control to material that is already
well controlled. It also lets you run the AGC with fast release times without adding
excessive density to material that is already dense.
The AGC contains a compression ratio control that allows you to vary to ratio between 2:1 and essentially ∞:1. Lower ratios can make gain riding subtler on critical
formats like classical and jazz.
The AGC has its own silence-gating detector whose threshold can be set independently of the silence gating applied to the multiband compressor.
Equalization: The 8382 has steep-slope bass shelving equalizer and three bands of
fully parametric bell-shaped EQ.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
You can set the slope of the bass shelving EQ to 6, 12, or 18 dB/octave and adjust the
shelving frequency.
The 8382’s bass, midrange, and high frequency parametric equalizers have curves
that were modeled on the curves of Orban’s classic analog parametrics (like the
622B), using a sophisticated, proprietary optimization program. The curves are
matched to better than 0.15dB. This means that their sound is very close to the
sound of an Orban analog parametric. They also use very high quality filter algorithms to ensure low noise and distortion.
The 8382 HF Enhancer is a program-controlled HF shelving equalizer that intelligently and continuously analyzes the ratio between broadband and HF energy in
the input program material. It can equalize excessively dull material without overenhancing bright material. It interacts synergistically with the five-band compressor
to produce sound that is bright and present without being excessively shrill.
Multiband Compression: The multiband compressor can be operated in five-band
or two-band mode. In addition to using a special high-frequency limiter, the 8382
controls high frequencies with distortion-canceled clipping. This clipper operates at
256 kHz-sample rate and is full anti-aliased.
Ordinarily, the gain reduction in band 5 follows the gain reduction in band 4 (as determined by the setting of the B4>B5 COUPLE control); these bands are only independent from the viewpoint of the downward expander and multiband clippers.
However, a high frequency limiter causes additional gain reduction in band 5 when
band 5 multiband clipping alone would be insufficient to prevent HF distortion. The
HF limiter uses a sophisticated analysis of the signal conditions in the 8382’s clipping
system to do this.
A clipper, embedded in the crossover, protects bands 1 and 2 from transient overshoot. This clipper has a shape control, allowing you to vary the “knee” of its input/output transfer curve from hard (0) to soft (10).
Loudness Control: The Two-Band structure contains a CBS Loudness Controller algorithm, which controls the loudness of most commercials well enough to eliminate
viewer annoyance. It works by constantly monitoring the subjective loudness of the
8382's output. When subjective loudness would otherwise exceed a preset threshold, the Loudness Controller enhances the normal gain control produced by the
processing with further gain reduction, preventing loudness from exceeding the
threshold. The user can adjust this threshold from the Full modify screen of any TwoBand preset. The edited preset can then be saved as a user preset.
The Loudness Controller may reduce the dramatic effect of certain sounds in entertainment programming, like gunshots, explosions, or screeching tires. Operators may
therefore want to turn the Loudness Controller on during commercial breaks and
off during normal programming. Most Two-Band presets have the Loudness Controller on. The easiest way to turn the Loudness Controller off is to recall the 2B GEN
PUR NO LC preset. If you have created a custom preset, you can save two variations—one with the loudness controller on and one with it off—and recall these by
remote control via the 8382’s GPI inputs.
3-7
3-8
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
The Five-Band structure does not have extra loudness control because its multiband
processing will automatically re-equalize and condition program material to control
loudness variations.
“Intelligent” Clipping: The 8382 prevents excess clipping distortion by dynamically reducing the drive level to the clippers as required, using an intelligent analysis
of the clipping distortion produced in the final clipper and overshoot compensator.
Two-Band Purist Processing
The 8382’s two-band algorithm can be set to be phase-linear. We believe that this is
the ideal processing for classical music and jazz programming because it does not
dynamically re-equalize high frequencies; the subtle HF limiter only acts to reduce
high frequency energy when it would otherwise cause overload because of the TV
pre-emphasis curve. The 8382’s two-band phase-linear structure therefore keeps the
musical spectrum coherent and natural.
Input/output Delay
The algorithmic improvements in the 8382 over the first generation Orban DSPbased processing (the 8282) have one significant cost—the input/output time delay
is typically 20 ms, or about two-thirds of an NTSC frame. To make intelligent decisions about how to process, the 8382 needs to look ahead at the next part of the
program waveform. As digital on-air processing advances further and further from
its analog roots, this is the inevitable price of progress.
To avoid lip sync problems, the 8382 allows you to pad the delay to one full frame of
24, 25, or 29.97 fps video, which makes matching audio and video delays convenient.
See step 21 on page 2-20.
In most television plants, talent does not monitor off-air through headphones. If
they do so and they are in the same location as the 8382, you can configure the
8382’s analog outputs to supply a special low-latency monitor signal to drive headphones only. (See step 10 on page 2-16.)
Customizing the 8382’s Sound
The subjective setup controls on the 8382 give you the flexibility to customize your
station’s sound. Nevertheless, as with any audio processing system, proper adjustment of these controls consists of balancing the trade-offs between loudness, density, and audible distortion. The following pages provide the information you need
to adjust the 8382 controls to suit your format, taste, and competitive situation.
When you start with one of our Factory Presets, there are two levels of subjective
adjustment available to you to let you customize the Factory Preset to your requirements: Basic Modify and Full Modify. A third level, Advanced Modify, is accessible only from the 8382’s PC Remote software.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
See page 6-56 for a block diagram of the processing.
Basic Modify
BASIC MODIFY allows you to control three important elements of 8382 processing:
the stereo enhancer, the equalizer, and the dynamics section (multiband compression, limiting, and clipping). At this level, there is only one control for the dynamics
section: LESS-MORE, which changes several different subjective setup control settings
simultaneously according to a table that we have created in the 8382’s permanent
ROM (Read-Only Memory). In this table are sets of subjective setup control settings
that provide, in our opinion, the most favorable trade-off between loudness, density, and audible distortion for a given amount of dynamics processing. We believe
that most 8382 users will never need to go beyond the Basic level of control. The
combinations of subjective setup control settings produced by this control have been
optimized by Orban’s audio processing experts on the basis of years of experience
designing audio processing, and upon hundred of hours of listening tests.
As you increase the setting of the LESS-MORE control, the air sound will become
louder, but (as with any processor) processing artifacts will increase. Please note that
the highest LESS-MORE setting is purposely designed to cause unpleasant distortion
and processing artifacts! This helps assure you that you have chosen the optimum
setting of the LESS-MORE control, because turning the control up to this point will
cause the sound quality to become obviously unacceptable. To match the loudness
of other stations in your market, it should never be necessary to increase the processing level this far unless your plant has severe overshoot problems in the transmission chain after the 8382.
You need not (in fact, cannot) create a sound entirely from scratch. All User Presets
are created by modifying Factory Presets, or by further modifying Factory Presets
that have been previously modified with a LESS-MORE adjustment. It is wise to set
the LESS-MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possible to your desired sound
before you make further modifications at the Advanced Modify level. This is because
the LESS-MORE control gets you close to an optimum trade-off between loudness
and artifacts, so any changes you make are likely to be smaller and to require resetting fewer controls.
In the 8382, LESS-MORE affects only the dynamics processing (compression, limiting,
and clipping). Unlike Orban’s OPTIMOD-TV 8282, the 8382 has equalization and stereo enhancement that are decoupled from LESS-MORE. You can therefore change EQ
or stereo enhancement and not lose the ability to use LESS-MORE. When you create
a user preset, the 8382 will automatically save your EQ and stereo enhancement settings along with your LESS-MORE setting. When you recall the user preset, you will
still be able to edit your LESS-MORE setting if you wish.
Full Modify
Full Modify is the most detailed control level available from the 8382’s front panel. It
allows you to adjust the dynamics section at approximately the level of “full control” available in Orban’s 8282 processor. Because of improvements in the 8382’s sig-
3-9
3-10
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
nal processing by comparison to the 8282, these controls are not extremely dangerous (although you can still get into trouble if you try hard enough). Most people will
never have any reason to go beyond Full Modify.
Note: Full Modify does not provide LESS-MORE control. Furthermore,
once you have edited a preset’s dynamics parameters in Full Modify,
LESS-MORE control is no longer available in Basic Modify and will be
grayed-out if you access its screen. As noted above, we recommend using
the Basic Modify LESS-MORE control to achieve a sound as close as possible to your desired sound before you make further modifications at the
Full Modify level.
Advanced Modify
If you want to create a signature sound for your station that is far out of the ordinary, or if your taste differs from the people who programmed the LESS-MORE tables, Advanced Modify is available to you from the 8382 PC Remote software only
(not from the 8382’s front panel). At this level, you can customize or modify any subjective setup control setting to create a sound exactly to your taste. You can then
save the settings in a User Preset and recall it whenever you wish. Note, however,
that this sort of customization is usually unnecessary and inappropriate for television audio.
Compressor attack times and thresholds are available, along with settings affecting
the automatic clipping distortion control. These controls can be exceedingly dangerous in inexperienced hands, leading you to create presets that sound great on some
program material and fall apart embarrassingly on other material. We therefore
recommend that you create custom presets at the Advanced Modify level only if you
are experienced with on-air sound design, and if you are willing to take the time to
double-check your work on many different types of program material.
The PC Remote software organizes its controls in tabbed screens. The first three tabs
(EQUALIZATION, STEREO ENHANCER, and LESS-MORE) access the Basic Modify controls.
The remaining tabs combine the Full Modify and Advanced Modify controls, logically organized by functionality.
Important Note: Once you have edited a preset’s dynamics parameters
in Full or Advanced Modify, LESS-MORE control is no longer available in
Basic Modify. As noted above, we strongly recommend using the LESSMORE control to achieve a sound as close as possible to your desired
sound before you make further modifications at the Full or Advanced
Modify levels.
Gain Reduction Metering
Unlike the metering on some processors, when any OPTIMOD-TV gain reduction meter indicates full-scale (at its bottom), it means that its associated compressor has run
out of gain reduction range, that the circuitry is being overloaded, and that various
nastinesses are likely to commence.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
Because the various compressors have 25 dB of gain reduction range, the meter
should never come close to 25 dB gain reduction if OPTIMOD-TV has been set up for
a sane amount of gain reduction under ordinary program conditions.
To accommodate the TV pre-emphasis curve, Band 5 of the Five-Band
Structure is capable of 30 dB of gain reduction.
Further, be aware of the different peak factors on voice and music—if voice and music are peaked identically on a VU meter, voice may cause up to 10 dB more peak
gain reduction than does music! (A PPM will indicate relative peak levels much more
accurately.)
The AGC meter can be switched (within the Full Control screens) so that it either
reads the gain reduction of the Master (above-200 Hz) band, or the difference between the gain reduction in the Master and Bass bands.
The latter reading is useful for assessing the dynamic bass equalization
that the AGC produces and it helps you set the AGC BASS COUPLING
control.
To Create or Save a User Preset
Once you have edited a preset, you can save it as a user preset. The 8382 can
store an indefinite number of user presets, limited only by available memory.
The 8382 will offer to save any edited, unsaved preset when the main screen is
visible. To save a preset:
A) Press the ESC button repeatedly until you see the main screen, which shows
the current time and the preset presently on air.
If there is an unsaved preset on air, the rightmost button will be labeled
SAVE PRESET.
B) Press the SAVE PRESET button.
The Save Preset screen appears.
C) Choose a name for your preset.
Some non-alphanumeric characters (such as < and >) are reserved and
cannot be used in preset names.
D) Use the knob to set the each character in the preset name. Use the NEXT and
PREV buttons to control the cursor position.
E) Press the SAVE CHANGES button.
•
If the name that you have selected duplicates the name of a factory preset, the 8382 will suggest an alternate name.
You cannot give a user preset the same name as a factory preset.
•
If the name you have selected duplicates the name of an existing user preset, the 8382 warns you that you are about to overwrite that preset. Answer YES if you wish to overwrite the preset and NO otherwise. If you an-
3-11
3-12
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
swer NO, the 8382 will give you an opportunity to choose a new name for
the preset you are saving.
You can save user presets from the 8382 PC Remote application. (See
Using the 8382 PC Remote Control Software on page 3-45.) Please note
that when you save presets from the PC Remote application, you save
them in the 8382’s memory (as if you had saved them from the 8382’s
front panel). The PC Remote application also allows you to archive presets to your computer’s hard drive (or other storage device) and to restore them. However, archiving a preset is not the same as saving it. Archived presets reside on a storage medium supported by your computer,
while saved presets reside in the 8382’s local non-volatile memory. You
cannot archive a preset until you have saved it. (See To back up user presets, system files, and automation files onto your computer’s hard drive
on page 3-48.)
Note that if, for some reason, you wish to save an unmodified preset (either Factory or user) under a new name, you must temporarily make an
arbitrary edit to that preset in order to make the SAVE PRESET button appear. After you have saved the preset, reverse the edit and save the preset again.
About the Processing Structures
If you want to create your own User Presets, the following detailed discussion of the
processing structures is important to understand. If you only use Factory Presets, or
if you only modify them with LESS-MORE, then you may still find the material interesting, but you do not need to understand it to get excellent sound from the 8382.
We have carefully crafted the 8382’s factory presets and most television stations will
never need to go beyond these.
In the 8382, a processing structure is a program that operates as a complete audio
processing system. Only one processing structure can be active at a time. Just as
there are many possible ways of configuring a processing system using analog components (like equalizers, compressors, limiters, and clippers), the 8382’s DSP hardware could realize several possible processing structures that. Unlike an analog system, where creating a complete processing system involves physically wiring its various components together, the 8382 realizes its processing structures as a series of
high-speed mathematical computations made by Digital Signal Processing (DSP) integrated circuit chips.
There are two basic structures: Two-Band and Five-Band. To select a structure,
choose a factory preset having the desired structure, and, if you wish, edit it to create a user preset. To put a given structure on the air, recall a factory or user preset
associated with that structure.
Five-Band: The Five-Band structure is very flexible, enabling you to fine-tune your
on-air sound. There are several basic Factory Presets for the Five-Band structure.
Each of these presets can be edited with the LESS-MORE control.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
This control affects the television audio presets differently than it does the music
presets. When a television audio preset is on the air, the LESS-MORE control adjusts
the average amount of gain reduction by adjusting the drive level to the Five-Band
structure's input. This also adjusts the idle gain—the amount of gain reduction in
the AGC section when the structure is gated. (It gates whenever the input level to
the structure is below the user-adjustable threshold of gating.)
When a music preset is on the air, the LESS-MORE control sets the amount of overall
processing, making optimum tradeoffs between loudness, brightness, and distortion. In television audio, there are no loudness wars; for music presets, there is
probably never a need to advance the LESS-MORE control beyond 5.
The stereo enhancer, AGC, equalizer, and “back end” clippers are common to both
Two-Band and Five-Band processing and therefore stay the same when the 8382
switches between two-band and five-band operation. However, different controls
appear in the screens containing dynamics processing controls, as appropriate for
Two-Band or Five-Band multiband compression. The meters also change functionality to display the Two-Band or Five-Band gain reduction.
Both the Two-Band and Five-Band multiband compressors always operate in the
background. Switching between Two-Band and Five-Band therefore occurs with a
seamless cross-fade. Unlike older Orban processors like the 8282, no DSP code gets
reloaded and no audio mute occurs, although switching can sound obtrusive if the
loudness normally produced by the two-band and five-band presets are very different. It is usually possible to eliminate audibly obtrusive switching artifacts by tweaking one (or both) of the presets to make them sound closer to each other.
In addition, switching between stereo and dual-mono mode does not reload DSP
code, so no mute will occur, unlike the 8282.
Two-Band: The two-band structure preserves the frequency balance between midrange and high frequency elements in the programming, while permitting gentle
automatic re-equalization of the balance between these elements (in the “master”
band, which is above 200 Hz) and elements in the “bass” band (below 200 Hz).
The AGC and two-band crossovers can be configured to be either phase-linear (i.e.,
constant-delay) or “allpass.” “Allpass” provides minimum time delay along with a
frequency response that is free from peaking or dipping when band gains are unequal. “Allpass” also helps make speech waveforms more symmetrical. Most twoband presets use the allpass configuration. The delay-line derived phase-linear
crossover has the same desirable smoothness in its frequency response as “allpass,”
while adding 4 ms of delay to the processing.
The Two-Band structure contains a CBS Loudness Controller algorithm that controls
the loudness of most commercials well enough to eliminate viewer annoyance. It
works by constantly monitoring the subjective loudness of the 8382's output. When
subjective loudness would otherwise exceed a preset threshold, the Loudness Controller enhances the normal gain control produced by the processing with further
gain reduction, preventing loudness from exceeding the threshold. The user can adjust this threshold from the FULL CONTROL screen of any Two-Band preset. The edited preset can then be saved as a user preset.
3-13
3-14
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
The Loudness Controller may reduce the dramatic effect of certain sounds in entertainment programming, like gunshots, explosions, or screeching tires. Operators may
therefore want to turn the Loudness Controller on during commercial breaks and
off during normal programming. All Two-Band presets have the Loudness Controller
on except for preset 2B GEN PUR NO LC. The easiest way to turn the Loudness Controller off is to recall this preset. You may also create a User Preset with the Loudness
Controller turned off.
(The Five-Band structure does not have extra loudness control because its multiband
processing tends to automatically re-equalize and condition program material to
control loudness variations.)
Factory Programming Presets
Factory Programming Presets are our “factory recommended settings” for various
program formats or types. The Factory Programming Presets are starting points to
help you get on the air quickly without having to understand anything about adjusting the 8382’s sound.
You can easily edit any of these presets with the LESS-MORE control to optimize the
trade-off between loudness and distortion according to the needs of your format,
although this is usually unnecessary. It is OK to use unmodified factory presets on
the air. These represent the best efforts of some very experienced on-air sound designers. We are sometimes asked about unpublished “programming secrets” for Optimods. In fact, there are no “secrets” that we withhold from users. Our “secrets”
are revealed in this manual and the presets embody all of our craft as processing experts. The presets are editable because other sound designers may have different
preferences from ours, not because the presets are somehow mediocre or improvable by those with special, arcane knowledge that we withhold from most of our
customers.
Start with one of these presets. Spend some time listening critically to your on-air
sound. Listen to a wide range of program material typical of your format, and listen
on several types of television audio systems (not just on your studio monitors). Then,
if you wish, customize your sound using the information in the Protection Limiter,
Two-Band and Five-Band sections that follow.
Each Orban factory preset has full LESS-MORE capability. The table shows the presets,
including the source presets from which they were taken and the nominal LESSMORE setting of each preset. Some of the Five-Band presets appear several times under different names because we felt that these presets were appropriate for more
than one format; these can be identified by a shared source preset name.
Important! If you are dissatisfied with the sound available from the factory presets, please understand that each named preset is actually 19 presets that can be accessed via the LESS-MORE control. Try using this control
to trade off the amount of dynamic range reduction against processing
artifacts and side effects. Once you have used LESS-MORE, save your edited preset as a User Preset.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
Do not be afraid to choose a preset other than the one named for the type of programming on-air if you believe this other preset has a more appropriate sound. Also,
if you want to fine-tune the frequency balance of the programming, feel free to use
Basic Modify and make small changes to the Bass, Mid EQ, and HF EQ controls.
Unlike some earlier Orban’s processors, the 8382 lets you make changes in EQ (and
stereo enhancement) without losing the ability to use LESS-MORE settings.
Of course, LESS-MORE is still available for the unedited preset if you want
to go back to it. There is no way you can erase or otherwise damage the
Factory Presets. So, feel free to experiment.
If a preset has 2B in its name, it will activate the Two-Band structure. (The Protection
presets are two-band as well.) Switching between the Two-Band and Five-Structures
occurs via a smooth cross-fade.
2B–GEN PURPOSE (Two-Band General Purpose): This preset accommodates most
dramatic programming, providing gentle gain control that limits dynamic range to a
level that provides the general audience with consistently intelligible dialog and
consistent loudness. It sounds very similar to Orban’s analog OPTIMOD-TV (Model
8182A) when that unit is adjusted for “General” programming according to the instructions in its operating manual. This preset retains the spectral balance of its input as much as possible. 2B-GEN PURPOSE is seldom the best choice for live news,
sports, or films with optical soundtracks. The Five-Band presets (see below) can
automatically equalize such program material when its spectral balance is inappro-
FACTORY PROGRAMMING PRESETS
Preset Names
Source Preset
2B-CLASSICAL
2B-CLASSICAL
2B-CLASSICAL+AGC
2B-CLASSICAL+AGC
5B-CLASSICAL
5B-CLASSICAL
5B-CLASSICAL+AGC
5B-CLASSICAL+AGC
2B-FINE ARTS
2B-CLASSICAL+AGC
2B-GEN PURPOSE
2B-GEN PURPOSE
2B-GEN PURP NO LC
B-GEN PURP NO LC
JPN 2B PROCESSED
JPN 2B PROCESSED
2B-NEWS
LIVE NEWS
2B-SPORTS
LIVE SPORTS
5B-GEN PUR W NR
5B-GEN PURPOSE
5B-GEN PURPOSE
5B-GEN PURPOSE
5B-NEWS
5B-NEWS
5B-OPTICAL FILM
5B-OPTICAL FILM
5B-SPORTS
5B-SPORTS
PROTECTION 0 DB
PROTECTION 0 DB
5B-MUSIC SOFT
5B-MUSIC SOFT
5B-MUSIC MEDIUM
5B-MUSIC MEDIUM
5B-MUSIC PROCESSED
5B-MUSIC PROCESSED
Table 3-1: Factory Programming Presets
Normal Less-More
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
2.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.0
2.0
7.0
7.0
7.0
3-15
3-16
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
priate and can apply single-ended dynamic noise reduction.
2B–GEN PURPOSE NO LC (Two-Band General Purpose with Loudness Controller Defeated) is the same as 2B-GEN PURPOSE except that the Loudness Controller is defeated. Defeating the Loudness Controller is sometimes desirable for entertainment
programming that uses loud effects (gunshots, screeching tires, and the like) for
dramatic effect. This preset could be put on-air (by automation) during entertainment programming while 2B-GEN PURPOSE (which has loudness control) could be
used during commercials and promos to reduce audience irritation, thus reducing
the inclination of the audience to mute the audio or to tune out altogether during
these segments.
JPN 2B PROCESSED is the same as 2B-GEN PURP NO LC except that the MB LIMIT
SPEECH THRESHOLD control is set to “0.” This ensures that test tone levels will not
change when the processing is switched between STEREO and DUAL-MONO modes,
facilitating alignment with tones.
2B–FINE ARTS (Two-Band Fine Arts) is identical to 2B-GEN PURPOSE except that it
rides gain more slowly than the general-purpose presets.
2B–NEWS (Two-Band Live News) rides gain more quickly than the general-purpose
presets. Its gate threshold is lower, so it will bring up low-level input material more
quickly. It is designed for live news programs where input levels may be quite unpredictable. Being a Two-Band preset, it does not automatically re-equalize substandard audio (which is quite common in live news broadcasts). You may therefore prefer the Five-Band Live News preset (5B-NEWS).
2B–SPORTS (Two-Band Live Sports): is similar to 2B–NEWS except the release time is
slower to resist pumping up crowd noise.
5B-GEN PUR W/NR (Five-Band General Purpose with Noise Reduction): provides effective dynamic range control and “automatic re-equalization” of most dramatic
material. It applies single-ended noise reduction to the material, which will reduce
unwanted noise like hiss, hum, or stage rumble. However, it will also reduce ambience. If the program material is carefully produced (as are most contemporary feature-film soundtracks), you may wish to use 5B-GEN PURPOSE (which does not apply
noise reduction), or, if the material is so well produced that it would not benefit
from “automatic re-equalization,” to use 2B-GEN PURPOSE.
5B-GEN PURPOSE (Five-Band General Purpose without Noise Reduction): is identical
to 5B-GEN PUR W/NR except that the single-ended dynamic noise reduction system is
off.
5B-NEWS (Five-Band News): rides gain more quickly than the general-purpose presets. Its AGC release time is faster so it will bring up low-level material more quickly.
It is designed for live news programs, whose input levels may be quite unpredictable. It also automatically re-equalizes substandard audio (which is quite common in
live news broadcasts).
5B-SPORTS (Five-Band Sports): is similar to 5B-NEWS, except the AGC release time is
slower to resist pumping up crowd noise.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
5B-OPTICAL FILM (Five-Band Optical Film): makes the best of the low-quality audio
provided with optical film sound tracks (particularly 16mm). The gate threshold is
quite high to avoid pumping up hiss, thumps, and other optical artifacts. The
threshold of the single-ended dynamic noise reduction system is also high so that
this system can reduce artifacts as much as possible. Release times are slow because
material encoded on optical film has already been carefully level-controlled to accommodate the very limited dynamic range of the medium and little gain riding is
therefore required from OPTIMOD-TV.
PROTECTION: PROTECTION is a two-band phase-linear preset with a high amount of
band coupling. It is intended for use below threshold most of the time, to provide
protection limiting in the highest quality applications such as serious classical music
intended for an attentive audience. Its LESS-MORE control determines the normal
amount of gain reduction but does not increase distortion or other processing artifacts when turned up.
Setting Up Protection Limiting: To set up protection limiting, recall preset
PROTECTION 0DB. The LESS-MORE control affects only the input drive, and you can use
it to set a nominal limiting level different from 0dB.
CLASSICAL: As their names imply, both the CLASSICAL-FIVE-BAND and CLASSICAL-TWOBAND presets are optimized for classical music and fine arts programming, gracefully
handling material with very wide dynamic range and sudden shifts in dynamics. The
Five-Band version uses heavy inter-band coupling to prevent large amounts of
automatic re-equalization, which could otherwise cause unnatural stridency and
brightness in strings and horns, and which could pump up very low frequency rumble in live recording venues.
Classical music is traditionally broadcast with a wide dynamic range. However, with
many recordings and live performances, the dynamic range is so great that the quiet
passages disappear into the noise on most car, portable, and table radios. Consequently, the listener either hears nothing, or must turn up the volume control to
hear all the music. Then, when the music gets loud, the receiver blasts and distorts,
making listening unpleasant. To prevent this, the classical presets are designed to
reduce the overall dynamic range of the music by 10 – 15 dB, allowing quiet passage
to be heard easily while still preserving a musically appropriate dynamic range.
The CLASSICAL-FIVE-BAND and CLASSICAL-TWO-BAND presets defeat the AGC, using
only the multiband compressor for gain reduction. They also defeats phase rotation
to ensure the most transparent sound available.
The CLASSICAL-TWO-BAND preset provides the most transparent, “purist” classical
processing. This processing is phase-linear and preserves the spectral balance of the
original material as much as possible. However, if you need a bit more automatic reequalization than the CLASSICAL-TWO-BAND preset provides, use the CLASSICAL-FIVEBAND preset.
CLASSICAL-5B+AGC uses the AGC, set for 2:1 compression ratio. Because of the
AGC, it affects more of the total dynamic range of the recording than does the
CLASSICAL-5 BAND preset. However, the AGC provides extremely smooth and unobtrusive compression because of the gentle ratio and window gating. This preset
3-17
3-18
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
uses the Five-Band compressor very lightly with a fast release time as a peak limiter.
The AGC does almost all of the compression.
There is also a corresponding two-band preset called CLASSICAL-2B+AGC. In our
opinion, this provides an ideal combination of unobtrusive compression and low
coloration, typically raising low-level material about 10 dB.
To maintain the highest amount of musical integrity, none of the two-band presets
uses loudness control, although it could easily be turned on and the result then
saved as a User Preset.
Note that the classical presets’ preservation of some dynamic range makes gain riding important—these are not “set and forget” presets. In particular, speech (like
concert commentary) needs to be appropriately gain-ridden so that the music /
speech balance is correct.
Equalizer Controls
The table summarizes the equalization controls available for the Five-Band structure. (Note that “advanced” controls are accessible only from 8382 PC Remote software.)
Except for BRILLIANCE and DJ BASS, these equalization controls are common to both
the Two-Band and Five-Band structures. The equalizer is located between the AGC
and multiband compressor sections of both structures.
Any equalization that you set will be automatically stored in any User Preset that
you create and save. For example, you can use a User Preset to combine an unmodified Factory Programming Preset with your custom equalization. Of course, you can
also modify the Factory Preset (with Basic Modify, Full Modify, or Advanced Modify)
before you create your User Preset.
In general, you should be conservative when equalizing modern, well-recorded program material. This is particularly true with general-purpose television programming.
Except for BASS GAIN, most of the factory presets use less than 3 dB of equalization.
Bass Shelf Controls, the Five-Band structure’s low bass equalization controls, are
designed to add punch and slam to rock and urban music. They provide a parametric
shelving equalizer with control over gain, hinge frequency, and slope (in dB/octave).
BASS FREQ sets the frequency where shelving starts to take effect.
BASS GAIN sets the amount of bass boost (dB) at the top of the shelf.
BASS SLOPE sets the slope ( dB/octave) of the transition between the
top and bottom of the shelf.
The moderate-slope (12 dB/octave) shelving boost achieves a bass boost that is more
audible on smaller receivers, but which can sound boomier on high-quality receivers
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
and home theater systems. The steep-slope (18 dB/octave) shelving boost creates a
solid, punchy bass from the better consumer receivers and home theater systems
with decent bass response. The 6 dB/octave shelving boost is like a conventional
tone control and creates the most mid-bass boost, yielding a “warmer” sound. Because it affects the mid-bass frequency range, where the ear is more sensitive than it
is to very low bass, the 6 dB/octave slope can create more apparent bass level at the
cost of bass “punch.”
There are no easy choices here; you must choose the characteristic you want by
identifying your target audience and the receivers they are most likely to be using.
Often, you will not want to use any boost at all for general-purpose television programming because this can exaggerate rumble and other low frequency noise. Additionally, large amounts of boost will increase the gain reduction in the lowest
band of the multiband compressor, which may have the effect of reducing some frequencies below 100 or 200 Hz (depending on the setting of the B1/B2 XOVER control). So be aware the large fixed bass boosts may have a different effect than you
expect because of the way that they interact with the multiband compressor.
On the other hand, stations specializing in pop music programming will usually want
Equalizer Controls
Group
Basic /
Full Modify
Name
BASS FREQ
Bass Shelf
Advanced
Name
Range
Bass Frequency
BASS GAIN
BASS SLOPE
LF FREQ
LF GAIN
LF WIDT
MID FREQ
MID GAIN
Bass Gain
Bass Slope
Low Frequency
Low Gain
Low Width
Mid Frequency
Mid Gain
80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110,
115, 120, 125, 130, 135, 140,
145, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190,
200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250,
270, 290, 310, 330, 350, 380,
410, 440, 470, 500Hz
0 … 12 dB
6,12,18 dB / Oct
20 ... 500 Hz
–10.0 … +10.0 dB
0.8 ... 4 octaves
250 ... 6000 Hz
–10.0 … +10.0 dB
MID WIDTH
HIGH FREQ
HIGH GAIN
Mid Width
High Frequency
High Gain
0.8 ... 4 octaves
1.0 … 15.0 kHz
–10.0 … +10.0 dB
Brilliance
HF Enhancer
HIGH WIDTH
BRILLNCE
HF ENH
0.8 ... 4 octaves
0.0 … +6.0 dB
0 … 15
DJ Bass
30Hz HPF
DJ BASS
30HZ HPF
Phase Rotate
PH-ROTATE
High Width
Brilliance
High Frequency
Enhancer
DJ Bass Boost
30 Hz High Pass
Filter
Phase Rotator
Low
Mid
High
Off, 1… +10 dB
Off / On
Out / In
Table 3-2: Five-Band Equalization Controls
3-19
3-20
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
to employ some bass boost to maintain the punch of this programming, particularly
if urban or rap music is a significant part of the music mix.
Low Frequency Parametric Equalizer is a specially designed equalizer whose
boost and cut curves closely emulate those of a classic Orban analog parametric
equalizer with conventional bell-shaped curves (within ±0.15 dB worst-case). This
provides warm, smooth, “analog-sounding” equalization.
LF FREQ determines the center frequency of the equalization, in Hertz.
Range is 20-500Hz.
LF GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut (in dB) over a ±10
dB range.
LF WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves. The
range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, 1.5 octaves is a good starting point. These curves are relatively
broad because they are designed to provide overall tonal coloration,
rather than to notch out small areas of the spectrum.
The LF parametric can be used in the mid-bass region (100-300Hz) to add “warmth”
and “mellowness” to the sound when boosting. When cutting, it can remove a
“woody” or “boxy” sound.
The equalizer, like the classic Orban analog parametrics such as the 622B, has constant “Q” curves. This means that the cut curves are narrower than the boost curves.
The width (in octaves) is calibrated with reference to 10 dB boost. As you decrease
the amount of EQ gain (or start to cut), the width in octaves will decrease. However,
the “Q” will stay constant.
“Q” is a mathematical parameter that relates to how fast ringing damps out. (Technically, we are referring to the “Q” of the poles of the equalizer transfer function,
which does not change as you adjust the amount of boost or cut.)
The curves in the 8382’s equalizer were created by a so-called “minimax” (“minimize
the maximum error”or “equal-ripple”) IIR digital approximation to the curves provided by the Orban 622B analog parametric equalizer. Therefore, unlike less sophisticated digital equalizers that use the “bilinear transformation” to generate EQ
curves, the shapes of the 8382’s curves are not distorted at high frequencies.
Midrange Parametric Equalizer is a parametric equalizer whose boost and cut
curves closely emulate those of an analog parametric equalizer with conventional
bell-shaped curves.
MID FREQ determines the center frequency of the equalization, in Hertz.
Range is 250-6000Hz.
MID GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut (in dB) over a
±10 dB range.
MID WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves.
The range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, 1 octave is a good starting point.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
With five-band presets, the audible effect of the midrange equalizer is closely associated with the amount of gain reduction in the midrange bands. With small
amounts of gain reduction, it boosts power in the presence region. This can increase
the loudness of such material substantially. As you increase the gain reduction in the
midrange bands (by turning the MULTIBAND DRIVE (Multiband Drive) control up), the
MID GAIN control will have progressively less audible effect. The compressor for the
midrange bands will tend to reduce the effect of the Mid frequency boost (in an attempt to keep the gain constant) to prevent excessive stridency in program material
that already has a great deal of presence power. Therefore, with large amounts of
gain reduction, the density of presence region energy will be increased more than
will the level of energy in that region. Because the 3.7 kHz band compressor is partially coupled to the gain reduction in the 6.2 kHz band in most presets, tuning MID
FREQ to 2-4 kHz and turning up the MID GAIN control will decrease energy in the 6.2
kHz band—you will be increasing the gain reduction in both the 3.7 kHz and 6.2 kHz
bands. You may wish to compensate for this effect by turning up the BRILLIANCE control.
With two-band presets, the midrange equalizer will behave much more as you
might expect because the two-band structure cannot automatically re-equalize midrange energy. Instead, increasing midrange energy will moderately increase the
Master band’s gain reduction.
Use the mid frequency equalizer with caution. Excessive presence boost tends to be
audibly strident and fatiguing. Moreover, the sound quality, although loud, can be
very irritating. We suggest a maximum of 3 dB boost, although 10 dB is achievable.
In some of our factory music presets, we use a 3 dB boost at 2.6 kHz to bring vocals
more up-front.
High Frequency Parametric Equalizer is an equalizer whose boost and cut curves
closely emulate those of an analog parametric equalizer with conventional bellshaped curves.
HIGH FREQ determines the center frequency of the equalization, in
Hertz. The range is 1-15 kHz
HIGH GAIN determines the amount of peak boost or cut over a ±10 dB
range.
HIGH WIDTH determines the bandwidth of the equalization, in octaves.
The range is 0.8-4.0 octaves. If you are unfamiliar with using a parametric
equalizer, one octave is a good starting point.
Excessive high frequency boost can exaggerate hiss and distortion in program material that is less than perfectly clean. We suggest no more than 4 dB boost as a practical maximum, unless source material is primarily from high-quality digital sources. In
several of our presets, we use this equalizer to boost the upper presence band (4.4
kHz) slightly, leaving broadband HF boost to the BRILLIANCE and/or HF ENHANCE controls.
BRILLNCE (“Brilliance”) controls the drive to Band 5. The high frequency limiter and
Band 5 clipper dynamically control these boosts, protecting the final clipper from ex-
3-21
3-22
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
cessive HF drive. We recommend a maximum of 4 dB of BRILLNCE boost; most people
will prefer substantially less.
DJ BASS (“DJ Bass Boost“) control determines the amount of bass boost produced
on some male voices. In its default OFF position, it causes the gain reduction of the
lowest frequency band to move quickly to the same gain reduction as its nearest
neighbor when gated. This fights any tendency of the lowest frequency band to develop significantly more gain than its neighbor when processing voice because voice
will activate the gate frequently. Each time it does so, it will reset the gain of the
lowest frequency band so that the gains of the two bottom bands are equal and the
response in this frequency range is flat. The result is natural-sounding bass on male
voice. This is particularly desirable for most television programming.
If you like a larger-than-life, “chesty” sound on male voice, set this control away
from OFF. When so set, gating causes the gain reduction of the lowest frequency
band to move to the same gain reduction (minus a gain offset equal to the numerical setting of the control) as its nearest neighbor when gated. You can therefore set
the maximum gain difference between the two low frequency bands, producing
considerable dynamic bass boost on voice. This setting might be appropriate for
news and sports.
The difference will never exceed the difference that would have otherwise occurred if the lowest frequency band were gated independently. If
you are familiar with older Orban processors like the 8282, this is the
maximum amount of boost that would have occurred if you had set their
DJ BASS BOOST controls to ON.
The amount of bass boost will be highly dependent on the fundamental
frequency of a given voice. If the fundamental frequency is far above
100Hz, there will be little voice energy in the bottom band and little or
no audio bass boost can occur even if the gain of the bottom band is
higher than the gain of its neighbor. As the fundamental frequency
moves lower, more of this energy leaks into the bottom band, and you
hear more bass boost. If the fundamental frequency is very low (a rarity),
there will be enough energy in the bottom band to force significant gain
reduction, and you will hear less bass boost than if the fundamental frequency were a bit higher.
This control is only available in the Five-Band structure.
If the GATE THRESH (Gate Threshold) control is turned OFF, the DJ BASS
boost setting is disabled.
HF ENH (“High Frequency Enhancer”) is a program-adaptive 6 dB/octave shelving
equalizer with a 4 kHz turnover frequency. It constantly monitors the ratio between
high frequency and broadband energy and adjusts the amount of equalization in an
attempt to make this ratio constant as the program material changes. It can therefore create a bright, present sound without over-equalizing material that is already
bright.
30HZ HPF (“30 Hz High Pass Filter”) determines if a 30Hz 18 dB/octave highpass filter is placed in-circuit before other processing. Although not a stereo enhancer control, it is found on the stereo enhancer page (for convenience) because, like the stereo enhancer, it can be adjusted without eliminating LESS-MORE functionality.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
PH-ROTATE (“Phase Rotator”) is not a stereo enhancer control. It determines if the
phase rotator will be in-circuit. The purpose of the phase rotator is to make voice
waveforms more symmetrical. This can substantially reduce distortion when they are
peak limited by the 8382’s back end processing.
In most cases, we recommend that you leave the phase rotator active to minimize
speech distortion. However, because it can slightly reduce the clarity and definition
of program material, you can defeat it if you are operating the 8382 conservatively.
Stereo Enhancer Controls
The stereo enhancer emulates the Orban 222 analog stereo enhancer. The enhancer
has gating that operates under two conditions:
•
The two stereo channels are close to identical in magnitude and phase.
In this case, the enhancer assumes that the program material is actually
mono and suppresses enhancement to prevent the enhancement from
exaggerating the undesired channel imbalance.
•
The ratio of L–R / L+R of the enhanced signal tries to exceed the threshold set by
the L-R / L+R Ratio Limit control.
In this case, the enhancer prevents further enhancement in order to prevent excess L–R energy, which can increase multipath distortion.
The stereo enhancer has the following controls. Note that “advanced” controls are
accessible only from 8382 PC Remote software.
Stereo Enhancer Controls
Basic / Full Modify Name
ENH AMT
RATIO LMT
Advanced Name
Stereo Enhancer Amount
L–R / L+R Ratio Limit
Range
0.0 ... 10.0
70 … 100%
Table 3-3: Stereo Enhancer Controls
ENH AMT sets the maximum spatial enhancement. When set to OUT, it bypasses the
stereo enhancer.
RATIO LMT (“L–R / L+R Ratio Limit”) sets the maximum amount of enhancement to
prevent multipath distortion. However, if the original program material exceeds this
limit with no enhancement, the enhancer will not reduce it.
AGC Controls
The AGC is common to the Two-Band and Five-Band structures.
3-23
3-24
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Five of the AGC controls are common to the Full Modify and Advanced Modify
screens, with additional AGC controls available in the Advance Modify screen, as
noted in the following table. (Note that “advanced” controls are accessible only
from 8382 PC Remote software.)
These controls are explained in detail below.
Each Factory Preset has a LESS-MORE control that adjusts on-air loudness by altering
the amount of processing. LESS-MORE simultaneously adjusts all of the processing
controls to optimize the trade-offs between unwanted side effects.
If you wish, you may adjust the Advanced Modify parameters to your own taste. Always start with LESS-MORE to get as close to your desired sound as possible. Then
edit the Advanced Modify parameters using the Advanced Modify screen, and save
those edits to a User Preset.
AGC (“AGC Off / On”)control activates or defeats the AGC.
It is usually used to defeat the AGC when you want to create a preset with minimal
processing (such as a CLASSICAL preset). The AGC is also ordinarily defeated if you
are using a studio level controller (like Orban’s 8200ST). However, in this case it is
better to defeat the AGC globally in System Setup.
AGC DRIVE control adjusts signal level going into the slow dual-band AGC, therefore determining the amount of gain reduction in the AGC. This control also adjusts
the “idle gain”—the amount of gain reduction in the AGC section when the structure is gated. (It gates whenever the input level to the structure is below the threshold of gating.)
The total amount of gain reduction in the Five-Band structure is the sum of the gain
reduction in the AGC and the gain reduction in the multiband compressor. The total
AGC Controls
Full Modify Name
AGC
AGC DRIVE
AGC REL
AGC GATE
AGC B CPL
AGC METR
-------------------
Advanced Name
AGC Off / On
AGC Drive
AGC Master Release
AGC Gate Threshold
AGC Bass Coupling
AGC Meter Display
AGC Window Size
AGC Window Release
AGC Ratio
AGC Bass Threshold
AGC Idle Gain
AGC Bass Attack
AGC Master Attack
AGC Bass Release
AGC Crossover
Table 3-4: AGC Controls
Range
Off / On
–10 ... 25 dB
0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2 … 20 dB / S
Off, –44 ... –15 dB
0-100 %
Master, Delta
–25 … 0 dB
0.5 … 20 dB
∞1, 4:1, 3:1, 2:1
–12.0 … 2.5 dB
–10 … +10 dB
1 … 10
0.2 … 6
1 … 10 dB/sec
Allpass, LinearNoDelay,
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
system gain reduction determines how much the loudness of quiet passages will be
increased (and, therefore, how consistent overall loudness will be). It is determined
by the setting of the AGC DRIVE control, by the level at which the console VU meter
or PPM is peaked, and by the setting of the MULTIBAND DRIVE (compressor) control.
AGC REL (“AGC Master Release”) control provides an adjustable range from 0.5
dB/second (slow) to 20 dB/second (fast). The increase in density caused by setting the
AGC RELEASE control to fast settings sounds different from the increase in density
caused by setting the Multiband’s MULTIBAND RELEASE control to FAST, and you can
trade the two off to produce different effects.
Unless it is purposely speeded-up (with the AGC RELEASE control), the automatic
gain control (AGC) that occurs in the AGC prior to the multiband compressor makes
audio levels more consistent without significantly altering texture. Then the multiband compression and associated multiband clipper audibly change the density of
the sound and dynamically re-equalize it as necessary (booming bass is tightened;
weak, thin bass is brought up; highs are always present and consistent in level).
The various combinations of AGC and compression offer great flexibility:
•
Light AGC + light compression yields a wide sense of dynamics, with a small
amount of automatic re-equalization.
•
Moderate AGC + light compression produces an open, natural quality with
automatic re-equalization and increased consistency of frequency balance.
•
Moderate AGC + moderate compression gives a more dense sound, particularly
as the release time of the multiband compressor is sped up.
•
Moderate AGC + heavy compression (particularly with a FAST multiband release
time) results in a “wall of sound” effect, which may cause listener fatigue.
•
Adjust the AGC (with the AGC DRIVE control) to produce the desired amount of
AGC action, and then fine-tune the compression and clipping with the Five-Band
structure’s controls.
AGC GATE (“AGC Gate Threshold”) control determines the lowest input level that
will be recognized as program by OPTIMOD-TV; lower levels are considered to be
noise or background sounds and cause the AGC or multiband compressor to gate,
effectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing.
In television audio, the setting of the gate threshold controls are quite critical if you
want the processing to be undetectable to the audience. If this control is set too
low, then the 8382 will pump up quiet sounds such as ambience and underscoring to
unnaturally high levels.
There are two independent silence-gating circuits in the 8382. The first affects the
AGC and the second affects the multiband compressor. Each has its own threshold control.
3-25
3-26
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
The multiband silence gate causes the gain reduction in bands 2 and 3 of the multiband compressor to move quickly to the average gain reduction occurring in those
bands when the gate first turns on. This prevents obvious midrange coloration under gated conditions, because bands 2 and 3 have the same gain.
The multiband gate also independently freezes the gain of the two highest frequency bands (forcing the gain of the highest frequency band to be identical to its
lower neighbor), and independently sets the gain of the lowest frequency band according to the setting of the DJ BASS boost control (in the Equalization screen).
Thus, without introducing obvious coloration, the gating smoothly preserves the average overall frequency response “tilt” of the multiband compressor, broadly maintaining the “automatic equalization” curve it generates for a given piece of program material.
If the MB GATE THR (Gate Threshold) control is turned OFF, the DJ BASS
control is disabled.
AGC B CPL (“AGC Bass Coupling”) control sets the balance provided in the AGC between bass and the rest of the frequency spectrum.
The AGC processes audio in a master band for all audio above approximately 200Hz,
and a bass band for audio below approximately 200Hz. The AGC B CPL control determines how closely the on-air balance of material below 200Hz matches that of
the program material above 200Hz.
Settings toward 100% (wideband) make the output sound most like the input. Because setting the AGC B CPL control at 100% will sometimes cause bass loss, the
most accurate frequency balance will often be obtained with this control between
70% and 90%. The optimal setting depends on the amount of gain reduction applied and on the AGC release time. Usually, you will adjust the AGC B CPL control
until the Master AGC and Bass AGC Gain Reduction meters track as closely as possible unless you want the AGC to provide some gentle automatic re-equalization of
the input material.
With the AGC MASTER RELEASE control set to 2 dB/second, setting the AGC B CPL
control toward 0% (independent) will produce a sound that is very open, natural,
and non-fatiguing, even with large amounts of gain reduction. Such settings will
provide a bass boost on some program material that lacks bass, but may pump up
rumble and other noise.
AGC METR (“AGC Meter Display”) determines what the AGC meter shows the
gain reduction of the slow two-band AGC processing that precedes the multi-band
compressor. Full-scale is 25 dB gain reduction. MASTER displays the gain reduction of
the Master (above-200 Hz) band. BASS displays the gain reduction of the Bass (below-200 Hz) band. DELTA displays the difference between the gain reduction in the
Master and Bass bands.
Although it is located in the Full Modify screen (to make it easy for a preset developer to switch meter modes), this control is not part of the active preset and its setting is not saved in User Presets, unlike the other controls in the Full Modify screens.
The meter mode always reverts to MASTER when the user leaves Full Modify.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
Advanced AGC Controls
The following AGC controls are available only in the 8382 PC Remote software.
AGC Window Size determines the size of the “target zone” window in the AGC. If
the input level falls within this target zone, the AGC release time is set to the number specified by the AGC WINDOW RELEASE control. This is usually much slower than
the normal AGC release, and essentially freezes the AGC gain. This prevents the AGC
from building up density in material whose level is already well controlled. If the
level goes outside the window, then the AGC switches to the release rate specified
by AGC MASTER RELEASE, so the AGC can still correct large gain variations quickly.
The normal setting for the AGC WINDOW SIZE is 3dB.
AGC Window Release (see AGC WINDOW SIZE above.)
AGC Ratio determines the compression ratio of the AGC. The compression ratio is
the ratio between the change in input level and the resulting change in output
level, both measured in units of dB.
Previous Orban AGCs had compression ratios very close to ∞:1, which produces the
most consistent and uniform sound. However, the 8382 compressor can reduce this
ratio to as low as 2:1. This can add a sense of dynamic range and is mostly useful for
subtle fine arts formats like classical and jazz.
This control reduces the available range of AGC gain reduction because it acts by attenuating the gain control signal produced by the AGC sidechain. The range is 25 dB
at ∞:1 and 12 dB at 2:1. However, the range of input levels that the AGC can handle
is unaffected, remaining at 25dB.
AGC Bass Threshold determines the compression threshold of the bass band in the
AGC. It can be used to set the target spectral balance of the AGC.
As the AGC B CPL control is moved towards “100%,” the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control affects the sound less and less.
The interaction between the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control and the AGC B CPL control is a bit complex, so we recommend leaving the AGC BASS THRESHOLD control at
its factory setting unless you have a good reason for readjusting it.
AGC Idle Gain. The “idle gain” is the target gain of the AGC when the silence gate
is active. Whenever the silence gate turns on, the gain of the AGC slowly moves towards the idle gain.
The idle gain is primarily determined by the AGC DRIVE setting—a setting of 10 dB
will ordinarily produce an idle gain of –10 dB (i.e., 10 dB of gain reduction). However, sometimes you may not want the idle gain to be the same as the AGC DRIVE
setting. The AGC IDLE GAIN control allows you to add or subtract gain from the idle
gain setting determined by the AGC DRIVE setting.
3-27
3-28
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
You might want to do this if you make a custom preset that otherwise causes the
gain to increase or decrease unnaturally when the AGC is gated.
For example, to make the idle gain track the setting of the AGC DRIVE control, set
the AGC IDLE GAIN control to zero. To make the idle gain 2 dB lower than the setting
of the AGC DRIVE control, set the AGC IDLE GAIN control to –2.
AGC Bass Attack sets the attack time of the AGC bass compressor (below 200Hz).
AGC Master Attack sets the attack time of the AGC master compressor (above
200Hz).
AGC Bass Release sets the release time of the AGC bass compressor.
AGC Crossover allows you to choose ALLPASS or LINEARNODELAY modes.
ALLPASS is a phase-rotating crossover like the one used in the 8200’s two-band AGC.
It introduces one pole of phase rotation at 200 Hz. The overall frequency response
remains smooth as the two bands take different degrees of gain reduction—the response is a smooth shelf without extra peaks or dips around the crossover frequency.
The two bands are down 3 dB at the crossover frequency.
All Five-Band factory presets automatically use ALLPASS because of its smooth, shelving behavior and low delay. Its allpass characteristic complements the existing phase
rotator that reduces voice distortion. Because the Five-Band structure uses phaserotating crossovers in the five-band compressor / limiter, there is little or nothing to
be gained by using a phase-linear crossover in the Five-Band structure’s AGC.
LINEARNODELAY (Linear-Phase; no delay) is a phase-linear crossover whose upper
band is derived by subtracting its lower band from the crossover’s input. When the
upper and lower bands have the same gain, their sum is perfectly flat with no phase
rotation. However, when the upper and lower bands have different gains, peaks and
dips appear in the frequency response close to the crossover frequency. It is useful if
you need a crossover with low delay and no phase distortion when flat. Its downside
is the possibility of coloration when the gains of the two bands are widely disparate.
Clipper Controls
The clipper controls are common to the Two-Band and Five-Band structures, except
as noted in the control descriptions on the following pages.
Bass Clip (“Bass Clip Threshold”) sets the threshold of Orban’s patented embedded
bass clipper with reference to the final clipper. In the realization found in the 8382,
this clipper uses special techniques to reduce distortion. The bass clipper is embedded in the multiband crossover so that any remaining distortion created by clipping
is rolled off by part of the crossover filters.
The threshold of this clipper is usually set between 2 dB and 5 dB below the threshold of the final limiter in the processing chain, depending on the setting of the
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
LESS-MORE control in the parent preset on which you are basing your Modify adjustments. This provides headroom for contributions from the other three bands so
that bass transients don’t smash against the back-end clipping system, causing overt
intermodulation distortion between the bass and higher frequency program material.
Some 8382 users feel that the bass clipper unnecessarily reduces bass punch at its
factory settings. Therefore, we made the threshold of the bass clipper useradjustable. The range (with reference to the final clipper threshold) is 0 to –6dB. As
you raise the threshold of the clipper, you will get more bass but also more distortion and pumping. Be careful when setting this control; do not adjust it casually. Listen to program material with heavy bass combined with spectrally sparse midrange
material (like a singer accompanied by a bass guitar) and listen for IM distortion induced by the bass’ pushing the midrange into the clipping system. In general, unless
you have a very good reason to set the control elsewhere, we recommend leaving it
at the factory settings, which were determined following extensive listening tests
with many types of critical program material.
In the Five-Band structure, the clipper is located after bands 1 and 2 are summed. In
the Two-Band structure, the clipper is located after the Bass band.
FINAL CLIP (“Final Clip Drive”) adjusts the level of the audio driving the back end
clipping system that OPTIMOD-TV uses to control fast peaks. This control primarily
determines the loudness / distortion trade-off.
Turning up the FINAL CLIP control drives the final clipper and overshoot compensator
harder, reducing the peak-to-average ratio, and increasing the loudness on the air.
When the amount of clipping is increased, the audible distortion caused by clipping
also increases. Although lower settings of the FINAL CLIP control reduce loudness,
they make the sound cleaner.
If the RELEASE control is set to its faster settings, the distortion produced by the
back-end clipping system will increase as the MULTIBAND DRIVE control is advanced.
The FINAL CLIP DRIVE and/or the MULTIBAND LIMIT THRESHOLD controls may have to be
turned down to compensate. To best understand how to make loudness / distortion
trade-offs, perhaps the wisest thing to do is to recall a factory multiband preset, and
then to adjust the LESS-MORE control to several settings throughout its range. At
each setting of the LESS-MORE control, examine the settings of the MULTIBAND DRIVE
and MULTIBAND LIMIT THRESHOLD controls. This way, you can see how the factory programmers made the trade-offs between the settings of the various distortiondetermining controls at various levels of processing.
Clipper Controls
Full Modify Name
BASS CLIP
FINAL CLIP
---
Advanced Name
Bass Clip Threshold
Final Clip Drive
Overshoot Compensator
Drive
Table 3-5: Clipper Controls
Range
–6.0 … 0.00
–3.0 … +5.0
–2.0 … +2.0
3-29
3-30
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
The 8382’s multiband clipping and distortion control system works to
help prevent audible distortion in the final clipper. As factory programmers, we prefer to adjust the FINAL CLIP control through a very narrow
range (typically –0.5 dB to –1.0dB) and to determine almost all of the
loudness / distortion trade-off by the setting of the Multiband Clipping
control.
The final clipper operates at 256 kHz sample rate and is fully anti-aliased.
Overshoot Compensator Drive sets the drive level into the overshoot compensator with reference to the final clip threshold, in units of dB. The normal setting is
“0dB.”
The overshoot compensator can produce audible distortion on material with strong
high frequency content (like bell trees), and this control lets you trade off this distortion against loudness. (Such material can cause strong overshoots, forcing the
overshoot compensator to work hard to eliminate them.) We do not recommend
operating this control above “0” because this would reduce the effectiveness of the
distortion cancellation used in earlier processing. However, you can reduce it below
“0” if you value the last bit of high frequency cleanliness over loudness.
The overshoot compensator works at 256 kHz sample rate and is fully anti-aliased.
The Two-Band Structure
The Two-Band structure is an improved version of Orban's classic 8182A OPTIMODTV, but with increased high frequency clarity, substantially lower speech distortion,
and an added AGC (Automatic Gain Control). It consists of a slow two-band gated
AGC for gain riding, followed by an equalization section, a gated two-band compressor, a high-frequency limiter, and a complex distortion-controlled peak limiting
system similar to the one used in the Five-Band structure. A CBS Loudness Controller
can be activated to control subjectively perceived loudness.
Like the “Two-Band Purist” structure in Orban’s OPTIMOD-TV 8282, the 8382’s TwoBand Structure can be made phase-linear throughout to maximize sonic transparency. However, you can also choose an allpass crossover structure (see AGC
CROSSOVER on page 3-28).
The Two-Band structure has an open, easy-to-listen-to sound that is similar to the
source material if the source material is of good quality. However, if the spectral
balance between the bass and high frequency energy of the program material is incorrect, the Two-Band structure (when its BASS COUPLING control is operated toward
0%) can gently correct it without introducing obvious coloration.
If you need these automatic re-equalization capabilities of the Two-Band
structure, you may find one of the Five-Band presets to be even more effective.
There are seven Two-Band presets. These are described following Table 3-1: Factory
Programming Presets on page 3-15.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
The Protection presets have the same Intermediate and Advanced Modify controls
available as the Two-Band structure.
Customizing the Settings
Each Two-Band Factory Preset has a LESS-MORE control (located in the Basic Modify
screen) that adjusts on-air loudness. LESS-MORE simultaneously adjusts all of the
processing controls to optimize the trade-offs between unwanted side effects as
processing levels are decreased or increased.
If you wish, you may adjust the Modify parameters to your own taste. Always start
with LESS-MORE to get as close to your desired sound as possible. Then edit the Modify parameters using the Basic, Intermediate or Advanced Modify screen, and save
those edits to a User Preset.
The Two-Band Structure’s Full and Advanced Setup Controls
The tables below show a summary of the Two-Band controls in the dynamics section.
AGC, Equalizer, Stereo Enhancer, and Clipper controls are common to both TwoBand and Five-Band structures and are described in their own sections earlier in Section 3.
Two-Band Controls
Full Modify Name
2B DRIVE
2B REL
2B REL SHAPE
2B GATE
2B BASS CPL
2B BASS CLIP
2B CLIP
------LOUD THR
PARENT PRESET
Less-More
-------------
Advanced Name
2B Drive
2B Release
2B Release Shape
2B Gate Threshold
2B Bass Coupling
Bass Clip Threshold
2B Clipping
Multiband Limit Threshold
MB Limit Speech Threshold
Maximum Distortion Control
Loudness Control Threshold
Less-More Index
2B Master Compression
Threshold
2B Bass Compression Threshold
2B Master Attack
2B Bass Attack
2B HF Clip Threshold
2B Crossover
Table 3-6: Two-Band Controls
Range
–10 … 25 dB
0.5 … 20 dB / S
Linear, Exponential
Off, –44 … –15 dB
0 … 100 %
-6.0 … 0.0 dB
–4 … +5
–3.0 … +6.0 dB, Off
–6.0 … 0 dB
0.0 … +18.0 dB
Off, 0.0 … -6.0 dB
[read-only]
[read-only]; 1.0 … 10.0
–15 … 0, Off
-10.0 … 5.0 dB, Off
4 … 50, Off
4 … 50, Off
–16.00 … 0.00, Off
Allpass, Linear
3-31
3-32
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Some of the Two-Band controls are common to the Full Modify and Advanced Modify screens, with additional Two-Band controls available in the Advanced Modify
screen. (Note that “advanced” controls are accessible only from 8382 PC Remote
software.)
2B DRIVE control adjusts signal level going into the two-band compressor, and
therefore controls the density of output audio by determining the amount of gain
reduction in the two-band compressor. The resulting sound texture can be open and
transparent, solid and dense, or somewhere in between. The range is 0-25dB.
Regardless of the release time setting, we feel that the optimal amount of gain reduction in the two-band compressor for popular music and talk formats is 10-15dB.
If less gain reduction is used, loudness can be lost. For classical formats, operating
with 0-10 dB of gain reduction (with the gain riding AGC set to OFF) maintains a
sense of dynamic range while still controlling levels effectively. Because OPTIMODTV’s density gently increases between 0 and 10 dB of compression, 10 dB of compression sounds very natural, even on classical music.
2B REL (“2B Release”) control determines how fast the two-band compressor releases (and therefore how quickly loudness increases) when the level of the program
material decreases. This release time only applies when the silence gate does not
gate the Two-Band Compressor.
The control can be adjusted from 0.5 dB/second (slow) to 20 dB/second (fast). Settings toward 20 dB/second result in a more consistently loud output, while settings
toward 0.5 dB/second allow a wider variation of dynamic range. Both the setting of
the 2B REL control and the dynamics and level of the program material determine
the actual release time of the compressor. In general, you should use faster release
times for mass-appeal pop or rock formats oriented toward younger audiences, and
slower release times for more conservative, adult-oriented formats (particularly if
women are an important part of your target audience).
We expect that the Two-Band structure will be rarely used for pop music
formats because the Five-Band structure gives better results in almost all
cases.
The action of the 2B REL control has been optimized for resolution and adjustability.
But its setting is critical to sound quality—listen carefully as you adjust it. There is a
point beyond which increasing density (with faster settings of the 2B REL control)
will no longer yield more loudness, and will simply degrade the punch and definition of the sound.
When the 2B REL control is set between 8 and 1 dB/second (the slowest settings), the
amount of gain reduction is surprisingly non-critical. Gating prevents noise from being brought up during short pauses and pumping does not occur at high levels of
gain reduction. Therefore, the primary danger of using large amounts of gain reduction is that the level of quiet passages in input material with wide dynamic range
may eventually be increased unnaturally. Accordingly, when you operate the 2B REL
control between 8 and 2 dB/second, it may be wise to defeat the gain-riding AGC
and to permit the two-band compressor to perform all of the gain riding. This will
prevent excessive reduction of dynamic range, and will produce the most natural
sound achievable from the Two-Band structures.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
With faster 2B REL control settings (above 8 dB/second), the sound will change substantially with the amount of gain reduction in the two-band compressor. This
means that you should activate the gain-riding AGC to ensure that the two-band
compressor is always being driven at the level that produces the amount of gain reduction desired. Decide based on listening tests how much gain reduction gives you
the density that you want without creating a feeling of over-compression and fatigue.
Release in the two-band compressor automatically becomes faster as more gain reduction is applied (up to about 10dB). This makes the program progressively denser,
creating a sense of increasing loudness although peaks are not actually increasing. If
the gain-riding AGC is defeated (with the AGC ON/OFF control), you can use this
characteristic to preserve some feeling of dynamic range. Once 10 dB of gain reduction is exceeded, full loudness is achieved—no further increase in short-term density
occurs as more gain reduction is applied. This avoids the unnatural, fatiguing sound
often produced by processors at high gain reduction levels, and makes OPTIMOD-TV
remarkably resistant to operator gain-riding errors.
2B REL SHAPE (“2B Release Shape”) selects a LINear or EXPonential release shape.
LINEAR causes the Two-Band compressor to release at a constant number of dB per
second, while EXPONENTIAL causes the release to commence slowly and then speed
up as it progresses. The Exponential shape allows you to create the open sound of a
slow release time with program material that is well controlled in level, while permitting the processing to quickly correct excessively low input levels. We recommend
using EXPONENTIAL for general-purpose programming. We only recommend LINEAR
for musical programming, where EXPONENTIAL may create unnatural side effects. (If
the 2B RELEASE control is set between about 0.5 and 2 dB/second, an EXPONENTIAL
release shape should cause no problems even with music.)
2B GATE (“2B Gate Threshold”) threshold control determines the lowest input level
that will be recognized as program material by OPTIMOD-TV; lower levels are considered to be noise or background sounds and will cause the AGC or two-band compressor to gate, effectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing.
There are two independent gating circuits in the 8382 Two-Band structure. The first
affects the AGC and the second affects the two-band compressor. Each has its own
threshold control.
The two-band gain reduction will eventually recover to 0 dB and the AGC gain reduction will eventually recover to –10 dB even when the silence gate is gated. However, recovery is slow enough to be imperceptible. This avoids OPTIMOD-TV’s getting
stuck with a large amount of gain reduction on a long, low-level musical passage
immediately following a loud passage.
It is common to set the 2B GATE control to approximately –35 dB. Lower settings are
sometimes useful for musical programming.
BASS CPL (“2B Bass Coupling”) is used to set the balance between bass and the rest
of the frequency spectrum.
3-33
3-34
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
The two-band compressor processes audio in a master band for all audio above approximately 200Hz, and a bass band for audio below approximately 200Hz. The
BASS CPL control determines how closely the on-air balance of material below 200Hz
matches that of the program material above 200Hz.
Settings toward 100% (wideband) make the output sound most like the input. Because setting the BASS CPL control at 100% will sometimes cause bass loss, the most
accurate frequency balance will often occur with this control set between 70% and
90%. The optimal setting depends on the amount of gain reduction applied. Adjust
the BASS CPL control until the band 1 and band 2 Gain Reduction meters track as
closely as possible.
With the 2B REL (2B Release) control set to 2 dB/second, setting the BASS CPL control
toward 0% (independent) produces a sound that is very open, natural, and nonfatiguing, even with large amounts of gain reduction. Such settings provide a bass
boost on some program material that lacks bass.
With fast release times, settings of the BASS CPL toward 100% (wideband) do not
sound good. Instead, set the BASS CPL control toward 0% (independent). This combination of fast release and independent operation of the bands provides the
maximum loudness and density on small radios achievable by the Two-Band structure. However, such processing may fatigue listeners with high-quality receivers, and
requires you to activate the AGC to control the average drive level into the twoband compressor, preventing uncontrolled build-up of program density. Instead of
operating the Two-Band structure like this, you should choose a Five-Band preset instead.
Bass Clip (“Bass Clip Threshold”): See page 3-28.
2B Clip is a compression threshold control that equally affects the bass and master
bands. It sets the drive level to the high frequency limiting and multiband distortioncontrolling processing that precedes the final clipping section. The distortioncontrolling section uses a combination of distortion-cancelled clipping and lookahead processing to anticipate and prevent excessive clipping distortion in the final
clipper.
2B High Frequency Limiting sets the threshold of the high frequency limiter in
the Two-Band structure. When this control is set lower, gain reduction does more
high frequency limiting. When this control is set higher, distortion-cancelled clipping
does more high frequency limiting. This control controls the tradeoff between loss
of high frequencies (due to high frequency limiting) and excessive distortion (due to
clipping).
Loudness Control Threshold determines the maximum subjective loudness produced by the processing. This control determines the subjective loudness level at
which the Loudness Controller will take control of the Two-Band compressor and
produce more gain reduction than the compressor would have otherwise produced
without loudness control. We believe that few users will have any reason to change
this adjustment (it was not available to the users of our analog 8182A processor).
However, if you feel that the Loudness Controller is not controlling the loudness of
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
commercials or other subjectively loud program material sufficiently well, you may
wish to set the threshold lower, forcing the Loudness Controller to do more work.
Note that the Loudness Controller operates with reference to an absolute subjective
loudness threshold that does not adapt to context. This means that if there is a transition between very quiet program material (like footfalls through rustling leaves)
and a commercial, the commercial may still seem offensively loud even though the
Loudness Controller is controlling its loudness correctly with reference to other
sound that reach full-scale loudness. Philosophically, this is inevitable; the Loudness
Controller cannot reduce the level of the commercial to the level of rustling leaves
without destroying the effectiveness of the commercial and angering the sponsor!
FINAL CLIP (“Final Clip Drive”): See page 3-29.
PARENT PRESET and Less-More INDEX are read-only fields.
The 8382’s front-panel LCD display does not show all of the parameters in a given
User Preset; only the PC Remote software can display the Advanced Controls that set
all the parameters. PARENT PRESET shows the preset that was edited to produce the
current User Preset. The LESS-MORE INDEX shows the Parent Preset’s Less-More setting when it was edited. This information is needed because two different User Presets can appear to be the same when you view only the parameters that the 8382’s
front panel exposes.
Please note that if a User Preset was created by in the PC Remote software by editing Advanced controls, an asterisk will appear in front of the displayed parent preset. This asterisk means that you cannot duplicate a given user preset by starting
with its parent preset and then setting a target 8382’s front panel controls to correspond to the user preset you want to duplicate. The only way to duplicate such a
user preset accurately is via the PC Remote software’s backup and restore features,
or by opening the preset in the PC Remote software and manually duplicating each
control setting you see.
The asterisk feature is not included in version 1.0 software.
Advanced Two-Band Controls
The following Two-Band controls are only accessible from the 8382 PC Remote software.
2B Master Compression Threshold sets the level where gain reduction starts to
occur in the Master (above 200Hz) band of the Two-Band Compressor.
2B Bass Threshold determines the compression threshold of the bass band (below
200 Hz) in the Two-Band Compressor. It can be used to set the target spectral balance of the Two-Band Compressor.
As the Two-Band Compressor BASS CPL control is moved towards “100%,” the 2B
BASS THRESHOLD control affects the sound less and less.
3-35
3-36
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
2B Master Attack sets the attack time of the Two-Band Compressor master compressor (above 200Hz).
2B Bass Attack sets the attack time of the Two-Band Compressor bass compressor
(below 200Hz).
2B Crossover sets the structure of the two-band crossover to Allpass or Linear. See
AGC CROSSOVER on page 3-28 for more detail about these modes.
2B High Frequency Clip Threshold sets the threshold of the multiband, distortioncancelled clipper in the Two-Band structure’s high frequency limiter. Higher numbers
yield more brightness, but also cause more high frequency distortion.
The relationship and interaction between 2B CLIP, 2B HIGH FREQUENCY
LIMITING, and this control is complicated and is best appreciated by listening and experimenting:
2B 6-15 kHz HF Limiter sets the amount of additional gain reduction occurring in
6-15 kHz band of the 2-band high frequency limiter. This extra gain reduction is
triggered whenever high frequency energy would otherwise cause excessive distortion in the final clipper. The algorithm uses an analysis of the activity in the final
clipper to make this determination.
Functionally, this control is a mix control that adds a HF limiter gain reduction signal
to higher of the two bands of the 2-band high frequency limiter. Higher settings
produce more extra HF limiting in this band. The control therefore allows you to
trade off reduced high frequency distortion against HF loss.
MB LIM DR (“Multiband Limiter Drive”). See page 3-40.
Maximum Distortion Control. See page 3-43.
MB Limit Speech Threshold lets you set the increment (in dB) by which the setting
of the MB LIMIT THR control is reduced when speech is detected. This control allows
the main clipping distortion controller to work harder on speech while preserving
punch in music.
Speech is detected if (1) the input is mono, and (2) there are syllabic
pauses at least once every 1.5 seconds. Speech with a stereo music background will usually be detected as “music,” or the detector may switch
back and forth randomly if the stereo content is right at the stereo /
mono detector’s threshold. Mono music with a “speech-like” envelope
may be incorrectly detected as “speech.” Music incorrectly detected as
“speech” will exhibit a slight loss of loudness and punch, but misdetection will never cause objectionable distortion on music.
Speech that is not located in the center of the stereo sound field will always be detected as “music” because the detector always identifies stereo material as “music.” This can increase clipping distortion on such
speech.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
The Five-Band Structure
The Five-Band structure consists of a stereo enhancer, a slow gain-riding two-band
AGC, an equalization section, a five-band compressor, a dynamic single-ended noise
reduction system, an output mixer (for the five bands), and a complex peak limiting
system.
Unlike the Two-Band structure, whose two-band compressor has a continuously
variable release time, the release time of the Five-Band compressor is switchable to
seven increments between slow and fast. Each setting makes a significant difference
in the overall flavor and quality of the sound.
When the input is noisy, you can sometimes reduce the noise by activating the single-ended noise reduction system. Functionally, the single-ended noise reduction
system combines a broadband downward expander with a program-dependent lowpass filter. This noise reduction can be valuable in reducing audible hiss, rumble, or
ambient studio noise on-air. We use it for the news and sports factory presets.
The Five-Band structure does not have a separate Loudness Controller because its
Five-Band compressor automatically re-equalizes the spectral balance of various
pieces of program material in a way that tends to make their loudness more uniform.
Putting the Five-Band Structure on the Air
The Five-Band structure is very flexible, enabling you to fine-tune your on-air sound
for your target audience and desired market position. There are several basic Factory Presets for the Five-Band structure. Each of these presets can be edited with the
LESS-MORE control. This control affects the television audio presets differently than
it does the music presets (presets with “music” in their names). When a television
audio preset is on the air, the LESS-MORE control adjusts the average amount of gain
reduction by adjusting the drive level to the Five-Band structure's input. This also adjusts the idle gain—the amount of gain reduction in the AGC section when the
structure is gated. (It gates whenever the input level to the structure is below the
threshold of gating.)
When a music preset is on the air, the LESS-MORE control sets the amount of overall
processing, making optimum tradeoffs between loudness, brightness, and distortion. In television audio, there are no loudness wars; for music presets, there is no
need to advance the LESS-MORE control beyond its setting in the Factory Presets.
Customizing the Settings
The controls in the Five-Band structure give you the flexibility to customize your station sound. However, as with any audio processing system, proper adjustment of
these controls requires proper balancing of the trade-offs explained above. The following provides the information you need to adjust the Five-Band structure controls
to suit your programming and taste.
3-37
3-38
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
The Five-Band Structure’s Full and Advanced Setup Controls
The tables below summarize the Multiband and Band Mix controls in the dynamics
section. The AGC, Equalizer, Stereo Enhancer, and Clipper controls are common to
both the Two-Band and Five-Band structures and are discussed in their own sections
in Section 3. (Note that “advanced” controls are accessible only from 8382 PC Remote software.)
MB DRIVE (“Multiband Drive”) control adjusts the signal level going into the multiband compressor, and therefore determines the average amount of gain reduction
in the multiband compressor. Range is 25dB.
Adjust the MULTIBAND DRIVE control to your taste and programming requirements.
Used lightly with a slow or medium release time, the Five-Band compressor produces
an open, re-equalized sound that is appropriate for most television programming.
The Five-Band compressor can increase audio density when operated at a fast or
medium-fast release because it acts more and more like a fast limiter (not a compressor) as the release time is shortened. With fast and medium-fast release times,
density also increases when you increase the drive level into the Five-Band compressor because these faster release times produce more limiting action. Increasing density can make loud sounds seem louder, but can also result in an unattractive busier,
flatter, or denser sound. It is very important to be aware of the many negative subjective side effects of excessive density when setting controls that affect the density
of the processed sound.
Because the 8382’s AGC algorithm uses sophisticated window gating, it is preferable
to make the AGC do most of the gain riding (instead of the multiband compressor),
because the AGC can ride gain quickly without adding excessive density to program
material that is already well controlled. Use the multiband compressor lightly, so it
can achieve automatic re-equalization of material that the AGC has already controlled without adding excessive density to the audio or re-equalizing to an unnatural extent.
Multiband Controls
Full Name
MB DRIVE
MB GATE
MB LIM DR
DWNEXP THR
MB LIM THR
HF CLIP
LESS-MORE
PARENT PRESET
-----------
Advanced Name
Multiband Drive
Multiband Gate Threshold
Multiband Limiter Drive
Downward Expander
Multiband Limit Threshold
High Frequency Clip Threshold
Less-More Index
Parent Preset
Lookahead
MB Limit Speech Thresh
Maximum Distortion Control
High Frequency Limiter
B1/B2 XOVER
Table 3-7: Multiband Controls
Range
0 ... 25
Off, –44 ... –15 dB
–4.0 ... +5.0 dB
Off, –6.0 … 12.0 dB
–3.0 … +6.0, Off
–16.00 … 0.0, Off
[read-only]; 1.0 … 10.0
[read-only]
In, Out, Auto
–3.0 +6.0 dB
0 … 18 dB
Off, –23.8 ... 0.0 dB
100 Hz, 200 Hz
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
The MULTIBAND DRIVE interacts with the MULTIBAND RELEASE. With slower release time
settings, increasing the MULTIBAND DRIVE control scarcely affects density. Instead, the
primary danger is that the excessive drive will cause noise to be increased excessively
when the program material becomes quiet. You can minimize this effect by activating the single-ended noise reduction and/or by carefully setting the MULTIBAND GATE
THRESHOLD control to freeze the gain when the input gets quiet.
When the release time of the Five-Band compressor is set towards fast, the setting
of the MULTIBAND DRIVE control becomes much more critical to sound quality because
density increases as the control is turned up. Listen carefully as you adjust it. With
these fast release times, there is a point beyond which increasing the Five-Band
compressor drive will no longer yield more loudness, and will simply degrade the
punch and definition of the sound. Instead, let the AGC do most of the work.
Because excessive loudness is an irritant in television audio, there is almost never any
reason to push processing to the point where it degrades the audio. We recommend
no more than 10dB gain reduction as shown on the meters for Band 3. More than
10dB, particularly with the fast release time, will often create a wall of sound effect
that many find fatiguing.
To avoid excessive density with fast Five-Band release time, we recommend using no
more than 5dB gain reduction in band 3, compensating for any lost loudness by
speeding up the AGC RELEASE instead.
MB REL (“Multiband Release”) control can be switched to any of seven settings. To
understand how to adjust this control for television programming, please see the
discussion above under MB DRIVE.
MB Attack / Release / Threshold
Full Name
Advanced Name
MB REL
Multiband Release
B1 THR
B2 THR
B3 THR
B4 THR
-------------------------
B1 Compression Threshold
B2 Compression Threshold
B3 Compression Threshold
B4 Compression Threshold
B1 Attack
B2 Attack
B3 Attack
B4 / 5 Attack
B1 Limiter Attack
B2 Limiter Attack
B3 Limiter Attack
B4 / 5 Limiter Attack
B1 Delta Release
B2 Delta Release
B3 Delta Release
B4 / 5 Delta Release
Range
Slow, Slow2, Med, Med2, MFast,
MFast2, Fast
–16.00 … 0.0, Off
–16.00 … 0.0, Off
–16.00 … 0.0, Off
–16.00 … 0.0, Off
4.0 … 50.0 ms, Off
4.0 … 50.0 ms, Off
4.0 … 50.0 ms, Off
4.0 … 50.0 ms, Off
0 … 100%
0 … 100%
0 … 100%
0 … 100%
–6 … 6
–6 … 6
–6 … 6
–6 … 6
Table 3-8: MB Attack / Release Controls
3-39
3-40
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Bx THR (“Band x Compression Threshold”) controls set the compression threshold in
each band, in units of dB below the final clipper threshold. We recommend making
small changes around the factory settings to avoid changing the range over which
the MB CLIPPING control operates. These controls will affect the spectral balance of
the processing above threshold, but are also risky because they can strongly affect
the amount of distortion produced by the back-end clipping system.
MB GATE (“Multiband Gate Threshold”) control determines the lowest input level
that will be recognized as program by OPTIMOD-TV; lower levels are considered to
be noise or background sounds and cause the AGC or multiband compressor to gate,
effectively freezing gain to prevent noise breathing.
There are two independent gating circuits in the 8382. The first affects the AGC and
the second affects the multiband compressor. Each has its own threshold control.
The multiband silence gate causes the gain reduction in bands 2 and 3 of the multiband compressor to move quickly to the average gain reduction occurring in those
bands when the gate first turns on. This prevents obvious midrange coloration under gated conditions, because bands 2 and 3 have the same gain.
The gate also independently freezes the gain of the two highest frequency bands
(forcing the gain of the highest frequency band to be identical to its lower
neighbor), and independently sets the gain of the lowest frequency band according
to the setting of the DJ BASS boost control (in the Equalization screen). Thus, without introducing obvious coloration, the gating smoothly preserves the average
overall frequency response “tilt” of the multiband compressor, broadly maintaining
the “automatic equalization” curve it generates for a given piece of program material.
If the MB GATE control is turned OFF, the DJ BASS control (in the Equalization screen) is disabled.
MB LIM DR (“Multiband Limiter Drive”) sets the drive level to the multiband distortion controlling processing that precedes the final clipping section. The distortioncontrolling section uses a combination of distortion-cancelled clipping and lookahead processing to anticipate and prevent excessive clipping distortion in the final
Band Mix
Full Name
B2>B1 CPL
B2>B3 CPL
B3>B2 CPL
B3>B4 CPL
B4>B5 CPL
B1 OUT
B2 OUT
B3 OUT
B4 OUT
B5 OUT
Advanced Name
B2>B1 Coupling
B2>B3 Coupling
B3>B2 Coupling
B3>B4 Coupling
B4>B5 Coupling
B1 Output Mix
B2 Output Mix
B3 Output Mix
B4 Output Mix
B5 Output Mix
Range
0 ... 100 %
0 ... 100 %
0 … 100 %
0 ... 100 %
0 ... 100 %
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
–3.0 … +3.0
Table 3-9: MB Band Mix Controls
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
clipper.
Like any other dynamics processing, the distortion-controlling section can produce
artifacts of its own when overdriven. These artifacts can include loss of definition,
smeared high frequencies, a sound similar to excessive compression, and, when operated at extreme settings, audible intermodulation distortion. In television processing, it is wise to back off the MB LIM DR control to prevent such artifacts.
MB LIM THR (“Multiband Limit Threshold”) sets the threshold of the clipping distortion controller with reference to the threshold of the final clipper, in dB.
The most effective setting for this control is “0dB” for almost all program material.
For the NEWS-TALK and SPORTS presets, we set the MB LIM THR control slightly below “0.” This ensures the cleanest possible speech quality at the cost of highest
loudness. If you want higher loudness in these presets, you can edit them to increase
the setting of the MB LIM THR control.
DWNEXP THR (“Downward Expander Threshold”) determines the level below which
the single-ended noise reduction system’s downward expander begins to decrease
system gain, and below which the high frequencies begin to become low-pass filtered to reduce perceived noise. Activate the single-ended dynamic noise reduction
by setting the DWNEXP THR control to a setting other than OFF.
The single-ended noise reduction system combines a broadband downward expander with a program-dependent low-pass filter. These functions are achieved by
introducing extra gain reduction in the multiband compressor. You can see the effect of this extra gain reduction on the gain reduction meters.
Ordinarily, the gating on the AGC and multiband limiter will prevent objectionable
build-up of noise, and you will want to use the single-ended noise reduction only on
unusually noisy program material. In television audio, it is particularly useful in live
news and sports.
Please note that it is impossible to design such a system to handle all program material without audible side effects. You will get best results if you set the DWNEXP THR
control of the noise reduction system to complement the program material you are
processing. The DWNEXP THR should be set higher when the input is noisy and lower
when the input is relatively quiet. The best way to adjust the DWNEXP THR control is
to start with the control set very high. Reduce the control setting while watching
the gain reduction meters. Eventually, you will see the gain increase in sync with the
program. Go further until you begin to hear noise modulation—a puffing or breathing sound (the input noise) in sync with the input program material. Set the DWNEXP
THR control higher until you can no longer hear the noise modulation. This is the
best setting.
Obviously, the correct setting will be different for a sporting event than for classical
music. It may be wise to define several presets with different settings of the DWNEXP
THR control, and to recall the preset that complements the program material of the
moment.
3-41
3-42
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Note also that it is virtually impossible to achieve undetectable dynamic noise reduction of program material that is extremely noisy to begin with, because the program
never masks the noise. It is probably wiser to defeat the dynamic noise reduction
with this sort of material (traffic reports from helicopters and the like) to avoid objectionable side effects. You must let your ears guide you.
B3>B4 CPL (“Band 3>4 Coupling”) control determines the extent to which the gains
of bands 4 (centered at 3.7 kHz) and 5 (above 6.2 kHz) are determined by and follows the gain of band 3 (centered at 1 kHz). Set towards 100% (fully coupled) this
control reduces the amount of dynamic upper midrange boost, preventing unnatural upper midrange boost. The gain of band 5 is further affected by the B4>B5 CPL
control.
B4>B5 CPL (“Band 4>5 Coupling”) controls the extent to which the gain of band 5
(6.2 kHz and above) is determined by and follows the gain of band 4.
The sum of the high frequency limiter control signal and the output of the B4>B5
CPL CONTROL determines the gain reduction in band 5. The B4>B5 CPL control receives the independent left and right band 4 gain control signal. Range is 0 to 100%
coupling.
B3>B2 CPL and B2>B3 CPL controls determine the extent to which the gains of
bands 2 and 3 track each other.
When combined with the other coupling controls, these controls can adjust the multiband processing to be anything from fully independent operation to quasiwideband processing.
B2>B1 CPL control determines the extent to which the gain of band 1 (below 100Hz
or 200Hz, depending on crossover setting) is determined by and follows the gain of
band 2 (centered at 400Hz). Set towards 100% (fully coupled), it reduces the amount
of dynamic bass boost, preventing unnatural bass boost. Set towards 0% (independent), it permits frequencies below 100Hz (the “slam” region) to have maximum impact in modern rock, urban, dance, rap, and other music where bass punch is crucial.
Accordingly, it can be useful in music video oriented formats.
Bx Out (“Band x Output Mix”) controls determine the relative balance of the bands
in the multiband compressor. Because these controls mix after the band compressors, they do not affect the compressors’ gain reductions and can be used as a
graphic equalizer to fine-tune the spectral balance of the program material over a
±3 dB range.
Their range has been purposely limited because the only gain control element after
these controls is the back-end clipping system (including the multiband clipper / distortion controller), which can produce considerable audible distortion if overdriven.
The thresholds of the individual compressors have been tuned to prevent audible
distortion with almost any program material. Large changes in the frequency balance of the compressor outputs will change this tuning, leaving the 8382 more vulnerable to unexpected audible distortion with certain program material. Therefore,
you should make large changes in EQ with the bass and parametric equalizers and
the HF enhancer, because these are located before the compressors. The compressors
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
will thus protect the system from unusual overloads caused the chosen equalization.
Use the multiband mix controls only for fine-tuning.
You can also get a similar effect by adjusting the compression threshold of the individual bands. This is comparably risky with reference to clipper overload, but unlike
the MB BAND MIX controls, the threshold adjustments do not affect the frequency response when a given band is below threshold and is thus producing no gain reduction.
HF CLIP (“High Frequency Clipper Threshold”) sets the threshold of the multiband
clipper in band 5 with reference to the final clipper threshold, in dB. This clipper
helps prevent distortion in the final clipper when the input program material contains excessive energy above 6 kHz.
The Band 5 multiband clipper operates at 256 kHz and is fully anti-aliased.
Advanced Multiband Controls
The following Advanced Multiband controls are available only from 8382 PC Remote
software.
B1-B4 Attack (Time) controls set the speed with which the gain reduction in each
band responds to level changes at the input to a given band’s compressor. These
controls, which have never previously been available in an Orban processor, are risky
and difficult to adjust appropriately. They affect the sound of the processor in many
subtle ways. The main trade-off is “punch” (achieved with slower attack times) versus distortion and/or pumping produced in the clipping system (because slower attack times increase overshoots that the clipping system must then eliminate). The results are strongly program-dependent and must be verified with listening tests to a
wide variety of program material.
The ATTACK time controls are calibrated in arbitrary units. Higher numbers correspond to slower attacks.
The look-ahead delay times in bands 3, 4, and 5 automatically track the setting of
the ATTACK time controls to minimize overshoot for any attack time setting.
MB Limit Speech Threshold. See page 3-36.
Maximum Distortion Control limits the maximum amount of final clipper drive
reduction (in dB) that the 8382’s clipping distortion controller can apply, preventing
over-control of transient material by the distortion controller. Instead, the final clipper is permitted to control some of the transient material (to increase “punch”),
even though, technically, such clipping introduces “distortion.” A setting of 4 to 5
dB works best in most cases. Factory default is 5 dB for virtually all presets.
High Frequency Limiter sets the amount of additional gain reduction occurring in
band 5 when high frequency energy would otherwise cause excessive distortion in
the final clipper. It uses an analysis of the activity in the final clipper to make this determination, and works in close cooperation with the band-5 multiband clipper.
Functionally, this control is a mix control that adds a HF limiter gain reduction signal
3-43
3-44
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
to the band 4 gain reduction signal to determine the total gain reduction in band 5.
Higher settings produce more HF limiting. A setting of “–18” provides a good tradeoff between brightness and distortion at high frequencies.
Limiter Attack controls allow you to set the limiter attack anywhere from 0 to
100% of normal in the Five-Band compressor / limiters. Because the limiter and compressor characteristics interact, you will usually get best audible results when you set
these controls in the range of 70% to 100%. Below 70%, you will usually hear
pumping because the compressor function is trying to create some of the gain reduction that the faster limiting function would have otherwise achieved. If you hear
pumping in a band and you still wish to adjust the limiter attack to a low setting,
you can sometimes ameliorate or eliminate the pumping by slowing down the compressor attack time in that band.
Delta Release controls are differential controls. They allow you to vary the release
time in any band of the Five-Band compressor/limiter by setting an offset between
the MULTIBAND RELEASE setting and the actual release time you achieve in a given
band. For example, if you set the MULTIBAND RELEASE control to medium-fast and the
BAND 3 DELTA GR control to –2, then the band 3 release time will be the same as if
you had set the MULTIBAND RELEASE control to medium and set the BAND 3 DELTA GR
control to 0. Thus, your settings automatically track any changes you make in the
MULTIBAND RELEASE control. In our example, the release time in band 3 will always be
two “click stops” slower than the setting of the MULTIBAND RELEASE control.
If your setting of a given DELTA RELEASE control would otherwise create a release
slower than “slow” or faster than “fast” (the two end-stops of the MULTIBAND
RELEASE control), the band in question will instead set its release time at the appropriate end-stop.
B1 / B2 Crossover (Band 1 to Band 2 Crossover Frequency) sets the crossover frequency between bands 1 and 2 to either 100 Hz or 200 Hz. It significantly affects the
bass texture, and the best way to understand the differences between the two
crossover frequencies is to listen.
Setup: Test
Parameter
Labels
MODE
BYPASS GAIN
TONE FREQ
Units
Default
Range (CCW to CW)
Step
--dB
Hz
Operate
0.0
400
--1
LOG
TONE LVL
TONE CHAN
%
---
91
L+R
Operate, Bypass, Tone
−18 … +25
16, 20, 25, 31.5, 40, 50,
63, 80, 100, 125, 160,
200, 250, 315, 400, 500,
630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600,
2000, 2500, 3150, 4000, 5000,
6300, 8000, 9500, 10000,
12500, 13586.76, 15000
0 … 121
L+R, L−R, LEFT; RIGHT
Table 3-10: Test Modes
1
---
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
Test Modes
The Test Modes screen allows you to switch between OPERATE, BYPASS, and TONE.
When you switch to BYPASS or TONE, the 8382 saves the preset you had on-air and
will restore it when you switch back to OPERATE. Even if you had been editing a preset and did not yet save these changes as a User preset, you will not lose the edits
you made.
Table 3-10: Test Modes shows the facilities available, which should be largely selfexplanatory. The test modes function identically in stereo and dual-mono modes. For
example, in dual mono mode, setting TONE CHAN to LEFT applies signal to channel 1
but not to channel 2.
Using the 8382 PC Remote Control Software
8382 PC Remote control software allows you to remotely access any front-panel
8382 control. Moreover, you can access all of the Advanced Modify controls that are
unavailable from the 8382’s front panel. The software also gives you the ability to
backup user presets, system files, and automation files to your computer’s storage
devices (hard drives, etc.) and to restore them later to your 8382.
The 8382 PC Remote software can connect to your 8382 via modem, direct serial cable connection, or Ethernet network. It communicates with your 8382 via the TCP/IP
protocol, regardless of how it is connected to your 8382.
PC Remote works best on displays of 1024x768 pel or higher. Scroll bars
will appear when using lower resolutions.
Before running 8382 PC Remote, you must have installed the appropriate Windows
communications services on your computer. By default, the installer installs a shortcut to 8382_PC.exe on your desktop and in your Start Menu under Orban\Optimod
8382.
8382 PC Remote can control only one 8382 at a time, but it can readily switch between several 8382s. 8382 PC Remote has a built-in “address book” that allows it to
select and connect to:
•
any 8382 on the same network as the PC,
•
an 8382 that can be accessed through a modem connected to the PC via dial-up
networking, and,
•
an 8382 that is connected directly to the PC’s serial port.
Before your PC can communicate with a given 8382, you must first set up a “connection,” which is information that allows PC Remote to locate and communicate with
the 8382.
3-45
3-46
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
To set up a new connection:
A) Launch 8382_PC.exe.
B) Create a new 8382 connection by choosing NEW 8382 from the CONNECT file
menu or by right clicking on the ALL CONNECTIONS icon in the Connections List
and selecting NEW 8382.
The Connection Properties dialog box opens.
C) Enter an Alias name for your 8382 (like “KABC”).
D) Leave the password field blank to prompt the user to enter a password when
initiating a connection.
Refer to Security And Passcode Programming on page 2-29.
Otherwise, enter a password to allow PC Remote to connect to your 8382
without requiring a password when the connection is initiated.
For successful connection, a password must have already been entered
into your 8382 unit.
E) If you are communicating with your 8382 through a network, select the
Ethernet radio button and enter the appropriate IP address, subnet mask,
port, and gateway data. These data must agree with the values you set in step
1 on page 2-33. See also Setting Up Ethernet, LAN, and VPN Connections on
page 2-41.
F) If you are communicating via a direct serial cable connection or a modem
connection, follow the appropriate procedure described in Appendix: Setting
up Serial Communications, starting on page 2-43.
G) Click OK after entering all required information.
To initiate communication:
Initiate communication by double-clicking on
the desired 8382 alias in the Connections List, or
by selecting the desired 8382 alias from the
CONNECT drop down menu.
If the connection is successful, a dialog bubble
will appear on the bottom right hand corner of
the screen verifying your connection.
•
If a warning message appears stating: “No password is set at the 8382…”
go to your 8382 unit and enter a passcode.
•
If an Enter Passcode dialog box appears, enter a valid passcode and the
8382 PC Remote software will initiate a connection to the 8382 unit.
A window will appear saying, “Connecting to the 8382, please wait.” A few moments later, a new message will appear: “Loading system files, please wait.”
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
When run, the Orban PC Remote software installer makes copies of all 8382 factory preset files on your local hard drive. The PC Remote software reads these
files to speed up its initialization. If any of these files have been deleted or damaged, the PC Remote software will refresh them by downloading them from the
8382. If the PC Remote software needs to do this, it can substantially increase the
time required for the software to initialize, particularly through a slow modem
connection.
When this download is finished, the main meters will appear.
•
A wheel mouse is the quickest and easiest interface to use—you will rarely (if
ever) have to use the keyboard.
•
The help box at the bottom of the screen always presents a short help message
for the function you have selected.
To modify a control setting:
A) Choose PROCESSING PARAMETERS from the EDIT menu or click the second-tothe-left button on the button bar.
B) Select menu tabs for LESS-MORE, STEREO ENHANCER, and EQ to access Basic
Modify controls. All other menu tabs contain Full or Advanced Modify controls.
You can reset any Basic Modify Control without losing LESS-MORE functionality; Full and Advanced modify control adjustments will cause LESSMORE to be grayed-out.
To set a control, click it (it will become highlighted) and then adjust it by
dragging it with the mouse or moving the wheel on the mouse.
You can also use the + and – keys on the numeric keypad to adjust any
control.
To recall a preset:
A) Choose RECALL PRESET from the FILE menu to bring up the OPEN PRESET FILE
dialog box. You can also click the leftmost button on the button bar.
B) Click the desired preset within the dialog box to select it.
C) Double-click the desired preset or select it and click the RECALL PRESET button
to put it on-air.
Continually clicking the RECALL PRESET button will toggle between the
current and previous on-air presets.
D) Click DONE to dismiss the OPEN PRESET FILE dialog box.
The folder on your hard drive containing the preset files (both Factory
and User) is automatically synchronized to the contents of its associated
8382’s non-volatile memory each time 8382 PC Remote connects to that
8382. The 8382’s memory is the “master.” This means that if you delete a
user preset from the 8382’s memory (whether locally via its front panel or
3-47
3-48
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
via 8382 PC Remote), 8382 PC Remote will automatically erase this preset
from this folder on your computer. To archive a preset permanently, you
must use the Backup function (see page 3- 48).
To save a user preset you have created:
A) Select SAVE PRESET AS from the FILE menu to bring up the SAVE AS Dialog Box.
The current preset name will appear in the File Name field.
B) Click in the field, and edit it.
C) Click SAVE to save the preset to the 8382’s internal memory as a User Preset.
If you have made edits to a previously existing user preset, you can select
SAVE PRESET from the FILE menu to overwrite the pre-existing user preset
automatically.
To back up User Presets, system files, and automation files onto
your computer’s hard drive:
A) Select BACKUP TO PC from the FILE Menu.
B) Click OK.
PC Remote will offer three options:
• Save User Presets, system files, and automation in plain text.
This allows the presets and files to be read with any text editor program
and to be readily exchanged between Optimod users.
• Save User Presets, system files, and automation files using the session passcode to encrypt them.
• Save User Presets, system files, and automation files using the password of
your choice to encrypt them.
The encryption options prevent archived presets, system files, and automation files from being restored if the user does not have the password
used for the encryption. There is no “back door”— Orban cannot help
you to decrypt a preset whose password is unknown.
All User Preset, system, and automation files are copied from your Optimod’s internal memory to a folder called “backup” on your PC. This
folder is a subfolder of the folder named the same as the alias of the Optimod that you are backing up.
This folder name (“backup”) and location are hard-coded into the software. If you wish to move the backup files somewhere else later, use a
file manager (like Explorer) on your computer.
To make more than one backup archive, rename the current backup
folder (for example, to “Backup1”). 8382 PC Remote will create a new
backup folder the next time you do a backup, leaving your renamed
backup folder untouched. Later, you will be able to restore from any
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
folder—the Restore dialog box allows you to choose the folder containing the files to be restored
If you attempt to back up a preset with the same name as a preset existing in the Backup folder, but with a different date, 8382 PC Remote will
warn you and will allow you to overwrite the preset in the Backup folder
or to cancel the operation. If you wish to keep the existing archived preset, you can first use a file manager to move the existing user preset in
the Backup folder to another folder and then repeat the backup operation.
To restore archived presets, system files, and automation files:
In addition to restoring an archived preset to its original Optimod, you can also
copy archived presets from one Optimod to another. The Optimod whose connection is active will receive the preset.
If the preset, system file, or automation file was encrypted when it was originally
saved, PC Remote will request the password under which it was encrypted.
All User Presets are compatible with all 8382 software versions. If Orban
adds new controls to a software version, the new software will assign a
reasonable default value to any control missing in an old User Preset. If
you archive such a User Preset after restoring it, the newly written archive file will now include the new controls (with the default values,
unless you edit any of these values before you re-archive the preset).
A) Select RESTORE FROM PC from the FILE menu.
A standard Windows dialog box will open.
B) Select the type of files you want to restore using the FILES OF TYPE field at
the bottom of the dialog box.
You can select to restore all user presets (*.orbt3user, *.orbu), 8382 user
presets (*.orbt3user), system files (*.orbt3setup), and automation files
(*.orbt3autom).
If you want to restore files from a different directory (i.e., that might
have been created on a different 8382), navigate to that directory from
within the dialog box.
C) To restore a single user preset:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to a user preset file type (*.orbt3user).
b) Select the desired preset in the dialog box.
c) Click the RESTORE button.
D) To restore all the user presets from a specific location:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to a user preset file type (*.orbt3user)
b) Highlight all the user presets in the dialog window
c) Click the RESTORE button.
E) To restore a system file:
3-49
3-50
OPERATION
ORBAN MODEL 8382
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to the System Setup file type (*.orbt3setup).
b) Select the desired system file in the dialog box.
c) Click the RESTORE button.
F) To restore an automation file:
a) Set the FILES OF TYPE field to the Automation file type (*.orbt3autom)
b) Select the desired automation file in the dialog box
c) Click the RESTORE button.
G) Click DONE to dismiss the RESTORE dialog box.
To modify INPUT/OUTPUT and SYSTEM SETUP:
Choose SETUP from the TOOLS menu or click the third-from-the-left button on
the button bar.
To set a control, click it (it will become highlighted) and then use the wheel on
the mouse to adjust it. You can also use the + and – keys on the numeric keypad
to adjust any control.
To modify AUTOMATION:
A) Choose AUTOMATION from the TOOLS menu.
An Automation Dialog box will open.
B) Click the NEW EVENT to create a new event
Controls to set the event type and time are available on the right hand
side of the dialog box.
C) Check the ENABLE AUTOMATION check box at the top of the dialog box to enable automation.
To group multiple 8382s:
Right-click ALL CONNECTIONS in the Connections List and select NEW GROUP.
You can add multiple 8382 to a single group to help organize a network of 8382.
However, only one 8382 from within a group can be connected to 8382 PC Remote at any one time.
Navigation Using the Keyboard
In general, PC Remote uses standard Windows conventions for navigation.
Navigate around the screens using the TAB key. Use CTRL-TAB to move to the next
tabbed screen in PC Remote.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
Use the + and – keys or the left and right arrow keys on the numeric keypad to adjust control settings.
To Quit the Program
Use standard Windows conventions: Press ALT-F4 on the keyboard, or click the X
on the upper right corner with the mouse.
About Aliases created by Optimod 8382 PC Remote Software
When you ADD A NEW 8382 using Optimod 8382 PC Remote, your 8382 automatically
receives an 8382 Alias name to differentiate it from other 8382s. You can change the
name anytime in the 8382 Properties window inside 8382 PC Remote.
When you add a new 8382 or change the name of an existing 8382 Alias, an Alias
folder is created in the same location as the executable for Optimod 8382 PC Remote (usually \Program Files\Orban\Optimod 8382). The folder has the same name as
the Alias name. Once you establish the initial connection to the 8382, all presets for
that 8382 are automatically copied to the Alias folder; thus, the folder contains all
the preset files for that 8382, both Factory and User. If you have backed up the 8382
using 8382 PC Remote, these will appear in a “backup” subfolder located within the
Alias folder.
Archived user preset files are text files and can be opened in a text editor
(like Notepad) if you want to examine their contents.
Alias folders and their associated backup subfolders are registered in your PC’s Registry. This prevents folders from being accidentally deleted or moved. If you move or
delete Alias folders from the PC, the Alias folders recreate themselves in the previous location and restore their contents by copying it from their associated 8382s
when 8382 PC Remote connects to such an 8382.
Multiple Installations of Optimod 8382 PC Remote
Rarely, you may want to have more than one installation of 8382 PC Remote on your
computer. There are a few extra things to know if you have multiple installations.
If you install a new version of the Optimod 8382 PC Remote software on your PC,
any Alias folders and backup subfolders created in an earlier software version still
remain in their original location on your PC (and in its registry).
The version of 8382 PC Remote must match the version of the software in the 8382
controlled by it. Therefore, you will only need multiple installations of PC Remote
(having separate version numbers) if:
•
you are controlling multiple 8382s, and
•
not all of your 8382s are running the same version of 8382 software, and
3-51
3-52
OPERATION
•
ORBAN MODEL 8382
you do not want to upgrade at least one controlled 8382 to the latest version of
8382 PC Remote software.
Each version of 8382 PC Remote has its own top-level folder, normally under
\Program Files\Orban. (The default folder is \Program Files\Orban\Optimod 8382.)
When you install a new version of 8382 PC Remote, the default behavior is to overwrite the old version, which is usually the desired behavior. To prevent the installer
from overwriting the old version, you must specify a different installation folder
when you install the new version (for example, \Program Files\Orban\Optimod
8382v2).
Each version of 8382 PC Remote will display all 8382 Aliases, even those pointing to
8382s with incompatible version numbers. If you attempt to connect to an older version of 8382 from a newer version of 8382 PC Remote, 8382 PC Remote will offer to
upgrade the software in the target 8382 so that it corresponds to the version of
8382 PC Remote that is active. If you attempt to connect to newer version of 8382
from an older version of 8382 PC Remote, it will refuse to connect and will emit an
error message regarding incompatible versions.
If you decide to install the new software to a different location on your PC, new Aliases created using the new software will not be located in the same place as the old
Aliases.
To Move Alias Folders:
Even though each version of 8382 PC Remote can see all aliases, you may wish to
move the corresponding folders so they are under the folder corresponding to the
highest version of 8382 PC Remote that is currently installed on your computer (although this is not required). If your Alias folders reside in different locations, you
can move all the Alias folders to the same location by using the PC Remote software.
Do not use an external file manager (like Windows Explorer) to do this. The old Alias
folders need to be re-created under the Optimod 8382 PC Remote software you
wish to use (so that the registry entries can be correctly updated). You can do this
two different ways.
•
Rename the Alias (preferred): Start the Optimod 8382 PC Remote executable
you wish to use and rename your old Aliases with a slightly different name. A
new Alias folder with the new name will be created in the same location as the
Optimod 8382 PC Remote executable.
•
Delete and Recreate the Alias: Start the Optimod 8382 PC Remote executable
you wish to use. Delete the old 8382 Aliases and create new ones to replace
them. New Alias folders will be created in the same location as the Optimod
8382 PC Remote executable.
Important: The deletion process will automatically erase its associated
folder, including the Backup directory. If you have anything in the
Backup directory that you wish to keep, you should therefore move that
directory elsewhere (or transfer the desired files to another, active
backup directory).
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
OPERATION
Ordinarily, the erasure process will move the Backup directory to your
computer’s Recycle Bin, so you can recover a Backup directory that you
have accidentally deleted in this way.
To share an archived User Preset between 8382s:
A) Navigate to the directory containing the desired User Preset from within the
RESTORE FROM PC dialog box
B) Click the RESTORE button.
This User Preset will be downloaded to the 8382 to which 8382 PC Remote is currently connected.
If the User Preset is encrypted, PC Remote will request its password.
3-53
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
MAINTENANCE
Section 4
Maintenance
Routine Maintenance
The 8382 OPTIMOD-TV Audio Processor uses highly stable analog and digital circuitry throughout. Recommended routine maintenance is minimal.
1. Periodically check audio level and gain reduction meter readings.
Become familiar with normal audio level meter readings, and with the normal
performance of the G / R metering. If any meter reading is abnormal, see Section
5 for troubleshooting information.
2. Listen to the 8382's output.
A good ear will pick up many faults. Familiarize yourself with the “sound” of the
8382 as you have set it up, and be sensitive to changes or deterioration. However, if problems arise, please do not jump to the conclusion that the 8382 is at
fault. The troubleshooting information in Section 5 will help you determine if
the problem is with OPTIMOD-TV or is somewhere else in the station's equipment.
3. Periodically check for corrosion.
Particularly in humid or salt-spray environments, check for corrosion at the input
and output connectors and at those places where the 8382 chassis contacts the
rack.
4. Periodically check for loss of grounding.
Check for loss of grounding due to corrosion or loosening of rack mounting
screws.
5. Clean the front panel when it is soiled.
Wash the front panel with a mild household detergent and a damp cloth. Do not
use stronger solvents; they may damage plastic parts, paint, or the silk-screened
lettering. Do not use paper-based cleaning towels, or use cleaning agents containing ammonia, or alcohol. An acceptable cleaning product is “Glass Plus.” For
best results when cleaning the lens, use a clean, lint-free cloth.
4-1
4-2
MAINTENANCE
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Subassembly Removal and Replacement
See page 6-25 for the Circuit Board Locator and Basic Interconnections diagram.
1. Removing the Top Cover:
To access any internal board (including the display assembly), you must remove
the top cover.
A) Disconnect the 8382 and remove it from the rack.
Be sure power is disconnected before removing the cover.
Warning: Hazardous voltage is exposed with the unit open and the
power ON.
B) Set the unit upright on a padded surface with the front panel facing you.
C) Remove all eighteen screws holding the top cover in place, and lift the top
cover off.
Use a #1 Phillips screwdriver.
2. Removing the Front Panel Assembly:
A) Detach the five cables that connect the display board assembly to the base
board. Gently lift each cable up from where it connects to its jumper, so that
the jumper pins unseat without bending or breaking.
B) Detach the front panel from the unit.
a) Disconnect the three-wire cable at the back of the encoder.
b) Detach the ground lug that connects the panel's ground wire to the chassis.
Use a ¼-inch nut driver or needle-nose pliers.
c) Remove the front panel.
The front panel is held in place by four ball studs at each corner. The
panel should snap away from the chassis if you apply a little force.
C) Using a screwdriver, remove the ten gold-colored screws and washers that
connect the display board to the front of the chassis.
D) Remove the display board assembly by removing the tape from the top front
edge of the chassis, so that the white ribbon cables are no longer attached to
the chassis and the display panel is free.
Do not remove the tape from the white ribbon cables.
3. Removing the RS-232 Connector Board:
A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) Using a 3/16-inch hex nut driver, remove the two hex nuts holding the RS-232
connector to the chassis.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
MAINTENANCE
C) Unplug the RS-232 interface assembly from the base board.
4. Removing the CPU Module:
A) Remove the four screws holding the CPU module to the standoffs that support it on the base board.
B) Applying gentle upward pressure, unplug the CPU module from the base
board.
5. Removing the Base Board:
A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) If you have not done so yet, remove the CPU module (step 3.C), above).
C) Using a 3/16-inch hex nut driver, remove the two hex nuts holding the DB-25
connector to the rear panel of the chassis.
D) If you have not done so yet, remove the RS-232 connector board (step 3,
above).
E) If you have not done so yet, remove the five cables that connect the display
assembly to the base board (step 3 on page 4-2).
F) If you have not yet done so, remove the RS-232 interface assembly from the
base board.
G) Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the base board to the I/O board.
H) Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the base board to the DSP board.
I) Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the power supply to the base board.
J) Using a #1 Philips screwdriver, remove the four corner screws holding the base
board to the chassis standoffs.
K) Using a 3/16-inch hex nut driver, remove the four hex standoffs on which the
CPU module was mounted
L) The base board is now free and can be removed from the chassis.
6. Removing the I/O (Input/output) Board:
A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) Unlock all XLR connectors, using a jeweler's screwdriver: engage the locking
mechanism (in the center of the triangle formed by the three contact pins)
and turn counterclockwise until the XLR connector is no longer attached.
C) Remove the ribbon cable that connects the I/O board to the base board.
D) Remove the ribbon cable that connects the I/O board to the DSP board.
E) Disconnect the ribbon cable connecting the power supply to the base board.
F) Remove the three #1 Phillips screws (and their washers) that connect the I/O
board to the chassis.
4-3
4-4
MAINTENANCE
ORBAN MODEL 8382
G) Carefully pull the I/O board forward to clear the XLRs from their housings.
Then lift the board out of the chassis.
7. Removing the DSP Board:
A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) Remove the ribbon cable that connects the I/O board to the DSP board.
C) Remove the ribbon cable that connects the base board to the DSP board.
D) Remove the plug connecting the power supply wiring harness to the DSP
board.
E) Remove the five #1 Phillips screws (and their washers) that connect the DSP
board to the chassis.
F) Lift the DSP board out of the chassis.
8. Removing the Power Supply Board:
A) If you have not done so yet, remove the top cover (step 1, above).
B) Remove the two plugs that connect the power supply board to the power
transformer.
If present, remove the white fasteners that tie the two cables to the
power supply board.
C) Remove the ribbon cables connecting the power supply to the base board,
DSP board, and I/O board.
D) Remove the nine #1 Phillips screws (and their washers) fastening the heat sink
to the side of the chassis.
E) Remove the nut and star washer from the ground wire with a ¼-inch nut
driver.
F) Remove the two Phillips screws (and matching washers) that hold the IEC (line
cord) connector to the chassis.
G) Remove the three Phillips screws holding the power supply board to the main
chassis.
Note that one screw is located under the safety cover close to the line
voltage selector switch. Lift the cover up to expose the screw.
H) Carefully lift the power supply board up.
9. Reattaching the Power Supply Board:
A) Set power supply board into main chassis, so that it aligns with its mounting
holes.
B) Replace the two Phillips screws that hold the IEC connector.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
MAINTENANCE
C) Replace the nine #1 Phillips screws that hold the heat sink to the side of the
chassis. If necessary, add additional heat sink compound to ensure a reliable
thermal connection between the heat sink and the chassis.
D) Replace the ground wire nut.
E) Replace the three Phillips screws that hold the power supply board to the
main chassis.
F) Reattach the two plugs that connect the power supply board to the transformer.
G) Reattach the two plugs for the power distribution wiring harnesses.
10. Replacing the Base Board, I/O Board, and DSP board:
Referring to steps 5 – 7, follow the instructions in reverse.
Note that you cannot replace the RS-232 board and the CPU board until you
have replaced the base board.
11. Replacing the CPU Board:
Referring to step 4, follow the instructions in reverse.
12. Replacing the RS-232 Board:
Referring to step 3, follow the instructions in reverse.
13. Replacing the Front Panel Assembly:
A) Set the display assembly in place so that it aligns with its mounting holes.
B) Replace the ten gold-colored screws that connect the display board to the
front of the chassis.
C) Reattach the five cables that connect the display board to the base board.
Each cable has a different type or size of connector, so it is obvious which cable mates with which jack on the base board.
D) Attach the front panel assembly to the unit.
a) Line up the plastic front panel and snap it back on, making sure each key
pad button feeds through its respective hole properly.
b) Reattach the ground lug that connects the panel's ground wire to the
chassis.
Use a ¼-inch nut driver or needle-nose pliers.
c) Reconnect the three-wire cable at the back of the encoder.
14. Replacing the Top Cover:
A) Place top on unit and reattach the eighteen Phillips screws. (Be careful not to
pinch any cables.)
4-5
4-6
MAINTENANCE
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Field Audit of Performance
Required Equipment:
•
Ultra-low distortion sine-wave oscillator / THD analyzer / audio voltmeter
(With verified residual distortion below 0.01%. Sound Technology 1710B;
Audio Precision System One, or similar high-performance system.)
(The NAB Broadcast and Audio System Test CD is an excellent source of
test signals when used with a high-quality CD player.)
•
Spectrum analyzer with tracking generator
(Stanford Research Systems SR760 or equivalent. Alternatively, a sweep
generator with 50-15,000 Hz logarithmic sweep can be used with an oscilloscope in X / Y mode, or you can use a computer-controlled test set like
the Audio Precision System One. )
•
Digital voltmeter
Accurate to ±0.1%.
•
Oscilloscope
DC-coupled, triggered sweep, with 5M Hz or greater vertical bandwidth.
•
Two 620Ω ±5% resistors.
•
Optional: Audio Precision System 1 (without digital option) or System 2 (for digital tests).
It is assumed that the technician is thoroughly familiar with the operation of this
equipment.
This procedure is useful for detecting and diagnosing problems with the 8382's performance. It includes checks of frequency response, noise and distortion performance, and output level capability.
This performance audit assesses the performance of the analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog converters and verifies that the digital signal processing section (DSP)
is passing signal correctly. Ordinarily, there is a high probability that the DSP is performing the dynamic signal processing correctly. There is therefore no need to measure such things as attack and release times—these are defined by software and will
automatically be correct if the DSP is otherwise operating normally.
It is often more convenient to make measurements on the bench away from high RF
fields which could affect results. For example, in a high RF field it is very difficult to
accurately measure the very low THD produced by a properly operating 8382 at
most frequencies. However, in an emergency it is usually possible to detect many of
the more severe faults that could develop in the 8382 circuitry even in high-RF environments.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
MAINTENANCE
See the assembly drawings in Section 6 for component locations. Be sure to turn the
power off before removing or installing circuit boards.
Follow these instructions in order without skipping steps.
Note: To obtain an unbalanced output, jumper pin 1 (ground) to pin 3, and measure
between pin 1 (ground) and pin 2 (hot).
Note: All analog output measurements are taken with a 620Ω ±5% resistor tied between pin 2 and 3 of the XLR connector.
1. Prepare the unit.
A) Set the GND LIFT switch to the earth ground symbol setting (left position) to
connect chassis ground to circuit ground.
B) Use the front panel controls to set the 8382's software controls to their default settings, as follows:
a) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / ANLG IN CALIB. After writing down the old
settings (so you can restore them later), set controls as follows:
Input ............................................................................................. analog
AI Ref VU ................................................................................... +4.0 dBu
R CH BAL.........................................................................................0.0 dB
b) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG IN CALIB. Set controls as in the table below:
DI Ref VU ................................................................................ –15.0 dBFS
R CH BAL.........................................................................................0.0 dB
c) Navigate to Setup / Io Calib / Anlg Out Calib. Set controls as follows:
AO 100% ................................................................................. +10.0 dBu
AO Pre-E .............................................................................................Flat
AO FEEDS......................................................................................xmitter
d) Navigate to SETUP / IO CALIB / DIG OUT CALIB. Set controls as follows:
DO 100% .................................................................................. –2.8 dBFS
DO Pre-E ............................................................................................. flat
DO RATE ........................................................................................32 kHz
DO SYNC......................................................................................internal
e) Press the NEXT button. Set controls as follows:
Word Len.............................................................................................. 20
Dither..................................................................................................Out
FORMAT ...........................................................................................AES3
f) Navigate to SETUP / TEST. Set controls as follows:
MODE ........................................................................................... Bypass
4-7
4-8
MAINTENANCE
ORBAN MODEL 8382
NOTE: Bypass defeats all compression, limiting, and program equalization, but retains the selected pre-emphasis (either 50µs or 75µs).
BYPASS GAIN ....................................................................................0 dB
TONE FREQ....................................................................................400 Hz
TONE LVL........................................................................................ 100%
g) Press the NEXT button.
h) Set controls as follows:
TONE CHAN........................................................................................ L+R
2. Test the power supply
A) If the power supply is entirely dead and the fuse is not blown, verify that the
primary winding of the power transformer is intact by measuring the resistance of the power supply at the IEC AC line connector.
For 115-volt operation, the resistance should be approximately 7.6Ω.
For 230-volt operation, the resistance should be approximately 27Ω.
Number of Red Flashes
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Problem With
+ unregulated supply
+15V or –15V
+5V or –5V
+5V Digital
Analog Digital ground connection broken
DSP A +3.3V supply
DSP B +3.3V supply
CPU +3.3V supply
CPU +2.5V supply
Table 4-1: Decoder Chart for Power Supervisor
B) The green LED power indicator on the lower left of the front panel monitors
the DC power supply outputs. If one or more power supply voltages are out of
tolerance, red flashes will report them according to Table 4-1. If there are
multiple values out of tolerance, they are reported one after another in a
continuous loop, with one green flash indicating the beginning of each count.
You can monitor power supply voltages at connector J7 on the power
supply board (see Section 6 for schematic and parts locator drawing).
When one faces the connector, the voltages can be found on the pins in
the following pattern:
(1) + unreg.
(2) - unreg
(3) digital gnd
(4) chassis gnd
(5) +15V
(6) -15V
(7) +5 V digital
(8) +5V analog
(9) –5V analog
(10) NC
Table 4-2: Layout Diagram of J7, with expected voltages on each pin
The +3.3V and +2.5V supplies are locally regulated on the DSP and base
boards (see Section 6).
C) Measure the regulated voltages at J7 with the DVM and observe the ripple
with an oscilloscope, AC-coupled. The following results are typical:
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
Power Supply Rail
+15VDC
–15VDC
+5VDC
–5VDC
Digital +5VDC
MAINTENANCE
DC Voltage (volts)
+15 ± 0.5
–15 ± 0.5
+5 ± 0.25
–5 ± 0.25
+5 ± 0.25
AC Ripple (mV p-p)
<20
<20
<20
<20
[Obscured by noise]
Table 4-3: Typical Power Supply Voltages and AC Ripple
3. Adjust Analog Output Level Trim.
A) Verify 8382 software controls are set to their default settings. [Refer to step
(1.B) on page 4-7.]
B) Feed the 8382 output with the built-in 400 Hz test tone:
a) Navigate to SETUP / TEST.
b) Set the MODE to TONE.
C) Connect the audio voltmeter to the Left Analog Output.
D) Adjust output trim VR200 to make the meter read +10.0 dBu. (0 dBu = 0.775V
rms.) Verify a frequency reading of 400 Hz.
E) Verify THD+N reading of <0.05% (0.02% typical) using a 22 kHz low pass filter
in the distortion analyzer.
F) Set the MODE to BYPASS.
BYPASS defeats all compression, limiting, and program equalization but
retains pre-emphasis.
G) Verify a reading (noise) of <–80 dBu at the output of the unit.
H) Using VR201, repeat steps (C) through (G) for the Right Analog Output.
4. Check frequency response of Analog I/O.
A) Verify 8382 software controls are set to their default settings. [Refer to step
(1.B) on page 4-7.]
B) Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode [see step (3.F)].
C) Connect the oscillator to the Left Analog Input XLR connector.
D) Inject the Analog Input XLR connector with a level of 0 dBu with the oscillator
set to 100 Hz.
This is 20 dB below the clip level, which allows headroom for preemphasis. (75µs pre-emphasis will cause 17 dB of boost at 15 kHz.)
E) Connect the audio analyzer to the 8382's Left Analog Output XLR connector.
F) Verify a level of 0 dBu ±1 dB. Use this level as the reference level.
G) Verify that frequency response at 50 Hz, 100 Hz, 400 Hz, 5 kHz, and 15 kHz is
within ±0.1 dB of the reference level.
4-9
4-10
MAINTENANCE
ORBAN MODEL 8382
This procedure tests the analog input circuitry, the A/D converter, the
DSP, the DAC, and the analog output circuitry.
H) Repeat steps (C) through (G) for the right channel.
5. Check distortion performance of Analog I/O.
A) Verify 8382 software controls are set to their default settings. (Refer to page
4-7.)
B) Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode [see step (3.F)].
C) Connect a THD analyzer to the Left Analog Output XLR connector. Set the
THD analyzer's bandwidth to 22 kHz.
D) Connect the oscillator to the Left Analog Input XLR connector.
E) For each frequency used to measure THD, adjust the output level of the oscillator to make the COMP meter on the 8382 read 100.
You will have to reduce the output level of the oscillator at higher frequencies to compensate for the pre-emphasis boost in the 8382.
F) Measure the THD+N at the frequency levels listed below.
Frequency
50 Hz
100 Hz
400 Hz
1 kHz
2.5 kHz
5 kHz
7.5 kHz
10 kHz
15 kHz
THD+N Typical
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
0.015%
THD+N Maximum
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
0.03%
G) Repeat the above measurements for the right channel. Connect the oscillator
to the right analog input and the distortion analyzer to the right analog output.
H) Disconnect the oscillator and THD analyzer from the 8382.
6. Test Digital Sample Rate Converter (Receiver).
A) Verify 8382 software controls are set to their default settings. (Refer to page
4-7.)
B) Be sure you are still in BYPASS mode [see step (3.F)].
C) Navigate to SETUP / DIG IN CALIB and Set the INPUT to DIGITAL.
D) Connect the digital source generator to the AES3 Digital Input XLR connector
of the 8382.
E) Set the frequency of the digital source generator to 400 Hz and its output
level to 6 dB below full scale.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
MAINTENANCE
F) Inject the Digital Input with a sample rate of 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2
kHz, and 96 kHz. Use 24-bit words.
G) Listen to the analog outputs of the 8382 and verify that the output sounds
clean and glitch-free regardless of the input sample rate.
H) Leave the digital source generator connected to the 8382.
7. Test Digital Sample Rate Converter (Transmitter).
A) Connect an AES3 analyzer (like the Audio Precision System 2) to the 8382’s
AES3 digital output.
B) Set the sample rate of the digital source generator to 48 kHz.
C) Navigate to SETUP / DIG OUT CALIB.
D) Change the DO RATE to 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz, and
verify that the frequencies measured at the 8382’s AES3 output follow the
values in the chart below within given tolerances:
Sample Rate
Tolerance (PPM)
32.0 kHz
100 PPM
44.1 kHz
100 PPM
48.0 kHz
100 PPM
88.2 kHz
100 PPM
96.0 kHz
100 PPM
E) Disconnect the digital source generator from the 8382.
Tolerance ( Hz)
±1.60 Hz
±4.41 Hz
±2.40 Hz
±8.82 Hz
±4.80 Hz
8. Optional tests.
A) You can test each GPI (Remote Interface) input for functionality in the obvious way, by programming a function for it and then verifying that the function executes when you activate the input. To program a GPI input, see
Remote Control Interface Programming on page 2-32.
B) You can test the RS-232 Port 1 for functionality by verifying that you can connect to a PC through a null modem cable. See Networking and Remote Control starting on page 2-33 (in particular, step 4 on page 2-35).
9. Return OPTIMOD-TV to service.
A) Remove the 600Ω resistors connected across the outputs.
B) Restore your normal operating parameters, using the notes you made in step
(1.B) on page 4-7.
C) Navigate to SETUP / TEST / MODE and choose OPERATE.
D) Recall your normal operating preset.
4-11
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
Section 5
Troubleshooting
Problems and Potential Solutions
Always verify that the problem is not the source material being fed to the 8382, or
in other parts of the system.
RFI, Hum, Clicks, or Buzzes
A grounding problem is likely. Review the information on grounding on page 2-8.
The 8382 has been designed with very substantial RFI suppression on its analog and
digital input and output ports, and on the AC line input. It will usually operate adjacent to high-powered transmitters without difficulty. In the most unusual circumstances, it may be necessary to reposition the unit to reduce RF interference, and/or
to reposition its input and output cables to reduce RF pickup on their shields.
Particularly if you are using a long run of coaxial cable between your stereo encoder
and the exciter, a ground loop may inject noise into the exciter’s composite input—
especially if the exciter’s input is unbalanced. The Orban CIT25 Composite Isolation
Transformer can usually cure this problem.
The AES3 inputs and output are transformer-coupled and have very good resistance
to RFI. If you have RFI problems and are using analog connections on either the input or output, using digital connections will almost certainly eliminate the RFI.
Buzz can be caused by Incidental Phase Modulation (ICPM), where the visual carrier
interferes with the aural carrier. This can be caused by poor transmitter tuning
and/or by insufficient bandwidth in the antenna system's notch diplexer. ICPM has
particular severe consequence in the BTSC and EIAJ stereo systems, and the transmitter often requires updating the successfully transmit stereo.
Poor Peak Modulation Control
The 8382 ordinarily controls peak modulation to an accuracy of ±2%. This accuracy
will be destroyed if the signal path following the 8382 has poor transient response.
Almost any link can cause problems. Even the TV aural exciter can have insufficient
flatness of response and phase-linearity (particularly at low frequencies) to disturb
peak levels. Section 1 of this manual contains a complete discussion of the various
things that can go wrong.
Digital STLs using lossy compression algorithms (including MPEG1 Layer 2, MPEG1
Layer 3, Dolby AC2, and APT-X) will overshoot severely (up to 3 dB) on some pro-
5-1
5-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 8382
gram material. The amount of overshoot will depend on data rate—the higher the
rate, the lower the overshoot.
Even if the transmission system is operating properly, the TV modulation monitor or
reference receiver can falsely indicate peak program modulation higher than that
actually being transmitted if the monitor overshoots at high and low frequencies.
Many commercial monitors have this problem, but most of these problem units can
be modified to indicate peak levels accurately.
Orban uses the Belar “Wizard” series of DSP-based monitors internally for testing,
because these units do not have this difficulty.
In the BTSC stereo system, the stereo encoder must contain sharp linear low-pass filters to protect the pilot tone from interference and to avoid aliasing between the
stereo main channel and subchannel (and vice versa). These filters will almost certainly cause overshoot. Fortunately, experience has shown that this overshoot causes
no interference or other damage and can be ignored. Most TV stereo modulation
monitors have circuitry to ignore short-duration overshoots so that they will not indicate peaks of this nature.
Audible Distortion On-Air
Make sure that the problem can be observed on more than one receiver and at several locations. Multipath distortion at the monitoring site can be mistaken for real
distortion (and will also cause falsely high modulation readings).
Verify that the source material at the 8382's audio inputs is clean. Heavy processing
can exaggerate even slightly distorted material, pushing it over the edge into unacceptability.
The subjective adjustments available to the user have enough range to cause audible distortion at their extreme settings. There are many controls that can cause distortion, including MULTIBAND CLIPPING and FINAL CLIP DRIVE. Setting the LESS-MORE
control beyond “9” can cause audible distortion of some program material with all
but the Classical and Protect presets.
If you are using analog inputs, the peak input level must not exceed +27 dBu or the
8382's A/D converter will clip and distort.
Unlike earlier digital Optimods, there is no input peak level adjustment
for the A/D converter. Instead, we have provided adequate headroom for
virtually any plant. This is possible because the A/D converter in the 8382
has higher dynamic range than older designs, so we could eliminate a
control that was frequently misadjusted without compromising the
8382’s noise level.
If you are using the 8382’s stereo enhancer, then this can exaggerate multipath distortion in high multipath environments. (However, this amount of multipath will
almost certainly be accompanied by very objectionable ghosting in the video.) You
may want to reduce the setting of the stereo enhancer’s RATIO LIMIT control. A similar
problem can occur if you are using sum-and-difference processing in the 8382’s AGC.
In this case, reduce the setting of the AGC’s MAXDELTAGR controls.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
If you are using an external processor ahead of the 8382, be sure it is not clipping or
otherwise causing problems.
Audible Noise on Air
(See also “RFI, Hums, Clicks, or Buzzes” on page 5-1.)
Excessive compression will always exaggerate noise in the source material. The 8382
has two systems that fight this problem. The silence gate freezes the gain of the
AGC and compressor systems whenever the input noise drops below a level set by
the threshold control for the processing section in question, preventing noise below
this level from being further increased.
There are two independent silence gate circuits in the 8382. The first affects the AGC
and the second affects the Multiband Compressor. Each has its own threshold control. (See MB GATE on page 3-40.)
In television audio, the setting of the GATE THRESHOLD control is quite critical if you
want the processing to be undetectable to the audience. If this control is set too
low, then the 8382 will pump up quiet sounds such as ambiance and underscoring to
unnaturally high levels. Refer to Section 3 of this manual for a further discussion.
In the Multiband structure, dynamic single-ended noise reduction (see DWNEXP THR
on page 3-41) can be used to reduce the level of the noise below the level at which
it appears at the input.
If you are using the 8382's analog input, the overall noise performance of the system is usually limited by the overload-to-noise ratio of the analog-to-digital converter used by the 8382 to digitize the input. (This ratio is better than 108 dB.) It is
important to drive the 8382 with professional levels (more than 0 dBu reference
level) to achieve adequately low noise. (Clipping occurs at +27 dBu.)
The 8382's AES3 input is capable of receiving words of up to 24 bits. A 24-bit word
has a dynamic range of approximately 144 dB. The 8382's digital input will thus
never limit the unit's noise performance even with very high amounts of compression.
If an analog studio-to-transmitter link (STL) is used to pass unprocessed audio to the
8382, the STL's noise level can severely limit the overall noise performance of the
system because compression in the 8382 can exaggerate the STL noise. For example,
the overload-to-noise ratio of a typical analog microwave STL may only be 70-75 dB.
In this case, it is wise to use the Orban 8200ST Studio AGC to perform the AGC function prior to the STL transmitter and to control the STL's peak modulation. This will
optimize the signal-to-noise ratio of the entire transmission system. An uncompressed digital STL will perform much better than any analog STL. (See StudioTransmitter Link, starting on page 1-11.)
Whistle on Air, Perhaps Only in Stereo Reception
This could be caused by a number of problems, any of which could present a spurious tone to the input of an external stereo encoder. In any such case, the first thing
to do is to examine the left and right analog outputs with a spectrum analyzer to
see if any spurious tones are visible. If a spur appears at both outputs, it is probably
5-3
5-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 8382
an input problem. If it only appears at the analog output, then it is likely a problem
with the left/right DACs or other analog circuitry.
Another possible cause is oscillation in the analog input or output circuitry. A whistle
could also be caused by power supply oscillation, STL problems, or exciter problems.
Any competent BTSC stereo encoder will have very effective 15 kHz lowpass filters at
its input, so ultrasonic spurs are unlikely to cause problems unless the stereo generator itself is faulty.
Interference from stereo into subcarriers
Clipping of the composite baseband in the BTSC and EIAJ systems can cause such interference. Such composite clipping result from your over-driving a composite link
between your BTSC or EIAJ stereo generator’s composite output and the exciter's
input.
If the exciter is non-linear, this can cause crosstalk. In general, a properly operating
exciter should have less than 0.1% THD at high frequencies to achieve correct operation with subcarriers.
To prevent truncation of the higher-order Bessel sidebands of the FM modulation,
the RF system following the exciter must be wideband (better than ±500kHz) and
must have symmetrical group delay around the carrier frequency. An incorrectly
tuned transmitter can exhibit an asymmetrical passband that will greatly increase
crosstalk into subcarriers.
Amplitude modulation of the carrier that is synchronous with the program (“synchronous AM”) can cause program-related crosstalk into subcarriers. Synchronous
AM should be better than 35dB below 100% modulation as measured on a synchronous AM detector with standard de-emphasis (50 µs or 75 µs).
The subcarrier receiver itself must receive a multipath-free signal, and must have a
wide and symmetrical IF passband and a linear, low-distortion FM demodulator to
prevent program-related crosstalk into subcarriers.
Shrill, Harsh Sound
This problem can be caused by excessive HF boost in the HF Equalizer and HF Enhancer. It could also be caused by an excessively high setting of the BAND 4 THRESH
control (if you are using the Five-Band Structure), or by excessively high settings of
the BAND 4 MIX and BAND 5 MIX controls (located in Full and Advanced Modify).
If you are driving an external stereo encoder with built-in pre-emphasis, you must
set the 8382’s output to Flat in the System Setup / Output screen to prevent double
pre-emphasis, which will cause very shrill sound (and very poor peak modulation
control).
Dull Sound
If you are using the Two-Band structure, dull-sounding source material will sound
dull on the air. The Multiband structure will automatically re-equalize such dullsounding program material to make its spectral balance more consistent with other
program material.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the 8382’s output is set to Flat in System Setup / Output, there will be no preemphasis unless it is supplied somewhere else in the system. This will cause very dull
sound.
Commercials Too Loud
If you are using a Two-Band structure, make sure that the Loudness Controller is activated on the preset that you are using—the LOUD CNTR THRESH control must not be
set OFF (see page 3-34).
If the Loudness Controller is active but you do not believe it is working hard enough,
set its threshold lower using the LOUD CNTR THRESH control.
Note that the Loudness Controller controls subjective loudness to an absolute
threshold and does not understand the context of the program. Therefore, if a
commercial follows a piece of very quiet program material, the commercial may still
seem loud even though the Loudness Controller is working properly.
The Five-Band structure does not have a Loudness Controller because its Five-Band
processing intrinsically makes loudness from source to source much more uniform
than does the Two-Band structure (when its Loudness Controller is defeated). For
some program material, the Two-Band structure with Loudness Controller enabled
will control loudness slightly more effectively than will the Five-Band structure. For
such material, you may wish to use a preset that employs the Two-Band structure
with loudness control.
System Will Not Pass Line-Up Tones at 100% Modulation
This is normal. Sine waves have a very low peak-to-average ratio by comparison to
program material. The processing thus automatically reduces their peak level to
bring their average level closer to program material, promoting a more consistent
and well-balanced sound quality.
The 8382 can generate test tones itself. The 8382 can also be put into Bypass mode
(locally or by remote control) to enable it to pass externally generated tones at any
desired level. (See Test Modes on page 3-45.)
System Will Not Pass Emergency Alert System (“EAS” USA Standard) Tones at the
Legally Required Modulation Level
See System Will Not Pass Line-Up Tones at 100% Modulation (directly above) for an
explanation. These tones should be injected into the transmitter after the 8382, or
the 8382 should be temporarily switched to BYPASS to pass the tones.
System Receiving 8382’s Digital Output Will Not Lock
Be sure that the 8382’s output sample rate is set match the sample rate that the
driven system expects. Be sure that the 8382’s output mode (AES3 or SPDIF) is set to
match the standard expected by the driven system.
L–R (Stereo Difference Channel) Will Not Null With Monophonic Input
This problem is often caused by relative phase shifts between the left and right
channels prior to the 8382’s input. This will cause innocuous linear crosstalk between
5-5
5-6
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 8382
the stereo main and subchannels. Such crosstalk does not cause subjective quality
problems unless it is very severe.
General Dissatisfaction with Subjective Sound Quality
The 8382 is a complex processor that can be adjusted for many different tastes. For
most users, the factory presets, as augmented by the gamut offered by the LESSMORE control for each preset, are sufficient to find a satisfactory “sound.” However,
some users will not be satisfied until they have accessed other Modify Processing
controls and have adjusted the subjective setup controls in detail to their satisfaction. Such users must fully understand the material in Section 3 of this manual to
achieve the best results from this exercise.
Section 1 of this manual provides a thorough discussion of system engineering considerations, particularly with regard to minimizing overshoot and noise.
Security Passcode Lost (When Unit is Locked Out)
Please see If You Have Forgotten Your Passcode on page 2-31.
Connection Issues between the 8382 and a PC, Modem, or Network
•
Presets: The more user presets you make, the more slowly the 8382 will respond
to front-panel commands. Delete any user presets you do not need.
•
Quick Setup: On the Station ID screen (Quick Setup 9): Use Escape in place of
Cancel. The Cancel button will not work.
•
Software Updates: Close any running Windows programs before attempting
to update.
•
Interrupted Software Updates: If you canceled an update before it completed, wait at least one minute before attempting your next update.
•
Software Updates via Modem: If you are updating via the modem, do not
change the “connection type” parameter on the 2300 while the modem is connected or attempting to connect.
•
Security Passcode: An ALL SCREENS (administrator) security passcode is required for upgrading, regardless of whether you are using a Direct, Modem, or
Ethernet connection.
•
Passcode Format: The passcode is case-sensitive. When entering it into Windows’ Dial-up Connection dialog box, it must be typed exactly as it was originally entered into the Security screen.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting Connections
•
If you get an error message such as “the specified port is not connected” or
“There is no answer”…
You may have the wrong interface type set on your 8382. Navigate to SETUP /
NETWORK & REMOTE / PC CONNEC and check the interface setting.
If you are connecting via Direct Serial Connection or modem, review the Properties you have set on that connection. Double-check to ensure that you have set
Windows parameters as described in Appendix: Setting Up Serial Communications on page 2- 43.
•
If your Direct Connect does not work:
A) Check to make sure that the cables are connected properly.
B) Check that you are using a null modem cable.
C) Ensure that the null modem cable is connected to the 8382’s serial connector.
•
If your Modem Connect does not work:
A) Ensure that the modem cables and phone lines are connected properly.
B) Check that you have entered the correct phone number for connection.
C) Check that you have entered the passcode correctly on the 8382 and the passcode has been entered correctly on your PC.
D) Ensure that you enabled the correct PC modem port settings.
E) Ensure that the external modem attached to your 8382 is set to AUTO ANSWER.
F) Make sure that the only “Allowed Network Protocol” is TCP/IP. “NetBUI” and
“IPX / SPX Compatible” must not be checked.
•
If you cannot connect to your computer through a crossover Ethernet cable:
You must set your Windows networking to provide a static IP address for your
computer because your Optimod does not contain a DHCP server.
You Cannot Access the Internet After
Making a Direct or Modem Connection to the 8382:
If you are connected to the 8382 via modem or direct connect, you cannot access
any other TCP/IP connection. The PPP connection becomes the default protocol
and the default gateway defaults to the 8382 unit’s IP address. This means that
all existing network connections point to the 8382 unit. To correct this:
A) In Start / Settings / Network and Dialup Connections, open the direct or modem connection you are using to connect to 8382.
B) Select “Properties.”
C) Click the tab that reads “Networking.”
5-7
5-8
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 8382
D) Highlight “Internet protocol (TCP/IP).”
E) Select “Properties.”
F) Select “Advanced.”
G) Uncheck the “Use default gateway on remote network” box.
H) Select “OK.”
If this “Use default gateway on remote network” box is not selected, the
gateway will not point to the 8382 unit when you establish a direct or
modem connection.
OS-Specific Troubleshooting Advice
Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Direct Connect:
If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly:
A) Click “Start / Programs / Accessories / Communications / Network and Dialup
Connections” to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 8382 - Direct”
and choose “Properties.”
C) The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 8382 - Direct
D) Click the “Networking” tab.
E) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet.”
F) Select the “Settings” button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked.
Then click “OK.”
G) In “Components checked are used by this connection,” uncheck all except for
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).”
H) Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button. The
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
I) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically”
J) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
K) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
L) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “DNS” Tab.
M) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “WINS” Tab.
N) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
O) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window.
P) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
Q) Click “Cancel” to dismiss the “Connect [nnnn]” dialog box
R) Restart your computer. (This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood
that you will encounter problems connecting to the 8382.)
S) If you see: “Error 777: The connection failed because the modem (or other
connecting device) on the remote computer is out of order”:
The “remote computer” is actually the 8382 and it is not out of order;
you just need to set the Maximum Speed (Bits per second) to 115200. If
you already set this speed when you configured your PC ports, you
shouldn’t have this problem.
The 8382 communicates at 115200 bps. COM ports on some older PCs are
incapable of communications at this rate and may not work reliably.
Most newer PCs use 16550-compatible UARTS, which support the 115200
bps rate.
If you do see this warning message, you can reset the Maximum BPS
Speed by accessing PROPERTIES for the connection:
a) Click START / PROGRAMS / ACCESSORIES / COMMUNICATIONS / NETWORK AND DIALUP CONNECTIONS.
b) Right click the name of your connection and access “Properties.”
c) Go to the “Generals” tab and select the “Configure” button.
d) Set the MAXIMUM SPEED (BPS) to 115200.
e) Select OK and try your connection again.
T) If you see: “Error 619: The specified port is not connected.”
Make sure the INTERFACE TYPE on the 8382 is correct:
a) On the 8382, go to SETUP / NETWORK & REMOTE / PC CONNEC.
b) Set PC CONNECT to DIRECT.
c) Try your connection again.
Troubleshooting Windows 2000 Modem Connect:
If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly:
A) Click “Start / Programs / Accessories / Communications / Network and Dialup
Connections” to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 8382 - Modem”
and choose “Properties.”
C) The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 8382 – Modem.”
5-9
5-10
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 8382
D) Click the “Properties” button.
E) Select the “General” tab and make sure that “Connect Using” displays the
correct modem and port.
F) Click the “Configure…” button.
G) Set the “Maximum Speed (bps) to 115200.
H) Check the “Enable hardware flow control,” make sure all other hardware features are unchecked. Then click “OK.”
I) Click the “Networking” tab on the “Properties” window.
J) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet.”
K) Select the “Settings” button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked.
Then click “OK.”
L) In “Components checked are used by this connection,” uncheck all except for
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).”
M) Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button. The
“Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
N) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically”
O) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
P) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
Q) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
R) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window.
S) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
T) Click “Cancel” to dismiss the “Connect [nnnn]” dialog box
U) Restart your computer.
Although not strictly necessary, this resets the serial port and reduces the
likelihood that you will encounter problems connecting to the 8382.
Troubleshooting Windows XP Direct Connect:
If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s
properties to make sure they are set up correctly:
A) Click “Start / Programs / Accessories / Communications / Network Connections”
to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 8382 - Direct”
and choose “Properties.”
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
C) The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 8382 - Direct.”
D) Click the “Networking” tab.
E) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet”
F) Select the “Settings” button and make sure all PPP settings are unchecked,
then click “OK.”
G) In “This connection uses the following items,” uncheck all except for “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP).” You can also leave “QoS Packet Scheduler” checked if you
like.
H) In “This connection uses the following items,” select “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button. The “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
I) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically”
J) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
K) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
L) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
M) On the “Properties” window for “Optimod 8382 – Modem” click the “Advanced” tab.
N) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
O) Click “Cancel” to dismiss the “Connect [nnnn]” dialog box
P) Restart your computer.
This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood that you will encounter problems connecting to the 8382.
Troubleshooting Windows XP Modem Connect:
If you are having trouble establishing a connection, check your New Connection’s properties to make sure they are set up correctly.
A) Click “Start / Programs / Accessories / Communications / Network Connections”
to bring up the Network Connections screen.
B) In the “Network Connections” window, right-click “Optimod 8382 - Modem”
and choose “Properties.”
The “Properties” window opens for “Optimod 8382 - Modem.”
C) Click the “Networking” tab.
D) Set “Type of dial-up server I am calling” to “PPP: Windows 95 / 98 / NT4 / 2000,
Internet”
5-11
5-12
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 8382
E) Select the “Settings” button. Make sure all PPP settings are unchecked, and
then click “OK.”
F) In “This connection uses the following items,” uncheck all except for “Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP).” You can also leave “QoS Packet Scheduler” checked if you
like.
G) In “This connection uses the following items,” select “Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)” and then click the “Properties” button.
The “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties” window opens.
H) Choose “Obtain an IP address automatically” and “Obtain DNS server address
automatically.”
I) Click the “Advanced…” button on the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” Window.
J) In the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings,” select the “General” Tab; make sure that
no check boxes are checked.
K) Click “OK” to dismiss the “Advanced TCP/IP Settings” window.
L) Click “OK” to dismiss the window whose name is your new connection.
M) Restart your computer. (This resets the serial port and reduces the likelihood
that you will encounter problems connecting to the 8382.)
Troubleshooting IC Opamps
IC opamps are operated such that the characteristics of their associated circuits are
essentially independent of IC characteristics and dependent only on external feedback components. The feedback forces the voltage at the (–) input terminal to be
extremely close to the voltage at the (+) input terminal. Therefore, if you measure
more than a few millivolts difference between these two terminals, the IC is probably bad.
Exceptions are opamps used without feedback (as comparators) and opamps with
outputs that have been saturated due to excessive input voltage because of a defect
in an earlier stage. However, if an opamp's (+) input is more positive than its (–) input, yet the output of the IC is sitting at –14 volts, the IC is almost certainly bad.
The same holds true if the above polarities are reversed. Because the characteristics
of the 8382's circuitry are essentially independent of IC opamp characteristics, an
opamp can usually be replaced without recalibration.
A defective opamp may appear to work, yet have extreme temperature sensitivity. If
parameters appear to drift excessively, freeze-spray may aid in diagnosing the problem. Freeze-spray is also invaluable in tracking down intermittent problems. But use
it sparingly, because it can cause resistive short circuits due to moisture condensation
on cold surfaces.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TROUBLESHOOTING
Technical Support
If you require technical support, contact Orban customer service. Be prepared to describe the problem accurately. Know the serial number of your 8382 ⎯ this is printed
on the rear panel of the unit.
Telephone:
(1) 510 / 351-3500
Write:
Customer Service
Orban
1525 Alvarado Street
San Leandro, CA 94577 USA
Fax:
(1) 510 / 351-0500
E-Mail
[email protected]
Please check Orban’s website, www.orban.com, for Frequently Asked Questions and
other technical tips about 8382 that we may post from time to time. Manuals (in
.pdf form) and 8382 software upgrades will be posted there too—click “Downloads”
from the home page.
Factory Service
Before you return a product to the factory for service, we recommend that you refer
to this manual. Make sure you have correctly followed installation steps and operation procedures. If you are still unable to solve a problem, contact our Customer Service for consultation. Often, a problem is relatively simple and can be quickly fixed
after telephone consultation.
If you must return a product for factory service, please notify Customer Service by
telephone, before you ship the product; this helps us to be prepared to service your
unit upon arrival. Also, when you return a product to the factory for service, we recommend you include a letter describing the problem.
Please refer to the terms of your Limited One-Year Standard Warranty, which extends to the first end user. After expiration of the warranty, a reasonable charge will
be made for parts, labor, and packing if you choose to use the factory service facility.
Returned units will be returned C.O.D. if the unit is not under warranty. Orban will
pay return shipping if the unit is still under warranty. In all cases, the customer pays
transportation charges to the factory (which are usually quite nominal).
Shipping Instructions
Use the original packing material if it is available. If it is not, use a sturdy, doublewalled carton no smaller than 7″ (H) x 15.5″ (D) x 22″ (W) ⎯ 18 cm (H) x 40 cm (D) x
56 cm (W), with a minimum bursting test rating of 200 pounds (91 kg). Place the
chassis in a plastic bag (or wrap it in plastic) to protect the finish, then pack it in the
carton with at least 1.5 inches (4 cm) of cushioning on all sides of the unit. “Bubble”
5-13
5-14
TROUBLESHOOTING
ORBAN MODEL 8382
packing sheets, thick fiber blankets, and the like are acceptable cushioning materials; foam “popcorn” and crumpled newspaper are not. Wrap cushioning materials
tightly around the unit and tape them in place to prevent the unit from shifting out
of its packing.
Close the carton without sealing it and shake it vigorously. If you can hear or feel
the unit move, use more packing. Seal the carton with 3-inch (8 cm) reinforced fiberglass or polyester sealing tape, top and bottom in an “H” pattern. Narrower or
parcel-post type tapes will not withstand the stresses applied to commercial shipments.
Mark the package with the name of the shipper, and with these words in red:
DELICATE INSTRUMENT, FRAGILE!
Insure the package properly. Ship prepaid, not collect. Do not ship parcel post. Your
Return Authorization Number must be shown on the label, or the package will
not be accepted.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Section 6
Technical Data
Specifications
It is impossible to characterize the listening quality of even the simplest limiter or
compressor based on specifications, because such specifications cannot adequately
describe the crucial dynamic processes that occur under program conditions. Therefore, the only way to evaluate the sound of an audio processor meaningfully is by
subjective listening tests.
Certain specifications are presented here to assure the engineer that they are reasonable, to help plan the installation, and make certain comparisons with other
processing equipment.
Performance
Specifications apply for measurements from analog left/right input to analog left/right output.
Frequency Response (Bypass Mode): Follows standard 50µs or 75µs pre-emphasis curve
±0.10 dB, 2.0 Hz–15 kHz. Analog left/right output and digital output can be userconfigured for flat or pre-emphasized output.
Noise: Output noise floor will depend upon how much gain the processor is set for (Limit
Drive, AGC Drive, Two-Band Drive, and/or Multiband Drive), gating level, equalization,
noise reduction, etc. The dynamic range of the A/D Converter, which has a specified
overload-to–noise ratio of 110 dB, primarily governs it. The dynamic range of the digital
signal processing is 144 dB.
Total System Distortion (de-emphasized, 100% modulation): <0.01% THD, 20 Hz–1 kHz,
rising to <0.05% at 15 kHz. <0.02% SMPTE IM Distortion.
Total System L/R Channel Separation: >80 dB, 20 Hz – 15 kHz; 90 dB typical (analog
I/O) Digital I/O separation is essentially infinite.
Polarity (Two-Band and Bypass Modes): Absolute polarity maintained. Positive-going signal
on input will result in positive-going signal on output.
Processing Sample Rate: The 8382 is a “multirate” system, using internal rates from 32
kHz to 256 kHz as appropriate for the processing being performed. Audio clippers operate at 256 kHz.
Processing Resolution: Internal processing has 24 bit (fixed point) or higher resolution;
uses Motorola DSP56362 DSP chips.
Delay: The minimum available input/output delay is approximately 20 ms, as determined by
the advanced “look-ahead” processing algorithms employed. This can be padded to exactly one frame of 24, 25, 29.97, or 30 frames / second video.
6-1
6-2
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Operating mode: Stereo or dual-mono. In dual-mono mode, both processing channels
have the same subjective adjustments (as determined by the active preset) but are otherwise independent, making this mode appropriate for dual-language transmissions.
Installation
Analog Audio Input
Configuration: Stereo / Dual-Mono.
Impedance: >10kΩ load impedance, electronically balanced1.
Nominal Input Level: Software adjustable from –4.0 to +13.0 dBu (VU).
Maximum Input Level: +27 dBu.
Connectors: Two XLR-type, female, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, Pins 2 (+) and
3 electronically balanced, floating and symmetrical.
A/D Conversion: 24 bit 128x oversampled delta sigma converter with linear-phase antialiasing filter. Converter outputs 64 kHz sample rate, which the 8382 then decimates to
32 kHz in DSP using an ultra-high-quality image-free synchronous sample rate converter.
Filtering: RFI filtered, with high-pass filter at 0.15 Hz (–3 dB).
Analog Audio Output
Configuration: Stereo. Flat or pre-emphasized (at 50µs or 75µs), software-selectable.
Source Impedance: 50Ω, electronically balanced and floating.
Load Impedance: 600Ω or greater, balanced or unbalanced. Termination not required or
recommended.
Output Level (100% peak modulation): Adjustable from –6 dBu to +24 dBu peak, into 600Ω
or greater load, software-adjustable.
Signal-to-Noise: >= 90 dB unweighted (Bypass mode, de-emphasized, 20 Hz–15 kHz
bandwidth, referenced to 100% modulation).
L/R Crosstalk: <= –70 dB, 20 Hz–15 kHz.
Distortion: <= 0.01% THD (Bypass mode, de-emphasized) 20 Hz–15 kHz bandwidth.
Connectors: Two XLR-type, male, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, Pins 2 (+) and 3
electronically balanced, floating and symmetrical.
D/A Conversion: 24 bit 128x oversampled.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Digital Audio Input
Configuration: Stereo or Two-Channel (dual-mono) per AES3 standard, 24 bit resolution,
software selection of stereo or dual-mono. Unit can detect Stereo or Two-Channel status
bits and switch modes appropriately.
Sampling Rate: 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2, or 96 kHz, automatically selected.
Connector: XLR-type, female, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, pins 2 and 3 transformer balanced and floating, 110Ω impedance.
1
No jumper selection available for 600Ω. Through-hole pads are available on I/O circuit board
for user-installed 600Ω termination.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Input Reference Level: Variable within the range of –30 dBFS to –10 dBFS.
J.17 De-emphasis: Software-selectable.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Digital Audio Output
Configuration: Stereo or Two-Channel per AES3 standard. Output configured in software
as flat or pre-emphasized to the chosen processing pre-emphasis (50µs or 75µs), with
or without J.17 pre-emphasis.
Sample Rate: Internal free running at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.1 or 96 kHz, selected in software.
Can also be synced to the AES3 digital input at 32, 44.1, 48, 88.1 or 96 kHz, as configured in software.
Word Length: Software selected for 24, 20, 18, 16 or 14-bit resolution. First-order highpass
noise-shaped dither can be optionally added, Dither level automatically adjusted appropriately for the word length.
Connector: XLR-type, male, EMI-suppressed. Pin 1 chassis ground, pins 2 and 3 transformer balanced and floating, 110Ω impedance.
Output Level (100% peak modulation): –20.0 to 0.0 dBFS software controlled.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Remote Computer Interface
Configuration: TCP/IP protocol via direct cable connect, modem, or Ethernet interface.
Suitable null modem cable for direct connect is supplied. Modem is not supplied.
Serial Port: 115 kbps RS–232 port dB–9 male, EMI-suppressed.
Ethernet Port: 100 Mbit / sec on RJ45 female connector.
Remote Control (GPI) Interface
Configuration: Eight (8) inputs, opto-isolated and floating.
Voltage: 6–15V AC or DC, momentary or continuous. 9VDC provided to facilitate use with
contact closure.
Connector: dB–25 male, EMI-suppressed.
Control: User-programmable for any eight of user presets, factory presets, bypass, test
tone, stereo or mono modes, analog input, digital input.
Filtering: RFI filtered.
Power
Voltage: 100–132 VAC or 200–264 VAC, switch-selected on the rear panel, 50–60 Hz, 40
VA.
Connector: IEC, EMI-suppressed. Detachable 3-wire power cord supplied.
Grounding: Circuit ground is independent of chassis ground, and can be isolated or connected with a rear panel switch.
Safety Standards: ETL listed to UL standards, CE marked.
Environmental
Operating Temperature: 32° to 122° F / 0° to 50° C for all operating voltage ranges.
Humidity: 0–95% RH, non-condensing.
Dimensions (W x H x D): 19” x 3.5” x 14.25” / 48.3 cm x 8.9 cm x 36.2 cm. Two rack units
high.
6-3
6-4
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Humidity: 0–95% RH, non-condensing.
RFI / EMI: Tested according to Cenelec procedures. FCC Part 15 Class A device.
Shipping Weight: 19 lbs / 8.7 kg
Warranty
Two Years, Parts and Service: Subject to the limitations set forth in Orban's Standard
Warranty Agreement.
Because engineering improvements are ongoing, specifications are subject to change without notice.
Circuit Description
This section provides a detailed description of user-serviceable circuits used in the
8382. We do not provide detailed descriptions of the digital circuitry because most
of this is built with surface-mount components that cannot be removed or replaced
with typical tools available in the field. Field repair ordinarily consists of swapping
entire PC boards.
The section starts with an overview of the 8382 system, identifying circuit sections
and describing their purpose. Then each user-repairable section is treated in detail
by first giving an overview of the circuits followed by a component-by-component
description.
The drawing on page 6-25 shows circuit board locations.
Overview
The Control Circuits control the DSP, display, and input/output sections of the 8382
system.
The Input Circuits include the connectors and RF filtering for the analog and digital
audio inputs, the digital sync input, and the circuitry to interface these inputs to the
digital processing.
The Output Circuits include the connectors and RF filtering for the analog and digital audio outputs, and the circuitry to interface the digital processing to these outputs.
The DSP Circuits implement the bypass, test tone, and audio processing using digital
signal processing.
The Power Supply provides power for all 8382 circuit sections.
A block diagram of the DSP signal processing appears on page 6-56.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Control Circuits
The control circuit is based on an AMD Elan SC520 microprocessor, which is a 586class processor running an Orban executable program over a third-party real-time
operating system. A flash memory emulates a hard drive. The memory is non-volatile
and does not rely on a battery to retain information when mains power is off.
The flash memory holds the operating system, the Orban executable program, and
all preset files, both factory and user. It also contains a write-protected “boot segment” that functions as a boot ROM.
The control circuits process and execute user-initiated requests to the system. The
source of these requests is the front panel buttons and rotary encoder, the rear
panel RS-232 port, Ethernet port, and the remote contact closures. These changes
affect hardware function and/or DSP processing. The control circuits also send information to the LCD display.
The control circuit communicates with the DSP and display circuitry through the
SC520’s ISA bus.
The SC520 periodically refreshes a watchdog timer. If the timer times out without
being refreshed, it assumes that the control program has crashed and automatically
reboots the SC520. The DSP chips will continue to process audio until the time comes
to reload DSP program code into them. At this point, the audio will mute for about
a second until the DSP code download has finished. If you hear a short audio mute
on air, this may be because the 8382 has rebooted for some reason. (Of course, it
could also be caused by the 8382’s audio feed’s being interrupted.) Be prepared to
convey this fact to Orban customer service if you call for technical assistance.
The control board is divided into two assemblies: a “base board,” which has interface circuitry, and a “CPU controller module,” which plugs into the base board and
which contains the CPU, the Ethernet interface chip, the flash memory, the DRAM,
and the real-time clock, which keeps time for the 8382’s automation functions. The
real-time clock is backed up by a DL2032 battery so that it keeps accurate time even
when the 8382 is powered down. The battery is socketed and can be readily accessed by removing the 8382’s top cover; the battery is located on the foil (top) side
of the CPU controller module.
User Control Interface and LCD Display Circuits
The user control interface enables the user to control the 8382’s functionality. A rear
panel GPI connector allows optically isolated remote control of certain functions,
such as recalling presets, via contact closure. An RS-232 serial port and an Ethernet
port allow you to connect a modem or computer to the 8382. Front panel pushbutton switches select between various operational modes and functions. A rotary encoder allows the user to adjust parameters and enter data.
6-5
6-6
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
1. Remote Interface and RS-232 Interfaces
Located on base board
A remote interface connector and circuitry implements remote control of certain
operating modes; Model 8382 OPTIMOD-TV has eight remote contact closure inputs.
A valid remote signal is a momentary pulse of current flowing through remote
signal pins. Current must flow consistently for 50msec for the signal to be interpreted as valid. Generally, the 8382 will respond to the most recent control operation, regardless of whether it came from the front panel, remote interface, or
RS-232.
Component-Level Description:
After being current limited by resistors, the GPI control signals are applied to
two quad optoisolators, U10, 12, and then to the control circuitry.
Octal driver U1 buffers the RS-232 port, which is located on a small daughter
board.
U10, 12 and U1 are socketed for easy field replacement in the event of overload, lightning damage, etc. All other circuitry is surface-mount and is not
field-repairable.
2. Switch Matrix and LED Indicators
Located on display board
Eleven front panel pushbutton switches are arranged in a matrix, configured as
three columns and four rows. These switches are the primary element of the
physical user interface to the 8382 control software. The host microprocessor
controls the system setup and function of the DSP according to the switch / rotary encoder entered commands, the AES status bits from the digital input signal,
the RS-232, and the remote control interface status. The microprocessor updates
the LED control status indicators accordingly.
Component-Level Description:
S1-S11 are the front panel pushbutton switches. CR11-CR15 are the front panel
LED control status indicators. The control microprocessor communicates with
these components through the ISA bus, which is buffered via IC3.
3. LED Meter Circuits
Located on display board
The meter LEDs are arranged in an 8x16 matrix, in rows and columns.
Each row of LEDs in the matrix has a 1/8 duty cycle ON time. The rows are multiplexed at a fast rate so that the meters appear continuously illuminated. Via the
ISA bus, the DSP sends meter data values to the control microprocessor, which
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
sends the appropriate LED control words (eight bits at a time) to the data latches
that drive the LEDs directly.
Component-Level Description:
The meter LED matrix consists of ten 10-segment LED bar graph assemblies
(CR1-CR9, CR16) and one discrete LED (CR10). Row selector latches IC4, IC5,
IC6, and IC9 are controlled by the host microprocessor and alternately sink current through the LEDs selected by column selector latches IC1 and IC2, which
are also controlled by the SC520. IC1 and IC2 drive the selected row of LEDs
through current limiting resistor packs RP1 and RP2.
Input Circuits
This circuitry interfaces the analog and digital inputs to the DSP. The analog input
stages scale and buffer the input audio level to match it to the analog-to-digital
(A/D) converter. The A/D converts the analog input audio to digital audio. The digital input receiver accepts AES3-format digital audio signals from the digital input
connector and sample rate-converts them as necessary. The digital audio from the
A/D and SRC is transmitted to the DSP.
1. Analog Input Stages
Located on input/output board
The RF-filtered left and right analog input signals are each applied to a floating,
balanced amplifier that has an adjustable (digitally controlled) gain. Analog
switches set the gain. The outputs of a latch set the state of the switches. By writing data to the latch, the control circuits set the gain to correspond to what the
user specifies via the front panel controls. The gain amplifier’s output feeds a circuit that scales, balances, and DC-biases the signal. This circuit feeds an RC lowpass filter that applies the balanced signal to the analog-to-digital (A/D) converter.
Note that the small RFI “tee” filter assemblies connected to the input and output
connectors are socketed and user-replaceable.
Component-Level Description:
The left channel balanced audio input signal is applied to the filter / load network made up of L100-103 and associated resistors and capacitors. (There are
solder pads available in the PC board to accept an optional 600Ω termination
load [R106] on the input signal if the user wishes to install one.) A conventional three-opamp instrumentation amplifier (IC100 and associated circuitry)
receives the input signal. R110-114 and quad analog switch IC101 make up the
circuit that sets the gain of IC100. The switches in IC101 set the gain of the instrumentation amplifier by switching resistors in parallel with R104. (Smaller
total resistances produce larger gains.)
IC100 feeds IC104 and associated components. This stage balances, DC-biases,
and scales the signal to the proper level for the analog-to-digital (A/D) con-
6-7
6-8
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
verter IC107. IC105A and associated components comprise a servo amp to correctly DC-bias the signal feeding the A/D converter. R137-139, C109, C110
make an attenuator / RC filter necessary to filter high frequency energy that
would otherwise cause aliasing distortion in the A/D converter.
The corresponding right channel circuitry is functionally identical to that just
described.
IC100, 101, 102, 103 are socketed for easy field replacement. All other circuitry
is surface-mounted and is not field-replaceable.
2. Stereo Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Converter
Located on input/output board
The A/D converter, IC107, is a stereo 24-bit sigma-delta converter. (This is a surface-mount part and is not field-replaceable,)
The A/D oversamples the audio, applies noise shaping, and filters and decimates
to 64 kHz sample rate. (An Orban-designed synchronous sample rate converter in
the 8382’s DSP performs the final decimation to 32 kHz. This ensures the flattest
frequency response to 15 kHz without aliasing.)
3. Digital Input Receiver and Sample Rate Converter (SRC)
Located on input/output board
The integrated receiver and input sample rate converter, IC500, accepts digital
audio signals using the AES3 interface format (AES3-1992). The built-in sample
rate converter (SRC) accepts and sample-rate converts any of the “standard” 32
kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz rates in addition to any digital audio
sample rate within the range of 32 kHz and 96 kHz. The SRC converts the input
sample rate to 64 kHz. The final, high-quality decimation to the 8382 system
sample rate is done in the system DSP, as was done for the analog input.
This chip is surface-mounted and not field-replaceable.
Output Circuits
This circuitry interfaces the DSP to the analog and digital audio outputs. The digital
audio from the DSP is transmitted to the digital-to-analog converter (D/A) and output sample rate converter (SRC). The digital-to-analog (D/A) converter converts the
digital audio words generated by the DSP to analog audio. The analog output
stages scale and buffer the D/A output signal to drive the analog output XLR connectors with a low impedance balanced output. The digital output transmitter accepts the digital audio words from the output sample rate converter (SRC) and
transmits them in AES3-format digital audio signals on the digital output connector.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
1. Stereo Digital-to-Analog (D/A) Converter
Located on input/output board
The D/A, IC211, is a stereo, 24-bit delta-sigma converter. It receives the serial left
and right audio data samples from the DSP at 64 kHz sample rate, and converts
them into audio signals requiring further, relatively undemanding analog filtering. IC211 is surface-mounted and is not field-replaceable.
2. Analog Output Stages
Located on input/output board
The left and right analog signals emerging from IC211 are each filtered, amplified, and applied to a floating-balanced integrated line driver, which has a 50Ω
output impedance. The line driver outputs are applied to the RF-filtered left and
right analog output connectors. These analog signals can represent either the
transmitter or monitor output of audio processing.
Component-Level Description:
IC201 and associated components filter the left channel signal emerging from
IC211. The purpose of these stages is to reduce the out-of-band noise energy
resulting from the delta-sigma D/A’s noise-shaping filter and to translate the
differential output of the D/A converter into single-ended form. These components apply a 3rd order low-pass filter to the differential signal from the D/A.
This filter does not induce significant overshoot of the processed audio, which
would otherwise waste modulation.
IC203 is used to set the analog output level. It is a digitally controlled gain
block that sets its gain according to signals on its three digital input lines.
IC204B and associated components form a low-frequency servo amplifier to
remove residual DC from the signal. The 0.15Hz −3 dB frequency prevents tiltinduced overshoot in the processed audio.
IC204A buffers the output of IC203 and implements de-emphasis if desired.
FET switches Q200 and Q201 implement 75µs and 50µs de-emphasis respectively. This analog de-emphasis rolls off any digital noise produced by earlier
circuitry and also helps implement independent de-emphasis settings between
the analog and digital outputs.
The buffered and optionally de-emphasized output of IC204 is applied to
IC207, a balanced output line driver. This driver emulates a floating transformer; its differential output level is independent of whether one side of its
output is floating or grounded. IC207 and its right channel counterpart IC208
are socketed for easy field replacement. All other circuitry is surface-mounted.
The corresponding right channel circuitry is functionally identical to that just
described.
6-9
6-10
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
3. Digital Sample Rate Converter (SRC) and Output Transmitter
Located on input/output board
An integrated output sample rate converter (SRC) and AES3 line driver chip,
IC502, converts the 32 kHz 8382 system sample rate to any of the standard 32
kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz rates, and also contains a digital audio interface transmitter to encode digital audio signals using the AES3 interface
format (AES3-1992). This chip is surface-mounted and is not field-replaceable.
DSP Circuit
The DSP circuit consists of eight Motorola DSP56362 24-bit fixed-point DSP chips that
execute DSP software code to implement digital signal processing algorithms.
The algorithms filter, compress, and limit the audio signal. The eight DSP chips, each
operating at approximately 100 million instructions per second (MIPS), for a total of
800MIPS, provide the necessary signal processing. A sampling rate of 32 kHz and
power-of-two multiples thereof, up to 256 kHz, is used.
System initialization normally occurs when power is first applied to the 8382 and can
occur abnormally if the 8382’s watchdog timer forces the SC520 to reboot. Upon initialization, the SC520 CPU downloads the DSP executable code stored in the flash
memory. This typically takes about 7 seconds. Once a DSP chip begins executing its
program, execution is continuous. The SC520 provides the DSP program with parameter data (representing information like the settings of various processing controls), and extracts the front panel metering data from the DSP chips.
During system initialization, the SC520 queries the DSP hardware about its operational status and will display an error message on-screen if the DSP fails to initialize
normally. Please note any such messages and be ready to report them to Orban Customer Service.
The DSP chips are located on the DSP board—see the drawings starting on page 646. U701 and U702 are local voltage regulators on the DSP board that derive the
+3.3V supply for the DSP chips from the system digital 5V bus.
Power Supply
Warning! Hazardous voltages are present in the power supply when it is connected
to the AC line.
The power supply converts an AC line voltage input to various power sources used
by the 8382. To ensure lowest possible noise, four linear regulators provide ±15VDC
and ±5VDC for the analog circuits. A switching regulator provides high current
+5VDC for the digital circuits. An unregulated voltage powers the fan and feeds local regulators.
The power supply circuits are straightforward and no explanation is required beyond the schematic itself. Be aware that C1, C4, C5, and C12 in the switching regula-
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
tor are premium-quality low-ESR capacitors and must be replaced with equivalent
types to ensure proper operation of the switching supply.
The output of the power supply is monitored by the power-indicator LED circuit,
which causes the power LED to flash according to a preset code to diagnose problems with the various power supplies in the 8382. See step (2.B) on page 4-8.
Abbreviations
Some of the abbreviations used in this manual may not be familiar to all readers:
A/D (or A to D)
AES
AGC
A-I
A-O
BAL
BBC
BNC
CALIB
CIT
CMOS
COFDM
COM
D/A (or D to A)
dBm
dBu
DI
DJ
DO
DOS
DSP
EBU
EBS
EMI
ESC
FCC
FDNR
FET
FFT
FIFO
G/R
HD Radio
HF
HP
analog-to-digital converter
Audio Engineering Society
automatic gain control
analog input
analog output
balanced (refers to an audio connection with two active conductors and one shield surrounding them).
British Broadcasting Corporation
a type of RF connector
calibrate
composite isolation transformer
complementary metal-oxide semiconductor
Coded Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplex—a robust type of digital modulation using
many narrow-bandwidth, low data rate, mutually non-interfering carriers to achieve an aggregate high data rate with excellent multipath rejection.
serial data communications port
digital-to-analog converter
decibel power measurement. 0 dBm = 1mW applied to a specified load. In audio, the load
is usually 600Ω. In this case only, 0 dBm = 0.775V rms.
decibel voltage measurement. 0 dBu = 0.775V RMS. For this application, the dBm-into600Ω scale on voltmeters can be read as if it were calibrated in dBu.
digital input
disk jockey, an announcer who plays records in a club or on the air
digital output
Microsoft disk operating system for IBM-compatible PC
digital signal processor (or processing). May also refer to a special type of microprocessor
optimized for efficiently executing arithmetic.
European Broadcasting Union
Emergency Broadcasting System (U.S.A.)
electromagnetic interference
escape
Federal Communications Commission (USA regulatory agency)
frequency-dependent negative resistor⎯an element used in RC-active filters
field effect transistor
fast Fourier transform
first-in, first-out
gain reduction
See IBOC
high-frequency
high-pass
6-11
6-12
TECHNICAL DATA
IBOC
IC
IM
I/O
ITU
JFET
LC
LCD
LED
LF
LP
LVL
MHF
MLF
MOD
N&D
N/C
OSHOOT
PC
PCM
PPM
RAM
RC
RDS / RBDS
REF
RF
RFI
RMS
ROM
SC
SCA
S / PDIF
TRS
THD
TX
µs
VCA
VU
XLR
XTAL
ORBAN MODEL 8382
“In-Band On-Channel”—a form of digital radio commercialized by iBiquity Corporation
where the digital carriers use a form of COFDM modulation and share the frequency allocation of the analog carriers. Also known by its trademarked name of “HD Radio.”
integrated circuit
intermodulation (or “intermodulation distortion”)
input/output
International Telecommunications Union (formerly CCIR). ITU-R is the arm of the ITU dedicated to radio.
junction field effect transistor
inductor / capacitor
liquid crystal display
light-emitting diode
low-frequency
low-pass
level
midrange / high-frequency
midrange / low-frequency
modulation
noise and distortion
no connection
overshoot
IBM-compatible personal computer
pulse code modulation
peak program meter
random-access memory
resistor / capacitor
Radio (Broadcasting) Data Service—a narrowband digital subcarrier centered at 57 kHz in
the TV baseband that usually provides program or network-related data to the consumer in
the form of text that is displayed on the radio. Occupied bandwidth is ±2500 Hz.
reference
radio frequency
radio-frequency interference
root-mean-square
read-only memory
subcarrier
subsidiary communications authorization ⎯ a non program-related subcarrier in the TV
baseband above 23 kHz (monophonic) or 57 kHz (stereophonic)
Sony / Philips digital interface
tip-ring-sleeve (2-circuit phone jack)
total harmonic distortion
transmitter
Microseconds. For TV pre-emphasis, the +3 dB frequency is 1 / (2 π τ), where τ is the preemphasis time constant, measured in seconds.
voltage-controlled amplifier
volume unit (meter)
a common style of 3-conductor audio connector
crystal
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Parts List
Many parts used in the 8382 are surface-mount devices (“SMT”) and are not intended for field replacement because specialized equipment and skills are necessary
to remove and replace them. The list below includes substantially all of the parts
used in the 8382 (including surface-mount devices), and inclusion of a part in this list
does not imply that the part is field-replaceable.
See the following assembly drawings for locations of components.
Obtaining Spare Parts
Special or subtle characteristics of certain components are exploited to produce an
elegant design at a reasonable cost. It is therefore unwise to make substitutions for
listed parts. Consult the factory if the listing of a part includes the note “selected” or
“realignment required.”
Orban normally maintains an inventory of tested, exact replacement parts that can
be supplied quickly at nominal cost. Standardized spare parts kits are also available.
When ordering parts from the factory, please have available the following information about the parts you want:
Orban part number
Reference designator (e.g., C3, R78, IC14)
Brief description of part
Model, serial, and “M” (if any) number of unit ⎯ see rear-panel label
To facilitate future maintenance, parts for this unit have been chosen from the catalogs of well-known manufacturers whenever possible. Most of these manufacturers
have extensive worldwide distribution and may be contacted through their web
sites.
Base Board
PART #
42008.020
16013.000.01
20040.604.01
20080.301.01
20121.100.01
20121.750.01
20128.002.01
20129.301.01
20130.100.01
DESCRIPTION
SUBASSEMBLY: FLAT CABLE-40P2"
HEATSINK, CLIP-ON, TO 220
RESISTOR, METAL-FILM, 1/8W, 1%,
604 OHM
RESISTOR, METAL-FILM, ½W, 1%,
301 OHM
RESISTOR, RF, 1/8W, 1%, 10 OHM,
1206
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%, 75 OHM
RESISTOR, 2.0 OHM 1% 0805
RESISTOR, 301 OHM, 0805
RESISTOR, 1.00K 1% 0805
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
J7
H1
R28, R30, R33, R35, R37, R39, R44,
R46, R48, R49, R50, R51, R52, R53,
R54, R55
R47
R43, 45
R82, 83, 84
R22, R23, R24, R25
R59, R77
R79
6-13
6-14
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
PART #
20130.162.01
20130.200.01
20130.332.01
20130.562.01
DESCRIPTION
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 1.62K, 0805
RESISTOR, 2.00K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1% 3.32K 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 5.62K, 0805
20131.100.01
RESISTOR, 10K, 0805
20131.140.01
20131.301.01
RESISTOR, 14.0K, 0805
RESISTOR, 30.1K, 0805
20132.100.01
RESISTOR, 100K, 0805
20132.332.01
RESISTOR, 332K, 0805
21139.000.01
CAPACITOR, X7R, 0.1uF, 10%, 0805
21147.022.01
CAPACITOR, 22pF, 0805, 1%
CAPACITOR, 10uF, TANTALUM,
SURFACE-MOUNT
CAPACITOR, 4.7uF, TANTALUM,
6032B
DIODE, MMSZ5231B, SOD-123
DIODE, VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR, 15
VOLT
DIODE, 1N4148WT / R
DIODE, SHOTTKY 1A, 60V, SMD
TRANSISTOR, NPN MMBT3904
TRANSISTOR, POWER, NPN
IC, 74HC374 DLATCH SOL20
IC, HEX INVERTER, SURFACEMOUNT
IC, 74ACT245DW
IC, 74ACT244SC
IC, BAT54C-7
IC, 74HC4051M
IC, MAX7064STC100-10
IC, LP2987IM-5.0
IC, PS2506-4
CONNECTOR, RIGHT ANGLE, PC
MOUNT, 25-PIN
IC, SOCKET, DIP, 16-PIN, DUAL
IC, SOCKET, DIP, 18-PIN, DUAL
CONNECTOR, HEADER, PC104
STACK 40-PIN
CONNECTOR, HEADER, PC104
STACK 64-PIN
CONNECTOR, SOCKET, STRIP, 4PIN
CONNECTOR, SOCKET, STRIP, 14PIN
21319.610.01
21322.547.01
22016.000.01
22083.015.01
22101.001.01
22209.000.01
23214.000.01
23606.201.01
24857.000.01
24900.000.01
24967.000.01
24978.000.01
24979.000.01
24982.000.01
24983.000.01
24984.000.01
25008.000.01
27017.025.01
27147.016.01
27147.018.01
27371.040.01
27371.064.01
27406.004.01
27406.014.01
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
R41, 42
R4, R56, R62
R76
R57
R26, R60, R61, R63, R65, R67, R68,
R69, R70, R71, R73, R74, R75, R80,
R81, R102, R103, R104
R58, 64
R72
R1, R2, R3, R7, R8, R9, R10, R11,
R12, R13, R14, R20, R27, R29, R31,
R32, R34, R36, R38, R40, R66, R85,
R86, R87, R88, R89, R90, R91, R92,
R93
R78
C3, C6, C7, C8, C9, C10, C11, C12,
C13, C18, C21, C24, C30, C32, C33,
C34, C35, C38, C39, C43
C40, C41
C1, C4, C14, C15, C17, C19, C22,
C36, C37, C42
C2, C5, C20, C23
D12
D11
D1, D3, D4, D5, D6, D9, D10
[REF NOT, STuFFED], D7, D8
Q1, Q3, Q4
Q2
U4
U11, U13
U3, 5
U14, 15
D13, D14, D15, D16, D17
U19
U1
U20
U10, 12
J10
SU10, SU12
SU18
HDR2
HDR1, HDR3
J5
J2, J8
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
PART #
27421.004.01
27421.006.01
27421.010.01
27421.016.01
27426.003.01
27451.005.01
27451.024.01
28086.000.01
29521.000.01
44093.100.01
TECHNICAL DATA
DESCRIPTION
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
ROW , 4-PIN, 2 X 2
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
ROW , 6-PIN, 2 X 3
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
ROW , 23", 2 X 5
CONNECTOR, HEADER, STR, 0.23",
2X8
CONNECTOR, HEADER, 3-PIN,
SINGLE ROW
CONNECTOR, STR, DOUBLE ROW,
26-PIN
HEADER, STR, DOUBLE ROW,
PCMOUNT
CRYSTAL, 4.0 MHz, HC49US
INDUCTOR, 3.9uH, JM391K
FIRMWARE, PIC 8382 U18
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
J6
J3
J12
J13
J11
J4
J1
X1
L1, L2, L3
U18
CPU Module
PART #
20128.010.01
20128.022.01
20128.332.01
20129.160.01
20129.330.01
20129.470.01
20130.100.01
DESCRIPTION
RESISTOR, 10 OHM,0805
RESISTOR, 22 OHM 1% 0805
RESISTOR, 33.2 OHM,0805
RESISTOR, 49.9 OHM 1%
0805
RESISTOR, 160 OHM 1% 0805
RESISTOR, 330 OHM 1% 0805
RESISTOR, 470 OHM 1% 0805
RESISTOR, 1.00K 1% 0805
20130.475.01
RESISTOR, 4.75K,0805
20130.931.01
20131.100.01
RESISTOR, 9.31K, 1%, 0805
RESISTOR, 10K,0805
RESISTOR,
1/8W,1%,14.7K,0805
RESISTOR NETWORK 1K
CTS745C 8R BUSSED
RESISTOR NETWORK 4.7K
CTS745C 8R BUSS
RESISTOR NETWORK 8R,
ISO, 5%
CAPACITOR,
X7R,0.1uF,10%,0805
CAPACITOR,
NPO,1000pF,1%,0805
CAPACITOR,
NPO,100pF,1%,0805
20128.499.01
20131.147.01
20233.102.01
20233.472.01
20237.472.01
21139.000.01
21141.000.01
21142.000.01
21146.310.01
21167.047.01
21170.018.01
CAPACITOR, .01uF,0805,10%
CAPACITOR, 4.7pF 50V X7R
0805
CAPACITOR, 18pF 1% 50V
COMPONENT, IDENTIFIER
R31, R34
R5, R6
R10, R11, R14
R19, R20, R21, R22, R23
R24, R25
R12, R16
R13, R15
R17, R35
R3, R4, R7, R8, R26, R27, R28, R29, R30,
R32
R33
R1, R2, R9
R18
RN1
RN2, RN3, RN4
RN5
C8, C9, C20, C21, C177, C179, C182
C10
C2
C11, 126, 127, 133, 134, 150, 152, 154,
156, 158,160, 162, 180
C1
C3, C4, C5, C6, C7
6-15
6-16
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
PART #
DESCRIPTION
COG 0805
21171.105.01
CAPACITOR, 1uF X7R 0805
21322.547.01
21325.610.01
22101.001.01
24331.025.01
24331.033.01
24541.000.01
24542.000.01
24543.000.01
24544.000.01
24653.000.01
24670.000.01
24965.000.01
24972.520.01
27306.000.01
27370.040.01
27370.064.01
28031.000.01
28041.000.01
28089.000.01
28090.000.01
28091.000.01
32200.000.02
32201.000.02
44094.100.01
62200.000.02
CAPACITOR,
4.7uF,TANT,6032B
CAPACITOR, 10uF 10% TANT
6032-B
DIODE,1N4148WT / R
IC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
LT1963-2.5 SOT223
IC VOLTAGE REGULATOR
LT1963-3.3 SOT223
IC SDRAM MT48LC16
TSOP54P
IC FLASH MEMORY E28F128
TSOP56
IC CY2305 0DLYBuF 8P
IC NM93C46 SEEPROM
TSSOP
IC PWRST MIC8114 SOT143
IC 10 / 100BT NIC NATIONAL
IC,74ALVC164245DGG
IC MICROPROCESSOR
ELANSC520 BGA388
CONN RJ45 PCMT W / MAGS
CONN SCKT PC104 40PIN
CONN SCKT PC104 64PIN
HOLDER,BATTERY,LITH CELL
CELL,COIN,BATTERY,LITH,3V
OSC 33MHZ SG636 4P SMD
IC TCXO DS32KHZ 36P BGA
CRYSTAL 25MHZ RXD MP35L
SMD
CONTROL MODULE
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
PCB CONTROL MODULE 8382
FIRMWARE 8382 U6 20LV8D
SCHEMATIC, CONTROL
MODULE 8382
COMPONENT, IDENTIFIER
C14, 17, 125, 132, 151, 153, 155, 157, 159,
161, 175, 176, 178, 181, 183
C12
C13, C15, C16, C18
D1, D2, D3
U14
U15
U2, U3
U4
U11
U12
U5
U10
U7, U8, U9
U1
J1
P2
P1, P3
BT1HLDR
BT1
X1
U13
Y1
RS-232 Board
PART #
21139.000.01
22209.000.01
24968.000.01
27017.009.01
27147.124.01
27489.016.01
29521.000.01
DESCRIPTION
CAPACITOR, X7R, 0.1uF, 10%,
0805
DIODE, SHOTTKY 1A, 60V,
SMD
IC, MAX208ECNG
CONNECTOR, RIGHT ANGLE,
PC MOUNT, 9-PIN
IC, SOCKET, DIP, 24-PIN,
DUAL
CONNECTOR, SOCKET 2X8
STACKER
INDUCTOR, 3.9UH, JM391K
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
C1, C2, C3, C4, C5, C6
D1, D2, (NO STUFF)
U1
J2
SU1
J1
L1
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
Power Supply
PART #
10012.404.01
15025.000.01
15061.005.01
20020.025.01
21129.410.01
21227.710.01
21227.747.01
21230.710.01
21255.000.01
21256.000.01
21263.710.01
21307.522.01
22004.056.01
22015.000.01
22083.022.01
22083.033.01
22083.068.01
DESCRIPTION
SCREW MS SEM P / P 4-40 X ¼
TRANSISTOR, MOUNTING KIT, TO
220
LED MOUNT, 1 POSITION, 0.240"
HIGH
RESISTOR, ¼W, 0 OHM, (JUMPER)
CAPACITOR, AXIAL LEADS, 0.1uF,
50V, 20%
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS 100uF
16V HFS
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS 470uF
16V HFS
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS 100uF
50V HFS
CAPACITOR, SNAP-IN, 6800uF, 16V,
20%
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS,
1000uF, 35V, 20%
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS, 100uF,
25V, 10%
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS, 2.2uF,
35V, 10%
ZENER-DIODE-1W-5%-5.6V-1N
DIODE-SHOTTKY RECTIFIER-SBL
DIODE, VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR, 22
VOLT
DIODE, VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR, 33
VOLT
DIODE, VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR,
6.8 VOLT
22201.400.01
DIODE, RECTIFIER IN4004 PRV400V
22208.040.01
22500.271.01
DIODE, SHOTTKY-31DQ04-3.3
ZENER, TRANSORB, VARISTOR
IC, LINEAR, DC REGULATOR, 15V
NEG
IC, REGULATOR
IC, LINEAR, DC REGULATOR, 5V
POS
IC, LINEAR, DC REGULATOR, 5V
NEG
IC, SIMPLE SWITCH, 0 TO 220
SWITCH, SLIDE, VOLT, 115 / 230
SWITCH, SLIDE, SPDT, VERTICAL
MOUNT
CONNECTOR, VERTICAL HEADER
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
ROW , 23", 2 X 5
24303.901.01
24304.901.01
24307.901.01
24308.901.01
24323.000.01
26143.000.01
26146.000.01
27060.000.01
27421.010.01
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
HW1, HW2, HW3, HW4, HW5
H1, H2, H3, H4
R1
C6, C10, C11, C12, C15, C19, C20,
C21
C1
C4, C5
C22
C13, C14
C17, C18
C2, C3, C8, C9
C7, C16
CR19, CR20
CR21, CR22, CR23
CR2, CR13, CR14
CR9, CR10
CR4, CR17, CR18
CR5, CR6, CR7, CR8, CR11, CR12,
CR15, CR16
CR3
V1, V2
U2
U1
U3
U4
U5
SW1
SW2
J1
J7
6-17
6-18
TECHNICAL DATA
PART #
27426.003.01
27451.003.01
27451.004.01
27451.024.01
27493.000.01
27711.206.01
28004.150.01
28112.003.01
28112.005.01
29262.000.01
29519.000.01
29526.000.01
50286.000.02
ORBAN MODEL 8382
DESCRIPTION
CONNECTOR, HEADER, 3-PIN,
SINGLE ROW
HEADER, STR, DOUBLE ROW,
PCMOUNT
HEADER, STR, DOUBLE ROW,
PCMOUNT
HEADER, STR, DOUBLE ROW,
PCMOUNT
CONNECTOR, VERTICAL, HEADER,
6 POS.
TERM, CRIMP, RING, INSULATED,
6R
FUSE, 3AG, SLOBLO, ½ AMP
KNOB-FUSE-DOM-GRY-FOR 281
BODY-FUSEHOLDER-PC MNT
LINE FILTER, PC MOUNT, 1A
INDUCTOR-TORODIAL- 7.7UH
INDUCTOR, PE92108K
HEATBAR POWER SPLY 8382
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
J6 (OPTIONAL FAN CONNECTOR)
J3
J4
J5
J2
LUG
F1
H7
H6
A1
L2
L1
HS1
Input/Output (I/O) Board
PART #
20041.100.01
20123.301.01
DESCRIPTION
RESISTOR, MF, 1/8W, 1%, 1.00 kohm
RESISTOR, MF, 1/8W, 1%, 10ohm,
1206
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%, 75 ohm
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%, 110 ohm
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%, 1k
RESISTOR-TF-1.8W-1%-SURFACEMOUNT 1
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%, 3.01K
20123.499.01
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%, 4.99K
20124.100.01
20126.100.01
20129.150.01
20129.249.01
20129.768.01
20130.162.01
20130.210.01
20130.348.01
20130.562.01
RESISTOR TF 1/8W 1% 1206 10K
RESISTOR, MF, 1/8W, 1%, 1.00M
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 150ohm, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 249ohm, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 768ohm, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 1.62K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 2.10K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 3.48K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 5.62K, 0805
20130.845.01
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 8.45K, 0805
20131.113.01
20131.143.01
20131.147.01
20131.249.01
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 11.3K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 14.3K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 14.7K, 0805
RESISTOR 1% 24.9K 0805
20121.100.01
20121.750.01
20122.110.01
20123.100.01
20123.150.01
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
R100, 107, 115, 120
R154, 200, 232, 522, 531
R158, R530, R604, R605, R606
R238, 330, 500, 514, 517
R521, R600, R601, R602, R603
R131, 134, 140, 141, 144, 146
R502, R507, R515
R101, 103, 105, 108, 116, 118, 121,
124
R110, 125, 237, 243, 244, 519, 527
R142, 152, 225, 231
R138, 151, 235, 236
R137, 139, 149, 150, 155
R111, R126
R132, 153, 156, 157
R112, 127
R204, 210, 217, 220
R113, 128
R201, 202, 205, 207, 208, 211, 212,
214, 215, 218
R206, 219, 233, 234
R221, 224, 227, 230
R114, R129
R203, 209, 213, 216
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
PART #
DESCRIPTION
20131.499.01
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 49.9K, 0805
20131.825.01
20132.154.01
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 82.5K, 0805
RESISTOR, 1/8W, 1%, 154K, 0805
20151.365.01
RESISTOR, 0.1% 3.65K, 0805
20151.536.01
20511.310.01
21112.210.01
RESISTOR, 0.1%, 5.36K, 0805
TRIMPOTS, 10K, 20%, TOP ADJ
CAPACITOR, CER, .001UF, 1KV, 10%
CAPACITOR, RADIAL LEADS, 1.0UF,
50V, 20%
CAPACITOR .47UF 25V 10% 1206
CAPACITOR, SMD1206, 4700PF, 50V,
5%
21123.510.01
21137.447.01
21138.247.01
21139.000.01
CAPACITOR, X7R, 0.1UF, 10%, 0805
21140.000.01
CAPACITOR, NPO, 470PF, 1%, 0805
21141.000.01
CAPACITOR, NPO, 1000PF, 1%, 0805
21143.000.01
21144.000.01
22101.001.01
22102.001.01
CAPACITOR, NPO, 1500PF, 1%, 0805
CAPACITOR, 5%, 100V, 47PF, 1206
CAPACITOR, NPO, 5%, 100V, 33PF1206
CAPACITOR, 12pf, 1206
CAPACITOR 2200pf 50V NPO 1206
CAPACITOR .047 1206 X7R
CAPACITOR, TANTALUM, 1.0uF, 35V,
B-CASE
CAPACITOR, 10uf, TANTALUM,
SURFACE-MOUNT
DIODE, 1N4148WT/R
DIODE, SIGNAL, 1N5711TR
22106.000.01
DIODE, SMCJ26C, TRANZORB
21145.000.01
21156.020.01
21172.222.01
21174.000.01
21318.510.01
21319.610.01
23415.000.01
24024.000.01
24634.000.01
24652.450.01
24728.302.01
24748.000.01
24857.000.01
24858.000.01
TRANSISTOR, JFET SST113
SURFACE-MOUNT
IC, OPA2134PA
IC, OCTAL 3 STATE NONINVR
IC MCP809/4.5 PRST SOT23
IC, QUAD, SPST SW, DIP/16
IC, LM339M S014
IC 74HC374 DLATCH SOL20
IC, SO/14, SURFACE-MOUNT
TECHNICAL DATA
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
R222, 223, 228, 229, 239, 240, 241,
242, 501, 504, 506, 508, 513, 520,
524, 526, 532
R104, 123
R328
R130, 133, 135, 136, 143, 145, 147,
148
R102, 109, 117, 122
VR200, VR201
C100, 102, 104, 106
C224, C230
C113, 117
C109, 110, 115, 116
C111, 118, 119, 120, 121, 123, 124,
125, 126, 127, 128, 202, 203, 211,
212, 214, 215, 233, 500, 501, 502,
504, 505, 506, 510, 513, 600, 601,
602, 603, 604, 605, 606, 607, 608,
609, 616, 617, 618, 619, 620, 621,
622, 623, 624, 625, 632, 633, 634,
635, 636, 637, 638, 639, 640, 641,
642, 643, 644, 648, 649, 650, 651
C217, 218, 219, 220
C226, C228, C508, C517, C521,
C652, C653
C221, 222, 225, 227
C101, 103, 105, 107, 108, 114
C231
C223, 229
C509, C512, C518
C503, C507, C511
C200, 201, 232, 515, 516
C112, 122, 129, 130, 131, 210, 213,
216, 645, 646, 647
CR101, 102, 106, 107
CR500
CR100, 103, 104, 105, 202, 203,
204, 205
Q200, 201, 202, 203
IC100, 102
IC504
IC509
IC101, IC103
IC210
IC108, 209
IC604
6-19
6-20
TECHNICAL DATA
PART #
24900.000.01
24924.000.01
24938.000.01
24951.000.01
24958.000.01
24960.000.01
24962.000.01
24963.000.01
24992.000.01
24997.000.01
27053.003.01
27054.003.01
27147.008.01
27147.016.01
27147.020.01
27174.044.01
27406.014.01
ORBAN MODEL 8382
DESCRIPTION
IC, HEX INVERTER, SURFACEMOUNT
IC CSS3310KS
IC, SINGLE 2 INPUT, SURFACEMOUNT
IC HC151 8CH MUX SOIC16
IC, DRV134PA-DIP
IC, OPA2134UA
IC CS8420CS REV D
IC, 5383 VS
IC, 74AHCT244 SOIC
IC, DAC AK4393 SSOP28
CONNECTOR, MALE, INSERT, RT
ANGLE
CONNECTOR, FEM, INSERT, RT
ANGLE
IC, SCKT, DIP, 8 PINS, DUAL
IC, SCKT, DIP, 16 PIN, DUAL
IC, SCKT, DIP, 20 PIN, DUAL
IC, SCKT, 44 PIN, LOW PROFIL
CONNECTOR, SOCKET, STRIP, 14
PIN
27408.003.01
CONNECTOR, 3P SCKT STRIP
27426.005.01
HEADER, UNSHRD
HEADER, STR, DOUBLE ROW,
PCMOUNT
CONNECTOR, STR, DBL ROW, 26 PIN
JUMPER, PC MOUNT, TEST POINT
TRANSFORMER, SURFACE-MOUNT,
AES3
BEAD- FERRITE- ON WIRE
FILTER-EMI SUPPRESSION
TORSION-50VINDUCTOR, 3.9UH, JM391K
INDUCTOR, 1200UH, 5%, 1-M-10-22
FIRMWARE TV I/O IC503 8382
27451.004.01
27451.005.01
27630.001.01
29015.000.01
29506.001.01
29508.210.01
29521.000.01
29522.000.01
44100.100.01
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
IC603
IC203
IC508
IC507
IC207, 208
IC104, 105, 106, 201, 202, 204, 206
IC500, 501, 502
IC107
IC601
IC211
J201, 202, 502
J100, 103, 500, 501
IC100, 102, 207, 208
IC101, 103
IC602
IC503
JP600
L100, 102, 104, 106, 200, 201, 202,
203, 500, 501, 504, 505
REF J504 NO STUFF
J601
J600
TP600, 607
T500, 501, 502
L502, L503, L504, L505
L100, 102, 104, 106, 200, 201, 202,
203, 500, 501
L204, 205, 206, 207
L101, 103, 105, 107
IC503
DSP Board
PART #
42007.030
16021.000.01
DESCRIPTION
SUBASSEMBLY, FLAT CBL-26P- 3
HEATSINK, VERTICAL MOUNT,
BLACK ANODIZED
20128.075.01
RESISTOR, 75OHM, 1%, 0805
20131.100.01
RESISTOR, 10K, 0805
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
J601
HS700
R505, R506, R508, R604, R605, R606,
R607, R608, R609, R610, R611, R612,
R705, R806, R807, R808, R809, R810,
R811
R301, R302, R303, R304, R305, R306,
R307, R308, R507, R510, R801, R802,
R803, R804, R805
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
PART #
DESCRIPTION
20132.100.01
RESISTOR, 100K, 0805
20221.101.01
21137.282.01
RESISTOR NETWORK, SIP, 2%,
100K, 10PIN
CAPACITOR, 8200pF, ±15%, 1206,
50V
21137.447.01
CAPACITOR, 0.47uF 25V 10% 1206
21139.000.01
CAPACITOR, X7R, 0.1uF, 10%, 0805
21141.000.01
CAPACITOR, NPO, 1000pF, 1%, 0805
CAPACITOR, 22uF , TANTALUM,
SURFACE-MOUNT
CAPACITOR, 10uF, TANTALUM,
SURFACE-MOUNT
DIODE, VOLTAGE SUPPRESSOR,
6.8 VOLT
IC, REG, 1086, 3.3V
IC 74HC374 DLATCH SOL20
IC, EPM 7064AETC44-10, SURFACEMOUNT
IC 74AHC541 OCTAL BUFFER SOL20
IC-8 BIT-DUAL TRANSCEIVER W / 3
IC 74LVC2244 OCTAL BUFFER,
SOL20
IC, SURFACE-MOUNT, PLL1700,
SSOP / 20
21309.622.01
21319.610.01
22083.068.01
24326.000.01
24857.000.01
24944.000.01
24945.000.01
24946.000.01
24948.000.01
24955.000.01
24991.000.01
IC, DSP 56362PV100
24993.000.01
24994.000.01
IC, EPM7256AETC100-10
IC, 74ACT04, SOIC 14P
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
ROW , 2P, 2 X 1
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
ROW , 4P, 2 X 2
CONNECTOR, HEADER, DOUBLE
ROW , 23", 2 X 5
HEADER, STR, DRLROW, PCMOUNT
CONNECTOR, DOUBLE ROW , PC
MNT, 40-PIN
JUMPER, PC-MOUNT, TEST POINT
OSC, CRYSTAL CLOCK, 27MHz, 3
VOLT
27421.002.01
27421.004.01
27421.010.01
27451.003.01
27451.007.01
27630.001.01
28083.000.01
TECHNICAL DATA
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
R101, R102, R103, R104, R502, R503,
R504, R509, R601, R602, R603
RN501
C101, C103, C105, C107, C109, C111,
C113, C115
C102, C104, C106, C108, C110, C112,
C114, C116
C701, C702, C703, C704, C705, C706,
C707, C708, C709, C710, C711, C712,
C713, C714, C715, C716, C718, C719,
C720, C723, C724, C725, C726, C727,
C728, C729, C732, C733, C734, C739,
C740, C741, C742, C743, C744, C749,
C751, C752, C753, C754, C755, C756,
C757, C758, C759, C760, C761, C762,
C764, C765, C768, C769, C802, C803,
C805, C806, C808, C809
C771, C772, C773, C774
C736
C763, C766, C767, C770, C801, C804,
C807
CR700, CR701
IC701, IC702
IC504
IC503
IC501
IC502
IC601, IC602
IC801, IC802
IC101, IC102, IC103, IC104, IC105,
IC106, IC107, IC108
IC603
IC807
J500
J101
J603
J701
J504
TP702, TP703
U804
6-21
6-22
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Display Board
PART #
42007.080
15062.390.01
20122.110.01
20124.100.01
20125.100.01
20226.000.01
21131.410.01
21313.568.01
24851.000.01
24857.000.01
24900.000.01
24905.000.01
24908.000.01
25106.001.01
25119.003.01
25167.000.01
25168.000.01
27216.012.01
27421.004.01
DESCRIPTION
SUBASSEMBLY, FLAT CABLE26P- 8"
LED SPACER, 390 HIGH
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%, 110
OHM
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%,
SURFACE-MOUNT 10K
RESISTOR, TF, 1/8W, 1%, 100K
RESISTOR, NETWORK, DIL,
2%, 100 OHM
CAPACITOR, SURFACE
MOUNT, 1206, 0.1uF, 50V, 20%
CAPACITOR, TANTALUM,
6.8uF, 25V, 10%
IC, SOL20, SURFACE-MOUNT
IC 74HC374 DLATCH, SOL20
IC, HEX INVERTER, SURFACEMOUNT
IC, CMOS OCTAL D REG. 3 ST
IC, OCTAL, D TYP, FLIP / FLOP
LED, YELLOW, T-1, HIGHEFFICIENCY LAMP
LED, T-3 FLAT TP FLNGL, RED
LED, ARRAY, 10 -POSITION, 1
RED, 1 YEL, 8 GRN
LED, ARRAY, 10 -POSITION, 9
YEL, 1 RED
CBL FLEXSTRIP 4P 12"
CONNECTOR, HEADER,
DOUBLE ROW , 4P, 2 X 2
COMPONENT IDENTIFIER
R17-R24
R29, R30
R25, R26, R27, R28
C2-C10
C1
IC8
IC3
IC7
IC4, IC5, IC6, IC9
IC1, IC2
CR11, CR12, CR13, CR14, CR15
CR7, CR16
CR1, CR2, CR3, CR4, CR5, CR6, CR8, CR9
J1
Schematics and Parts Locator Drawings
These drawings reflect the actual construction of your unit as accurately as possible.
Any differences between the drawings and your unit are probably due to product
improvements or production changes since the publication of this manual.
If you intend to replace parts, please read page 6-13. Please note that because surface-mount parts are used extensively in the 8382, few parts are field-replaceable.
Servicing ordinarily occurs by swapping circuit board assemblies. However, many
vulnerable parts connected to the outside world are socketed and can be readily replaced in the field.
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
Function
Chassis
Base Board
CPU Module
RS-232 Board
Description
Drawing
Page
Circuit Board Locator and Basic Interconnections
Glue logic; supports CPU module
and RS-232 daughterboard.
Contains:
System Connections
CPU module interface
Power Supply Monitor
CPLD, General Purpose Interface,
and Remotes
Control microprocessor. Services
front panel, serial port, Ethernet,
DSP board, and control board. Resides on base board.
Contains:
Ethernet
General Purpose Bus
Memory
Miscellaneous Functions
Power and Ground Distribution
Supports Serial Port
Top view
(not to scale)
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-25
Schematic 1 of 4
Schematic 2 of 4
Schematic 3 of 4
Schematic 4 of 4
6-27
6-28
6-29
6-30
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-31
Schematic 1 of 5
Schematic 2 of 5
Schematic 3 of 5
Schematic 4 of 5
Schematic 5 of 5
Parts Locator
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1
Parts Locator
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1
Parts Locator
Drawing
6-32
6-33
6-34
6-35
6-36
6-37
Power Supply
±15V analog supply; ±5V analog
supply; +5V digital supply
I/O Board
Analog Input/output
AES3 Input/output
Contains:
L and R Analog Inputs
L and R Analog Outputs
Control and Digital I/O
Interface and Power Distribution
DSP Chips; Local +3.3V regulator.
Contains:
DSP Extended Serial Audio Interface (ESAI)
DSP Host Interface
DSP Serial Peripheral Interface,
Power, and Ground
ISA Bus 8-bit I/O
Serial Audio Interface and Clock
Generation
Power Distribution
No-Connects
DSP Board
TECHNICAL DATA
6-26
6-38
6-39
6-40
6-41
Schematic 1 of 4
Schematic 2 of 4
Schematic 3 of 4
Schematic 4 of 4
Parts Locator
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 7
6-42
6-43
6-44
6-45
6-46
Schematic 2 of 7
Schematic 3 of 7
6-48
6-49
Schematic 4 of 7
Schematic 5 of 7
6-50
6-51
Schematic 6 of 7
Schematic 7 of 7
6-52
6-53
6-47
6-23
6-24
TECHNICAL DATA
Function
Display Board
DSP Block
Diagram
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Description
Drawing
Page
Front-Panel LCD, LEDs, Buttons,
and Rotary Encoder
Parts Locator
Drawing
Schematic 1 of 1
6-54
Shows signal processing
6-55
6-56
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
6-25
6-26
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Base Board Parts Locator Drawing
(for schematic 62165.000.06)
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
+5VD
SD(0..15)
FROM POWER SUPPLY
2-1A, 1-5A
U5
AUX_COMM
2-1B, 1-4B
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
FPLED2
DISPLAY
CONTRAST
4-2B
2-1D
9
2-1A
7
6
18.432MHz
4
1-4B, 2-1B
TV15
B8 11
B7 12
7 A6
6 A5
B6 13
14
B5
15
B4
16
B3
17
B2
18
B1
10
1-4B
1
24.576MHz
1-4B, 2-1B
U13e
+5VD
—5vA
-15V
TV7
TV5
+15V
TV4
AGND
RSTDRV
SSI_DI
SSI_CLK
SSI_DO
/DACK1
DRQ1
2-1B, 1-5D
100K
R86
100K
SD1
R13
100K
R87
100K
R88
100K
2-1B
SD2
R12
100K
1-2C
1-4C
1-2C
SD3
R11
100K
R89
100K
SD4
R10
100K
R90
100K
SD5
R9
100K
R91
100K
SD6
R8
100K
R92
100K
SD7
R7
100K
R93
100K
1-5D
1-5D
JP7
SD7
SD6
SD4
SD5
SD3
FP_D2
FP_D3
BACKLIGHT
FP_D4
16013.000.01
2
Q2
FP_D5
1
TIP120
FP_D6
3
Heatsink
FP_D7
3
R26
1
10.0 K
+RAW
1
2
BACKLIGHT
10uF
DIRTY_GND
K
A
2
1
Note: C42 is not populated
in standard build.
1-5D
/GPIOWR
/GPIORD
LED_PULSE
FPLED1
DSP3.3VA
SA9
DSP3.3VB
4-8B
FPLED2
4-8B
DISPLAY
SA8
SA6
CONTRAST
SA7
SA4
SA5
SA3
/GPIOWR
FP_D0
FP_D1
FP_D2
FP_D7
FP_D6
FP_D5
FP_D3
FP_D4
FP_D4
FP_D5
FP_D6
FP_D7
FP_D3
FP_D2
FP_D1
FP_D0
Reserved
R20 100K
FP_ROW-COL
+5vD
/FPROW_C
/FPROW_D
2
Key
4
1
3
ENCODER
(optional)
J6
Q5
MMBT3904
2-5A
BKLITE_ON
2-5A
MISC_OUT4
2-5A
MISC_OUT5
10.0K
2
R16
R15
10.0K
3
Key
1
DIRTY_GND
2
3
4
10.0K
TV26
10.0K
J3B
J14
10.0K
R6
1
1
2
0.1uF
2
C24
1
4.7uF
1
2
1
+RAW
1
TV25
4
+5VD
+RAW
Key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314151617181920212223242526
Key
2
4
6
1
3
5
3
R5
R17
2
Key Key
2 4
C23
+RAW
10uF
10uF
DGND
2
C22
2
C19
4.7uF
C20
C21
0.1uF
2
1
2-8D
Note: J6 is not populated
in standard build.
+5VD
1
2-8D
ENC2
/FPCOL_B
/FPROW_A
/FPROW_B
+5vD
1
2-1D
ENC1
/FPCOL_A
TO DSP BOARD
2-1D
N/C
DIRTY_GND
2-1A, 1-5A
2-1D
/ENCODER
SA0
SA(0..25)
2-1D
/LED
SA1
SA2
SA0
+5VD
2
DIRTY_GND
2-1A, 1-5D
1-5D
Q1
MMBT3904
C42
SD2
SD1
SD0
/SMEMRD
(Monitor)
FP_D1
FP_D(0..7)
/SMEMWR
4-8C
4-8C
4-8D
4-8D
(Monitor)
FP_D0
SD(0..15)
GPAEN
(Monitor)
C9
/SPI_CS
R14
(Monitor)
Minus5VA
Minus15V
Plus15V
D1
RSTDRV
SD0
Plus5VA
2Ω
74HC14D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TV6
R25
11
+5vA
DGND
2Ω
10
DIRTY_GND
R24
/_IO_RESET
1
+RAW
2Ω
TO I/O BOARD
FP_D1
FP_D2
FP_D3
FP_D4
FP_D5
FP_D6
FP_D7
2
+5vD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
FP_D0
Gnd
36.864MHz
2
9 A8
8 A7
5 A4
4
A3
3
A2
2 A1
3
20
R23
5
Vcc
/OE
2Ω
8
FPLED1
4-2B
/CTS2
10
TV14
0.1uF
/RTS2
11
TV13
R4
19
TV12
2.00K
1 DIR
/FP_BUSEN
12
TV11
R22
SOUT2
0.1uF
SIN2
13
TV8
J1
C43
14
TV9
+5VD
74ACT245DW
/GPIOWR
/GPIORD
2-1A, 1-5D
2-1A, 1-5D
2-1B
+RAW
1N4148
JP8
6-27
5
TO 8500 SERIES
LCD BACKLIGHT
DRIVER
TO 8300 SERIES
LCD BACKLIGHT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14
3
J3A
TO SUPPLY
MONITOR LED
J4
J2
LCD DATA
TO FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
DISPLAY LOGIC
J5
POWER
Base Board Schematic:
System Connections
(version 62165.000.06)
Sheet 1 of 4
6-28
/MEMCS16
/MEMWR
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
2-1B
2-1B
/MEMRD
2-1B
/SMEMWR
/SMEMRD
3-7C
3-7C
/SBHE
TV66
/GPIOCS
/GPIOCS16
2-1B
2-1B
/GPIOWR
/GPIORD
3-6D, 2-1A
3-6D, 2-1A
+5VD
RSTDRV
GPRDY
GPAEN
GPTC
GPALE
A1a
SA18
SA17
/DACK0
DRQ0
/DACK5
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
DRQ5
/DACK6
DRQ6
/DACK7
DRQ7
TV75
TV76
2
1
2
F3
JTAG_TDO
JTAG_TDO
JTAG_TMS
E4
F4
JTAG_/TRST
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TDI
E5
F5
JTAG_TCK
E6
F6
E7
F7
/RING2
E8
F8
/RTS2
/DCD2
E9
F9
SIN2
TV88
/DTR2
TV74
JTAG_BR/TC
/DSR2
E10
F10
SOUT2
E11
F11
/DTR1
SA18
/RI1
E12
F12
/RTS1
/DCD1
E13
F13
SIN1
/DSR1
E14
F14
SOUT1
/CTS1
E15
F15
CPU_+3.3V
E16
F16
SSI_DI
SSI_CLK
E17
F17
SSI_DO
CPU_+2.5V
E18
F18
E19
F19
Rsvd_1
TV71
E20
F20
Rsvd_0
TV70
E21
F21
18.432MHz
E22
F22
36.864MHz
E23
F23
/GPCS1
SA16
TV2
SA15
SA14
4-8B
SA13
3-7C
SA12
4-8B
SA11
TV3
SA10
TV72
Rsvd_2
SA9
3-7D, 2-1B
SA8
2
JTAG_TCK
/CTS2
SA17
1
JTAG_TDI
SA19
TV77
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15 N/C
A16
B16 N/C
A17
B17
A18
B18
A19
B19
A20
B20 N/C
A21
B21
A22
B22
A23
B23
A24
B24
A25
B25
A26
B26 N/C
A27
B27
A28
B28
A29
B29
A30
B30
A31
B31
A32
B32
SA7
3-7D
SA6
3-7D, 2-1B
24.576MHz
SA5
TV73
SA4
TV82
SA3
TV80
SA2
TV81
SA1
TV83
SA0
TV84
GPIRQ9
1
F2
E3
GPIRQ7
AUX_COMM
2-1B, 3-7D
GPIRQ6
AUX_PATCH
GPIRQ5
2-1B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
(Reserved) N/C 13
14
15
16
CPU Module JTAG Port
3-7C
3-7C
============= "Accomodation Provisions" ===========
Default
Default
+5VD
TV30
GPIRQ15
TV41
TV60
TV31
GPIRQ14
TV42
TV61
TV32
GPIRQ12
TV43
TV33
GPIRQ11
TV44
Patch 4
TV52
TV34
GPIRQ10
TV45
Patch 3
TV53
TV35
GPIRQ9
TV46
TV54
/DACK5
TV36
GPIRQ7
TV47
TV55
DRQ5
E24
F24
/GPCS2
Rsvd_3
E25
F25
/GPCS3
CLK_TIME/TEST
E26
F26
/GPCS4
Rsvd_6
E27
F27
/GPCS5
Rsvd_7
E28
F28
/GPCS6
IDE_DREQ
E29
F29
/GPCS7
IDE_/DACK
E30
F30
PATCH1
TV37
GPIRQ4
GPIRQ6
TV48
TV56
E31
F31
PATCH2
TV38
GPIRQ3
GPIRQ5
TV49
TV57
E32
F32
PATCH3
TV39
GPIRQ10
GPIRQ4
TV50
Patch 1
TV58
/DACK7
PATCH4
TV40
GPIRQ11
GPIRQ3
TV51
Patch 2
TV59
DRQ7
TV62
/DACK0
DRQ0
/DACK6
DRQ6
TV63
TV64
TV65
GPIRQ4
GPIRQ3
+5VD
GPIRQ(3..15)
1
SA(0..25)
SD(0..15)
2-1A, 3-7B
2
1
2
1
10uF
SA19
SD0
C4
SA20
N/C
4.7uF
SA21
E2
SD1
C5
SA22
Ground
Ground
/MCS16
/SBHE
/IO16
LA23
IRQ10
LA22
IRQ11
LA21
IRQ12
LA20
IRQ15
LA19
IRQ14
LA18
/DACK0
LA17
DRQ0
/MEMRD
/DACK5
/MEMWR
DRQ5
SD8
/DACK6
SD9
DRQ6
SD10
/DACK7
SD11
DRQ7
SD12
+5V.
SD13
/MASTER16
SD14
Ground
SD15
Ground
(Key)
J13
JTAG_/TRST
JTAG_BR/TC
SD2
C6
SA23
D0
C0
D1
C1
D2
C2
D3
C3
D4
C4
D5
C5
D6
C6
D7
C7
D8
C8
D9
C9
D10
C10
D11
C11
D12
C12
D13
C13
D14
C14
D15
C15
D16
C16
D17
C17
D18
C18
D19
TV87
JTAG_TRIG
SD3
0.1uF
GPIRQ14
TV86
F1
SD4
10uF
D C
F
TV85
E1
SD5
C1
GPIRQ15
JTAG_CMD/ACK
E
3-7C
3-7C
SD6
N/C
JTAG_STOP/TX
A1b
SD7
4.7uF
GPIRQ12
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
C2
GPIRQ11
/CHCHK
Ground
SD7
RESDRV
SD6
+5v.
SD5
IRQ9
SD4
-5v.
SD3
DRQ2
SD2
-12v.
SD1
/ENDXFR
SD0
+12v.
CHRDY
(Key)
AEN
/SMWTC
SA19
/SMRDC
SA18
/IOWC
SA17
/IORC
SA16
/DACK3
SA15
DRQ3
SA14
/DACK1
SA13
DRQ1
SA12
/REFRESH
SA11
CLK
SA10
IRQ7
SA9
IRQ6
SA8
IRQ5
SA7
IRQ4
SA6
IRQ3
SA5
/DACK2
SA4
TC
SA3
BALE
SA2
+5v.
SA1
OSC
SA0
Ground
Ground
Ground
JTAG_TRIG
2-1A, 3-7C
TV68
TV69
/DACK1
DRQ1
B
C3
GPIRQ10
A
0.1uF
PC-104 Pinouts
3-7C, 2-1B
TV67
2
3-6D, 2-1A
Base Board Schematic:
CPU Module Interface
(version 62165.000.06)
Sheet 2 of 4
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
6-29
+15V
+RAW
R62
K
75.0 Ω
A
Plus15V
1N4148
2
R84
C39
1
2
K
2
D10
K
1
1
2
A
3
10uF
3
10uF
C36
1
DELAY
GND
75.0 Ω
D9
K
1
2
75.0 Ω
A
+RAW
1N4148
2
C15
/ERROR
D12
A
8
D11
2
1
10.0K
1
0.1uF
10%
D15
/SHUTDOWN
R83
R82
4
C37
14.0K
R61
SENSE
332K
C38
10.0K
R67
R64
Minus15V
INPUT
10uF
7
Vcc_PSM
10.0K
OUTPUT
10uF
6
N.C.
0.1uF
R78
R60
Plus15V
LP2987IM-5.0
1
5
C14
U20
2.00K
2
D13
DGND
BAT54C
U19
14
15
1
R71
5
TV1
TV28
TV27
2
BAT54C
4
10.0K
10.0K
R68
30.1K
1
3
2
10.0K
R72
12
R102
Minus5VA
D14
10.0K
TV29
10.0K
R69
10.0K
VDD
A
X1
B
X2
C
11
10
9
PMA0
PMA1
PMA2
X3
X4
X5
X
X6
U18
3
8
7
6
C41
2
1
16
1
RB0/INT
2
RB1
15
17
100K
TV24
R85
R75
100K
+RAW
2
R66
10.0K
2.49K
1
R65
MCLR
4
RB4
RA1
RB5
RA2/AN2/VREF
RB6
RA3/AN3
RB7
MCLR
RA4/T0CK1
VSS
14
R79
R73
DGND
D16
1
3
5
DGND
Vcc_PSM
6
7
8
PMA0
PMA1
PMA2
PWRFAIL
9
2-8D
10
ERROR
11
2
0.1uF
10%
2-8D
12
13
3
J11
SOCKET
Vcc_PSM
18-PIN
DIP
DEBUG
C35
1
1.00K
10.0K
RA0/AN0
VDD
10.0K
DSP3.3VA
RB2
OSC2/OUT
RB3
18
+5vD
OSC1
22pF
DGND
R76
+RAW
1
22pF
(A SMALL PATCH OF GROUND)
+5VD
PIC16C711/P
C40
2
X7
INH
BAT54C
R70
74HC4051M
VEE
R63
Plus5VA
16
X0
VSS
13
X1
3
2
4.000 MHz
1
1
2
3LCD DEBUG/TEST
SU18
Vcc_PSM
2
DSP3.3VB
BAT54C
R74
10.0K
CPU_+3.3V
R77
301 Ω
R80
10.0K
D17
1
3
2
CPU_+2.5V
R81
10.0K
FPLED1
3-6D
FPLED2
3-6D
BAT54C
Base Board Schematic:
Power Supply Monitor
(version 62165.000.06)
Sheet 3 of 4
6-30
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
FP_ROW-COL
R104
10.0K
/GPIORD
1
/AUX_BUSEN
ENC1
TV78
74HC14D
U13d
2
7
TV79
U13f
74HC14D
7
ENC2
13
9
8
SU10
SOCKET
16-PIN
DIP
D8
D7
R48
604 Ω
1
16
2
15
604 Ω
1
2
4
6
+5VD
74HC14D
TV16
11
100K
1 A.
1 A.
R28
604 Ω
8
R27
PS2506-4
13
TV17
15
U11b
U10 b
3
14
3
4
13
74HC14D
17
4
TV18
R49
PS2506-4
604 Ω
1
TV10
604 Ω
Chas
SD6
SD7
1A2
1Y2
1A3
1Y3
1A4
1Y4
2A1
2Y1
2A2
2Y2
2A3
2Y3
2A4
2Y4
1G
VCC
16
14
12
9
12
5
5
3
10
GND
1
2
604 Ω
1
2
TV19
2
R44
15
/MISC_IN
PS2506-4
604 Ω
2
U11d
U10 d
7
10
9
4
8
3
6
16
8
4
R51
17
8
74HC14D
R32
9
11
PS2506-4
604 Ω
13
100K
5
15
18
R33 604 Ω
U11e
U12 a
1
6
16
11
17
1
2
20
R52
74HC14D
15
604 Ω
8
1A2
16
1Y2
1A3
14
1Y3
1A4
1Y4
2A1
2Y1
2A2
2Y2
2A3
2Y4
1G
VCC
5
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
3
SD7
12
9
7
2Y3
2A4
SD0
SD1
SD2
18
1Y1
19
R34
PS2506-4
1A1
10
19
7
+5VD
U14
100K
14
20
GND
2G
1
10
74ACT244DW
100K
2
21
R35
9
604 Ω
TV20
U11f
U12 b
3
22
14
13
12
/REMOTE_IN
10
R53
PS2506-4
604 Ω
100K
24
12
R37
25
604 Ω
13
L2
3.9uH
R54
6
11
1
R45
604 Ω
8
9
3
74HC14D
R40
100K
D3
10.0 Ω
A
K
3
D5
D4
A
K
3
1N4148
D6
10.0 Ω
14.0K
K
A
Q4
MMBT3904
K
A
Q3
R41
1
2
1.62K
MMBT3904
B3
3
A2
B2
17
AUX_D6
B1
18
AUX_D7
A1
0.1uF
1
2
100K
1
2
/CTS2
/RTS2
SIN2
SOUT2
/RI1
/DCD1
/DSR1
/CTS1
/DTR1
/RTS1
SIN1
SOUT1
J12
R3
TCK
TDO
1
2
3
4
TMS
5
6
7
8
9
10
R2
NC
TDI
NC
NC
100K
JTAG Port
RSTDRV
18.432MHz
1
2
1
2
SA2
SA3
96
SA4
SA5
10
SA6
8
SA7
SA8
6
94
12
9
13
SA9
SA10
SA11
14
SA12
SA13
20
SA14
23
SA15
SA16
25
SA17
SA18
30
SA19
32
SA20
SA21
33
SA22
SA23
SA24
36
SA25
92
17
19
21
29
31
35
37
93
G G G G G G G G G G G V V
n n n n n n n n n n n c c
d d d d d d d d d d d c c
I I
N N
N/C
T T
N/C
(RESERVED)
SA1
SA2
SA3
SA4
SA5
SA6
SA7
SA8
SA9
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
N/C
N/C
V
c
c
I
/
O
V
c
c
I
/
O
V
c
c
I
/
O
V
c
c
I
/
O
V
c
c
I
/
O
P/N: 24983.000.01
Altera EPM 7064 STC 100-10
G
P
N N N N A
/ / / / E
C C C C N
AUX_D7
AUX_D6
AUX_D5
AUX_D4
AUX_D3
AUX_D2
AUX_D1
AUX_D0
V
c
c
I
/
O
62 73 15 4
#
T
C
K
#
T
D
O
#
T
M
S
U1
#
T
D
I
DISPLAY
#LED
#ENCODER
LED_PULSE
#FPCOL_A
#FPCOL_B
#FPROW_A
#FPROW_B
#FPROW_C
#FPROW_D
#FP_BUSEN
#AUX_BUSEN
(RESERVED)
#AUX0
#AUX1
#AUX2
#AUX3
#SPI_CS
#USB_CS
57
58
48
84
PATCH1
PATCH2
PATCH3
PATCH4
/AUX_0
/AUX_1
/AUX_2
/AUX_3
DISPLAY
/LED
/ENCODER
LED_PULSE
54
/FPCOL_A
/FPCOL_B
45
/FPROW_A
47
79
/FPROW_B
/FPROW_C
/FPROW_D
/FP_BUSEN
76
/AUX_BUSEN
46
52
56
SA2
SA1
SA0
/USB_CS
/GPIOWR
Vcc
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
QO
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
10
Gnd
OE
CP
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
1
/GPIORD
80
C18
/AUX_0
/AUX_1
2
71
64
/AUX_2
0.1uF
65
/AUX_3
42
41
40
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
2
#
G
P
I
O
R
D
#
G
P
I
O
W
R
B
K
#
L
M
I
I
M T
S
H E
C
z
N N
1 O / / I
8 N C C N
#
R
E
M
O
T
E
I
N
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
(RESERVED)
#
M
I
S
C
O N N N N N N
U / / / / / /
T C C C C C C
87 97 49 50 61 44 60 53 55 70 72 77 78
69
RSTDRV
/GPIOCS
/MEMCS
/GPIOCS16
75
/MEMCS16
AUX_PATCH
81
/MEMRD
/MEMWR
24.576MHz
RSTDRV
/FP_BUSEN
3-7C, 1-5D
3-6D
/SPI_CS
3-7C
63
67
68
83
85
AUX_COMM
/GPIOCS
/MEMCS
/GPIOCS16
/MEMRD
/GPIORD
GPAEN
CONTRAST
SA(0..25)
SD(0..15)
74HCT374
1
10uF
24.576MHz
18.432MHz
/GPIOWR
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
SD6
SD7
1
C17
/SPI_CS
/USB_CS
/MEMWR
/MISC_OUT
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
1-4B, 3-7D
1-4B
1-5D
1-5D
1-5D
1-5D
1-5D
3-7D, 1-4B
3-7D, 1-4B
3-6D, 1-5D
3-6D, 1-5D
3-7C, 1-5D
3-6D
1-5A, 3-7B
3-6D, 1-5A
1
DGND
2
MISC_OUT5
R42
1.62K
DGND
TALLY1
C7
TV21
U4
4
PS2506-4
604 Ω
A3
16
/MEMCS16
+5VD
20
10
15
22 24 27 28 99 98 100
U13b
U12 d
7
16
7
PS2506-4
604 Ω
1N4148
R43
5.62K
R58
CONT3
74HC14D
R38
SA0
SA1
5
CONTRAST
2
1N4148
R47
R55
2.00K
R57
CONT2
12
100K
R39
+RAW
U12 c
5
1N4148
L3
3.9uH
301 Ω
Chas
R56
CONT1
U13a
R59
11
74HC14D
R36
13
301 Ω
4
23
B4
AUX_D2
AUX_D3
AUX_D4
AUX_D5
11 26 38 43 59 74 86 88 89 90 95 39 91 82 66 51 34 18 3
6
C30
R50
1
1
2
20
74HC14D
R31
11
1
2
0.1uF
6
3.9uH
14
4
2
SD5
SD6
SD7
7
74ACT244DW
U10 c
13
B5
100K
L1
J10
A4
B6
+5VD
SD0
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
U11c
5
5
B7
12
R1
18
1Y1
2G
100K
R30
1A1
19
R29
DGND
A7
7 A6
6 A5
11
+5VD
U11a
2
To Peripheral Board
AUX_D0
AUX_D1
B8
10
16-PIN
DIP
U10 a
+5VD
Gnd
C32
R46
A8
ERROR
U15
D7 and D8 are not populated in
standard build.
8
0.1uF
NOTE:
(Spare)
PWRFAIL
SU12
SOCKET
9
SD1
SD2
SD3
SD4
SD5
12
74HC14D
74HC14D
SD0
C12
0.1uF
2
6
C11
74HC14D
0.1uF
20
J9
5
1
C34
0.1uF
1
C33
Vcc
/OE
0.1uF
14U13g
DIR
0.1uF
U11g
C10
14
19
U13c
C8
R103
10.0K
3-6D
3-1B
3-1B
3-1B
/ENCODER
LED_PULSE
+5VD
C13
+5VD
U3
74ACT245DW
0.1uF
ENC2
PWRFAIL
ERROR
3-1B
4-2C
4-2C
0.1uF
ENC1
3-1B
3-1B
DISPLAY
/LED
+5VD
TALLY2
MISC_OUT4
BKLITE_ON
3-8A
3-8A
3-8A
Base Board Schematic:
CPLD, GPI & Remote
(version 62165.000.06)
Sheet 4 of 4
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
CPU Module
6-31
6-32
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
+3.3 VDC
R25
150 ohm, 5%, 0805
5
10
R24
150 ohm, 5%, 0805
C
RN4
4.7 k, 5%, CTS 745?083472J
1
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
PCI_AD[0..31]
Req4-n
Req3-n
Req2-n
Req1-n
U4
T3
P3
N4
Gnt4-n
Gnt3-n
Gnt2-n
Gnt1-n
H4
H3
J3
IntD-n
IntC-n
IntB-n
PCI_IntA-n
PCI_AD31
PCI_AD30
PCI_AD29
PCI_AD28
PCI_AD27
PCI_AD26
PCI_AD25
PCI_AD24
PCI_AD23
PCI_AD22
PCI_AD21
PCI_AD20
PCI_AD19
PCI_AD18
PCI_AD17
PCI_AD16
PCI_AD15
PCI_AD14
PCI_AD13
PCI_AD12
PCI_AD11
PCI_AD10
PCI_AD9
PCI_AD8
PCI_AD7
PCI_AD6
PCI_AD5
PCI_AD4
PCI_AD3
PCI_AD2
PCI_AD1
PCI_AD0
D
A2
A1
B1
B2
D2
D1
E1
E2
F1
G1
G2
H2
H1
J1
J2
K2
R2
T2
T1
U1
U2
V2
V1
W1
Y2
Y1
AA1
AA2
AB2
AB1
AC1
AC2
PCI_AD31
PCI_AD30
PCI_AD29
PCI_AD28
PCI_AD27
PCI_AD26
PCI_AD25
PCI_AD24
PCI_AD23
PCI_AD22
PCI_AD21
PCI_AD20
PCI_AD19
PCI_AD18
PCI_AD17
PCI_AD16
PCI_AD15
PCI_AD14
PCI_AD13
PCI_AD12
PCI_AD11
PCI_AD10
PCI_AD9
PCI_AD8
PCI_AD7
PCI_AD6
PCI_AD5
PCI_AD4
PCI_AD3
PCI_AD2
PCI_AD1
PCI_AD0
CBE3-n
CBE2-n
CBE1-n
CBE0-n
F2
K1
R1
W2
PCI_CBE3-n
PCI_CBE2-n
PCI_CBE1-n
PCI_CBE0-n
Reset-n
DevSel-n
Stop-n
IRdy-n
TRdy-n
Frame-n
PErr-n
SErr-n
Parity
A5
M1
N1
L2
M2
L1
N2
P2
P1
PCI_Reset-n
PCI_DevSel-n
PCI_Stop-n
PCI_IRdy-n
PCI_TRdy-n
PCI_Frame-n
PCI_PErr-n
PCI_SErr-n
PCI_Parity
62
95
96
92
93
91
97
98
99
Reset-n
DevSel-n
Stop-n
IRdy-n
TRdy-n
Frame-n
PErr-n
SErr-n
Par
Req0-n
Gnt0-n
IntA-n
L3
M3
K3
PCI_Req0-n
PCI_Gnt0-n
PCI_IntA-n
64
63
61
Req-n
Gnt-n
IntA-n
AD31
AD30
AD29
AD28
AD27
AD26
AD25
AD24
AD23
AD22
AD21
AD20
AD19
AD18
AD17
AD16
AD15
AD14
AD13
AD12
AD11
AD10
AD9
AD8
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
+3.3 VDC
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
IntD-n
IntC-n
IntB-n
U3
R3
P4
N3
RN5
R-PACK
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Req4-n
Req3-n
Req2-n
Req1-n
PCI_AD24
R12
330 ohm, 5%, 0805
A6
PCI_ClkOut
PCI_ClkReference
C2
100 pf
1
Vcc
6
Clk1
Clk2
Clk3
Clk4
3
2
5
7
ClkOut
8
ClkRef
Vss
PCI_Clk1Out
TxData+
54
R19
49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
C5
10 pf, 1206
C6
0.1 uf
R20
49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
TPTDM
53
TxData-
TPRDP
46
RxData+
TxCT
R22
49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
1
Tx+
2
CT1
3
Tx-
4
Rx+
5
CT2
6
Rx-
7
NC
C8
0.1 uf
RxCT
C7
0.1 uf
R23
49.9 ohm, 1%, 0805
TPRDM
45
RxData-
YelLEDA
X1
17
X1
GrnLEDA
Y1
Ecliptek ECSMA-25.000M
IDSel
X2
18
X2
3VAux
PwrGood
PME-n/ClkRun-n
C3
18 pf
C4
18 pf
9
10
YelLEDA
YelLEDC
11
12
GrnLEDA
GrnLEDC
8
13
14
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
RJ-45 MAGJack LED
J1
PCI_Clk1
60
PCIClk
28
29
6
15
14
12
11
10
7
31
ColDetect
CarSense
RxClk
RxDataVal/MA11
RxErr/MA10
RxData3/MA9
RxData2/MA8
RxData1/MA7
RxData0/MA6
TxClk
141
140
139
138
135
134
133
132
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4/EEDO
MD3
MD2
MD1/CNFGDISN
MD0
R14
33.2 ohm, 5%, 0805
R15
470 ohm, 5%, 0805
CY2305SI-1H
U11
R11
33.2 ohm, 5%, 0805
PCI_ClkIn
76
TPTDP
R16
330 ohm, 5%, 0805
4
G3
CBEN3-n
CBEN2-n
CBEN1-n
CBEN0-n
R21
0 ohm, 1%, 0805
+3.3 VDC
R13
470 ohm, 5%, 0805
ClkPCIIn
75
89
100
111
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
R10
33.2 ohm, 5%, 0805
ClkPCIOut
AD31
AD30
AD29
AD28
AD27
AD26
AD25
AD24
AD23
AD22
AD21
AD20
AD19
AD18
AD17
AD16
AD15
AD14
AD13
AD12
AD11
AD10
AD09
AD08
AD7
AD6
AD5
AD4
AD3
AD2
AD1
AD0
122
123
59
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
66
67
68
70
71
72
73
74
78
79
81
82
83
86
87
88
101
102
104
105
106
108
109
110
112
113
115
116
118
119
120
121
PCI_ClkReturn
MgmtDataClk
MgmtDataIO
RxOE
TxEn
TxData3/MA15
TxData2/MA14
TxData1/MA13
TxData0/MA12
5
4
13
30
25
24
23
22
MDIO
R18
14.7 k, 5%, 0805
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1C
CnfgDisn
R17
1 k, 5%, 0805
MWRN
MRDN
MCSN
EESel
MA5
MA4/EECLK
MA3/EEDI
MA2/LED100Link
MA1/LED10Link
MA0/LEDAcitvity
National DP83815/83816
U10A
131
130
129
128
3
2
1
144
143
142
LED100Link
LEDActivity
CPU MODULE: ETHERNET
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
+3.3 VDC
3
1
MstrReset Vcc
Gnd
Reset-n
4
2
GP_SMemRd-n
= GPA20 + GPA21 + GPA22 + GPA23 + GPA24 + GP_MemRd-n
GP_SMemWr-n
= GPA20 + GPA21 + GPA22 + GPA23 + GPA24 + GP_MemWr-n
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
JP1
PrgReset
= !MasterReset-n
BuffRd-n
= GP_MemRd-n & GP_IORd-n
2
ResetDrv-n = GP_Reset
ResetDrv-n
BuffRd-n
JP2
JP3
1
IClk
OutEn
GP_SMemWr-n
GP_SMemRd-n
18
19
20
21
23
24
25
26
2
2
16
Out0
Out1
Out2
Out3
Out4
Out5
Out6
Out7
1
GPA24
GPA21
GPA20
GPA22
10 k, 5%, 0805
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
I10
I11
2
+3.3 VDC
MasterReset-n
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
17
27
1
GPA23
R1
BHE
+5 VDC
P1B
ISA_Reset
GAL 20LV8D-7LJ
U6A
PwrGood
C20
PwrGood
PIO14/GPIRQ9
MIC8114TU
U5
GPReset
PrgReset
IRQ9
-5 VDC
DReq2
-12 VDC
AE8
AC22
D20
GP_Reset
PrgReset
+12 VDC
ISA_SMemWr-n
ISA_SMemRd-n
ISA_IOWr-n
ISA_IORd-n
DAck3-n
DReq3
DAck1-n
DReq1
R2
10 k, 5%, 0805
PIO11/GPDAck1-n
PIO7/GPDReq1
PIO16/GPIRQ7
PIO17/GPIRQ6
PIO18/GPIRQ5
PIO19/GPIRQ4
PIO20/GPIRQ3
GPCS1-n
GPCS2-n
GPCS3-n
GPCS4-n
GPCS5-n
B24
C23
AC21
AA24
AC20
ROMCS1-n/GPCS1-n
ROMCS2-n/GPCS2-n
PITGate2/GPCS3-n
TimerIn1/GPCS4-n
TimerIn0/GPCS5-n
FlashStatus
PIO10
AE10
AD9
PIO6/GPDReq2
PIO10/GPDAck2-n
GPCS6-n
GPCS7-n
IDE_DReq
IDE_DAck-n
AC23
AD23
AD10
AE9
AC9
AF10
IRQ7
IRQ6
IRQ5
IRQ4
IRQ3
DAck2-n
TC
ALE
AF7
AE7
AD7
AD6
AE6
PIO4/GPTC
PIO0/GPALE
AD11
AE12
PIO2/GPRdy
PIO3/GPAEN
PIO27/GPCS0-n
AF11
AE11
AE4
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
Gnd
Reset
Vcc
IRQ9
-5 VDC
DReq2
-12 VDC
OWS-n
+ 12 VDC
Gnd
SMemWr-n
SMemRd-n
IOWr-n
IORd-n
DAck3-n
DReq3
DAck1-n
DReq1
Refresh-n
SysClk
IRQ7
IRQ6
IRQ5
IRQ4
IRQ3
DAck2-n
TC
ALE
Vcc
OSC
Gnd
Gnd
PC104-P1
P1A
TimerOut1/GPCS6-n
TimerOut0/GPCS7-n
PIO5/GPDReq3
PIO9/GPDAck3-n
NMI
ISA_D7
ISA_D6
ISA_D5
ISA_D4
ISA_D3
ISA_D2
ISA_D1
ISA_D0
IOChRdy
ISA_AEN
ISA_A19
ISA_A18
ISA_A17
ISA_A16
ISA_A15
ISA_A14
ISA_A13
ISA_A12
ISA_A11
ISA_A10
ISA_A9
ISA_A8
ISA_A7
ISA_A6
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
ISA_D[0..15]
GPD15
GPD14
GPD13
GPD12
GPD11
GPD10
GPD9
GPD8
GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
GPD3
GPD2
GPD1
GPD0
D17
C17
C15
D14
D13
C13
C12
C11
C10
D10
D9
C9
C8
C7
B5
C4
GPD15
GPD14
GPD13
GPD12
GPD11
GPD10
GPD9
GPD8
GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
GPD3
GPD2
GPD1
GPD0
GPA25
GPA24
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GPA19
GPA18
GPA17
GPA16
C3
D4
D3
F3
C19
C14
C21
B22
E24
D24
GPA25
GPA24
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GPA19
GPA18
GPA17
GPA16
PIO1/GPBHE-n
GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
GPD3
GPD2
GPD1
GPD0
GPD15
GPD14
GPD13
GPD12
GPD11
GPD10
GPD9
GPD8
47
46
44
43
41
40
38
37
36
35
33
32
30
29
27
26
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
1
24
1DIR
2DIR
1OE
2OE
48
25
ISA_D7
ISA_D6
ISA_D5
ISA_D4
ISA_D3
ISA_D2
ISA_D1
ISA_D0
ISA_D15
ISA_D14
ISA_D13
ISA_D12
ISA_D11
ISA_D10
ISA_D9
ISA_D8
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
74ACLV162450/SO
U7A
GPA24
GPA23
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
R3
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
R4
+3.3 VDC
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
R36
+3.3 VDC
47
46
44
43
41
40
38
37
36
35
33
32
30
29
27
26
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
1
24
1DIR
2DIR
1OE
2OE
48
25
ISA_A15
ISA_A14
ISA_A13
ISA_A12
ISA_A11
ISA_A10
ISA_A9
ISA_A8
ISA_A7
ISA_A6
ISA_A5
ISA_A4
ISA_A3
ISA_A2
ISA_A1
ISA_A0
GPA[0..24]
PC104-P1
P2A
BHE-n
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
GPMemRd-n
GPMemWr-n
F24
C18
GP_MemRd-n
GP_MemWr-n
GPIOWr-n
GPIORd-n
C16
G24
GP_IOWr-n
GP_IORd-n
PIO24/GPDBUFOE-n
AD5
GPDBufOE-n
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GP_SMemWr-n
GP_SMemRd-n
GPA19
GPA18
GP_Reset
GP_AEN
GPA17
GPA16
GP_MemRd-n
GP_MemWr-n
+3.3 VDC
47
46
44
43
41
40
38
37
36
35
33
32
30
29
27
26
1A1
1A2
1A3
1A4
1A5
1A6
1A7
1A8
2A1
2A2
2A3
2A4
2A5
2A6
2A7
2A8
1B1
1B2
1B3
1B4
1B5
1B6
1B7
1B8
2B1
2B2
2B3
2B4
2B5
2B6
2B7
2B8
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
22
23
ISA_A23
ISA_A22
ISA_A21
ISA_A20
ISA_SMemWr-n
ISA_SMemRd-n
ISA_IOWr-n
ISA_IORd-n
ISA_A19
ISA_A18
ISA_Reset
ISA_AEN
ISA_A17
ISA_A16
ISA_MemRd-n
ISA_MemWr-n
1
24
1DIR
2DIR
1OE
2OE
48
25
ISA_OE-n
ISA_A23
ISA_A22
ISA_A21
ISA_A20
ISA_A19
ISA_A18
ISA_A17
ISA_MemRd-n
ISA_MemWr-n
ISA_D8
ISA_D9
ISA_D10
ISA_D11
ISA_D12
ISA_D13
ISA_D14
ISA_D15
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1B
MemCS16-n
IOCS16-n
IRQ10
IRQ11
IRQ12
IRQ15
IRQ14
DAck0-n
DReq0
DAck5-n
DReq5
DAck6-n
DReq6
DAck7-n
DReq7
+5 VDC
Gnd
SBHe
LA23
LA22
LA21
LA20
LA19
LA18
LA17
MemRd-n
MemWr-n
SD8
SD9
SD10
SD11
SD12
SD13
SD14
SD15
Key
PC104-P2
GPD[0..15]
GPA[0..24]
P2B
AD4
AC4
AD8
AE5
AF5
AF6
AF8
AC8
AF9
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
74ACLV162450/SO
U8A
GPD[0..15]
PIO26/GPMemCS16-n
PIO25/GPIOCS16-n
PIO13/GPIRQ10
PIO23/GPIRQ0
PIO22/GPIRQ1
PIO21/GPIRQ2
PIO15/GPIRQ8
PIO12/GPDAck0-n
PIO8/GPDReq0
IOChk-n
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
IOChRdy
AEN
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
Gnd
ISA_A[0..23]
74ACLV162450/SO
U9A
AF12
C24
R24
P24
N24
N23
M23
C2
M24
F23
C1
H24
L24
J23
K24
G4
J24
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
Gnd
MemCS16-n
IOCS16-n
IRQ10
IRQ11
IRQ12
IRQ15
IRQ14
DAck0-n
DReq0
DAck5-n
DReq5
DAck6-n
DReq6
DAck7-n
DReq7
+5 VDC
Master-n
Gnd
Gnd
PC104-P2
+3.3 VDC
DReq2
DReq3
DReq1
DReq0
DReq5
DReq6
DReq7
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
1
5
10
C
4.7 k, 5%, CTS 745?083472J
RN2
DAck3-n
DAck5-n
DAck1-n
DAck0-n
DAck6-n
DAck7-n
DAck2-n
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
1
5
10
C
4.7 k, 5%, CTS 745?083472J
RN3
CPU Module:
General Purpose
Bus
6-33
6-34
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
DRAM Circuitry
MD[0..31]
MA[0..12]
+3.3 VDC
5
10
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
1
MD31
MD30
MD29
MD28
MD27
MD26
MD25
MD24
MD23
MD22
MD21
MD20
MD19
MD18
MD17
MD16
MD15
MD14
MD13
MD12
MD11
MD10
MD9
MD8
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
A24
A23
B21
A20
A19
B18
A17
B16
A15
B14
A13
B12
A11
B10
A9
B8
B23
A22
A21
B20
A18
B17
A16
B15
A14
B13
A12
B11
A10
B9
A8
B7
MECC6
MECC5
MECC4
MECC3
MECC2
MECC1
MECC0
Y26
D25
C26
Y25
W26
D26
C25
MD31
MD30
MD29
MD28
MD27
MD26
MD25
MD24
MD23
MD22
MD21
MD20
MD19
MD18
MD17
MD16
MD15
MD14
MD13
MD12
MD11
MD10
MD9
MD8
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
MECC6
MECC5
MECC4
MECC3
MECC2
MECC1
MECC0
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
V26
U26
T26
R26
R25
P25
P26
N26
N25
M25
M26
L26
L25
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
BA1
BA0
U25
T25
BA1
BA0
+3.3 VDC
R7
4.75k, 5%, 0805
CKELow
36
35
22
34
33
32
31
30
29
26
25
24
23
A12
A11
A10/AP
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
21
20
BA1
BA0
MD15
MD14
MD13
MD12
MD11
MD10
MD9
MD8
MD7
MD6
MD5
MD4
MD3
MD2
MD1
MD0
UDQM
LDQM
39
15
SDQM1
SDQM0
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
+3.3 VDC
R8
4.75k, 5%, 0805
CKEHigh
36
35
22
34
33
32
31
30
29
26
25
24
23
A12
A11
A10/AP
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
21
20
BA1
BA0
37
CKE
WE-n
CAS-n
RAS-n
CS-n
WE-n
CAS-n
RAS-n
CS-n
16
17
18
19
CLK
38
RAMWE-n
RAMCAS-n
RAMRAS-n
RAMCS-n
16
17
18
19
SDQM3
SDQM2
SDQM1
SDQM0
H25
G26
H26
G25
SDQM3
SDQM2
SDQM1
SDQM0
38
SRASB-n
SCASB-n
SWEB-n
K26
F26
E25
ClkMemOut
53
51
50
48
47
45
44
42
13
11
10
8
7
5
4
2
CKE
E26
F25
K25
V25
32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM
U2A
SDQM[0..3]
W25
J25
J26
DQ15
DQ14
DQ13
DQ12
DQ11
DQ10
DQ9
DQ8
DQ7
DQ6
DQ5
DQ4
DQ3
DQ2
DQ1
DQ0
37
SWEA-n
SCASA-n
SRASA-n
SCS0-n
SCS1-n
SCS2-n
SCS3-n
DQ15
DQ14
DQ13
DQ12
DQ11
DQ10
DQ9
DQ8
DQ7
DQ6
DQ5
DQ4
DQ3
DQ2
DQ1
DQ0
53
51
50
48
47
45
44
42
13
11
10
8
7
5
4
2
MD31
MD30
MD29
MD28
MD27
MD26
MD25
MD24
MD23
MD22
MD21
MD20
MD19
MD18
MD17
MD16
UDQM
LDQM
39
15
SDQM3
SDQM2
CLK
32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM
U3A
R5
22 ohm, 5%, 0805
DRAMClk
B19 ClkMemOut
22 ohm, 5%, 0805
R6
MECC4
ClkMemIn
MECC6
MECC3
MECC2
MECC5
MECC1
MECC0
MA12
MA11
MA10
MA9
MA8
MA7
MA6
MA5
MA4
MA3
MA2
MA1
MA0
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1A
A4
ClkMemIn
Route the ClkMemIn trace back and forth so that it is the
same length as the SDRAMClk trace to either chip.
C1
4.7 pf
Route the SDRAMCLK "T" style so that the trace length
to each SDRAM chip is the same length.
C
CTS 745?083102J
RN1
Place the two (2), 22 ohm series terminating resistors as
close as possible to the ElanSC520.
Place the 4.7 fp capacitor as close as possible to the
Elan SC520. Adjust the value to equalize loading on
SDRAMCLK and ClkMemIn nets.
Flash Circuitry
GPA[0..24]
+3.3 VDC
GPA24
GPA23
GPA22
GPA21
GPA20
GPA19
GPA18
GPA17
GPA16
GPA15
GPA14
GPA13
GPA12
GPA11
GPA10
GPA9
GPA8
GPA7
GPA6
GPA5
GPA4
GPA3
GPA2
GPA1
GPA0
56
30
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
17
18
19
20
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
32
A24
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
31
Byte-n
ROMRd-n
FlashWR-n
54
55
OE-n
WE-n
BootCS-n
14
2
29
CE0-n
CE1-n
CE2-n
ResetDrv-n
16
RP-n
GPD[0..15]
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
52
50
47
45
41
39
36
34
51
49
46
44
40
38
35
33
Vpen
15
STS
53
E28F128J3A-150
U4A
GPD15
GPD14
GPD13
GPD12
GPD11
GPD10
GPD9
GPD8
GPD7
GPD6
GPD5
GPD4
GPD3
GPD2
GPD1
GPD0
+3.3 VDC
GPD[0..15]
+3.3 VDC
R9
10k, 5%, 0805
FlashStatus
CPU Module: Memory
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
6-35
+3.3 VDC
R26
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
P3A
AF25
AF23
AF1
AE25
AE24
AE1
AD26
AD25
AD2
AD1
AC25
AC3
AA26
AB4
AB3
E23
D23
C22
E3
C6
C5
B6
B4
B3
A3
AE17
AD17
AC17
AC16
AD16
AE16
AF16
AF15
AE15
AD15
AD14
AE14
AF14
AF13
AE13
AD13
NC0
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
NC5
NC6
NC7
NC8
NC9
NC10
NC11
NC12
NC13
NC14
NC15
NC16
NC17
NC18
NC19
NC20
NC21
NC22
NC23
NC24
PData15
PData14
PData13
PData12
PData11
PData10
PData09
PData08
PData07
PData06
PData05
PData04
PData03
PData02
PData01
PData0
AD18
AE18
AF18
PAddr2
PAddr1
PAddr0
AC12
T24
T23
AF20
AE20
AD12
ICE_Dis
PBReq
TV
PBGnt
PRW
TClk
Trig/Trace
BR/TC
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TCK
PIO31/Ring2-n
PIO30/DCD2-n
PIO29/DSR2-n
PIO28/CTS2-n
Ring1-n
DCD1-n
DSR1-n
CTS1-n
SSI_Clk
CF_DRAM-n/CFG2
AC13
AD24
AE21
AF21
AD21
Trig/Trace
BR/TC
JTAG_TMS
JTAG_TDI
JTAG_TCK
AD3
AE3
AF3
AF4
AA3
V4
Y3
V3
Ring2-n
DCD2-n
DSR2-n
CTS2-n
Ring1-n
DCD1-n
DSR1-n
CTS1-n
AD19
SSI_Clk
W24
CFG2
+3.3 VDC
PITOut2/CGF3
ClkTimer/CltTest
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
+2.5 VDC
PITOut2/CFG3
ClkTimer/ClkTest
Y24
A7
R28
IDE_DReq
IDE_DAck-n
+3.3 VDC
R27
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
R29
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
A21
A22
A23
A24
A25
A26
A27
A28
A29
A30
A31
A32
+2.5 VDC
C10
0.001 uf
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
R32
+3.3 VDC
C12
0.01 uf
R31
10 ohm, 5%, 0805
32X2Conn
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
Vcc_Osc
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
P3B
Stop/TX
CmdAck
JTAG_TDO
JTAG_TRst-n
AF17
U24
AF22
AE22
Stop/TX
CmdAck
JTAG_TDO
JTAG_TRst-n
DTR2-n
RTS2-n
SIn2
SOut2
DTR1-n
RTS1-n
SIn1
SOut1
AE23
AD22
V24
U23
W3
W4
AE2
AF2
DTR2-n
RST2-n
SIn2
SOut2
DTR1-n
RTS1-n
SIn1
SOut1
SSI_DI
SSI_DO
AE19
AF19
SSI_DI
SSI_DO
AC24
AD20
DataStrb/CFG1
CS_ROM_GPCS-n/CFG0
DataStrb/CFG1
CS_ROM_GPCS-n/CFG0
C11
0.01 uf
+3.3 VDC
4.75 k, 5%, 0805
R30
GPCS1-n
GPCS2-n
GPCS3-n
GPCS4-n
GPCS5-n
GPCS6-n
GPCS7-n
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31
B32
C9
0.1 uf
4
VccOsc VccCPU
1
2
Gnd
3
ClkOut
LF_PLL
Epson SG-636PCE-33MC2
X1
VBat
A4
A5
Vbat 32.768 khz
Vbat 32.768 khz
C4
C5
B4
B5
Vbat 32.768 khz
Vbat 32.768 khz
D4
D5
A7
A8
T
T
T
T
C7
C8
B7
B8
T
T
T
T
D7
D8
RTC_Clock
AF24
LF_PLL
AC26
33MXtal2
AB26
33MXtal1
AE26
32kXtal2
AF26
32kXtal1
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1E
DS32khz
U13A
32X2Conn
ROMRd-n
FlashWr-n
BootCS-n
ROMBufOE-n
AB23
AB24
AB25
AA25
ROMRd-n
FlashWr-n
BootCS-n
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1D
CPU Module: Miscellaneous Connections
6-36
5
4
TECHNICAL DATA
3
ORBAN MODEL 8382
2
1
+3.3 VDC
+2.5 VDC
+3.3 VDC
+5 VDC
C201
See Table
1
Vin Vout
3
C14
1 uf
C13
10 uf, low ESR
+
2
Gnd Gnd
34
42
43
48
C16
10 uf, low ESR
+
3
2
Gnd Gnd
4
35
FSGnd
20
32
PHYGnd1
PHYGnd2
+3.3 VDC
8
16
26
84
136
IOGnd1
IOGnd2
IOGnd3
IOGnd4
IOGnd5
C17
1 uf
65
77
90
103
114
+5 VDC
Vin Vout
127
50
41
C18
10 uf, low ESR
LT1963EST_3.3
U15
FSVdd
36
PHYVdd1
PHYVdd2
33
21
6
12
46
52
IOVdd1
IOVdd2
IOVdd3
IOVdd4
IOVdd5
137
85
27
19
9
PCIGnd1
PCIGnd2
PCIGnd3
PCIGnd4
PCIGnd5
PCIVdd1
PCIVdd2
PCIVdd3
PCIVdd4
PCIVdd5
117
107
94
80
69
57
124
MACGnd1
MACGnd2
MACVdd1
MACVdd2
125
58
51
TxDigGnd
TxDigVdd
56
52
55
TxIOGnd1
TxIOGnd2
38
44
RxAnalGnd1
RxAnalGnd2
RxAnalVdd1
RxAnalVdd2
47
39
Vref
40
37
49
126
SubGnd1
SubGnd2
SubGnd3
R200
See Table, 5%, 0805
C178
1 uf
C179
0.1 uf
C180
0.01 uf
C181
1 uf
C125
1 uf
C175
1 uf
C176
1 uf
C126
0.1 uf
6
12
46
52
C132
1 uf
NC
NC
NC
NC
Vcc
28
Gnd
4
10
15
21
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Vcc
Vcc
28
34
39
45
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Vcc
Vcc
GAL 20LV8D-7LJ
U6B
42
31
+5 VDC
18
7
9.31 k ohm, 5%, 0805
10.0 k ohm, 5%, 0805
R200
0 ohm, 5%, 0805
No Stuff
C200
0.01 uf,
0805
0.1 uf,
1
BBatSense
C21
0.1 uf
2
BT1
BATTERY
A
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
A26
VccRTC
No Stuff
1.0 uf,
0805
C202
No Stuff
1.0 uf,
0805
B25
BBatSense
T16
T15
T14
T13
T12
T11
R16
R15
R14
R13
R12
R11
P16
P15
P14
P13
P12
P11
N16
N15
N14
N13
N12
N11
M16
M15
M14
M13
M12
M11
L16
L15
L14
L13
L12
L11
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
VccCore
AC15
AC14
AC7
AC6
AC5
R23
P23
T4
R4
H23
G23
F4
E4
D19
D18
D12
D11
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
VccIO
AC19
AC18
AC11
AC10
AA4
Y4
AA23
Y23
W23
V23
L23
K23
M4
L4
K4
J4
D22
D21
D16
D15
D8
D7
D6
D5
+3.3 VDC
Vcc
Vcc
28
34
39
45
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Vcc
Vcc
42
31
+5 VDC
18
7
4
10
15
21
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Vcc
Vcc
42
31
28
34
39
45
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Vcc
Vcc
18
7
74ACLV162450/SO
U8B
+5 VDC
74ACLV162450/SO
U9B
+5 VDC
C
+5 VDC
+3.3 VDC
C150
0.01 uf
C151
1 uf
C155
1 uf
C156
0.01 uf
C157
1 uf
C158
0.01 uf
C159
1 uf
C160
0.01 uf
C161
1 uf
C162
0.01 uf
0805
C201
C20
0.1 uf
1 k, 5%, 0805
R35
+3.3 VDC
4
10
15
21
74ACLV162450/SO
U7B
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
+3.3 VDC
A1
A2
A3
A6
A9
B1
B2
B3
B6
B9
C1
C6
C9
D1
D6
D9
+2.5 VDC
D2
1N4148
C134
0.01 uf
83815 Value
R33
VBat
D3
1N4148
C133
0.1 uf
+3.3 VDC
83815 Value
43
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
E28F128J3A-150
U4B
+5 VDC
C177
0.1 uf
10 ohm, 5%, 0805
R34
21
42
48
+3.3 VDC
C127
0.01 uf
D1
1N4148
B
3
9
43
49
Vddq
Vddq
Vddq
Vddq
32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM
U3B
C153
1 uf
+3.3 VDC
Vssq
Vssq
Vssq
Vssq
+3.3 VDC
R33
See Table, 5%, 0805
1
8
15
22
Component
3
9
43
49
Vcc
Vcc
Vccq
+3.3 VDC
Component Value Table for 83815/83816 shared components
+3.3 VDC
Vddq
Vddq
Vddq
Vddq
Vdd
Vdd
Vdd
37
9
Vref
C183
1 uf
+3.3 VDC
Vssq
Vssq
Vssq
Vssq
Vss
Vss
Vss
+3.3 VDC
1
14
27
+3.3 VDC
C202
See Table
14
C
Vdd
Vdd
Vdd
28
41
54
32 Mbit x 16 SDRAM
U2B
+3.3 VDC
C182
0.1 uf
Vss
Vss
Vss
1
14
27
D
C200
See Table
National DP83815/8316
U10B
+3.3 VDC
28
41
54
+3.3 VDC
4
1
Res3
Res2
Res1
C15
10 uf, low ESR
LT1963EST_2.5
U14
D
NC1
NC2
NC3
NC4
+3.3 VDC
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Gnd
Vcc
Vcc
C2
C3
Vcc
Vcc
D2
D3
DS32khz
U13B
+3.3 VDC
A
+2.5 VDC
A25
GndAnalog
VccAnalog
B26
AMD ElanSC520-100AC
U1F
5
4
B
CPU Module: Power and Ground Distribution
3
2
1
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
RS232 BOARD PARTS LOCATOR
6-37
6-38
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
+5VD
SU1
SOCKET
C5
0.1uF
9
24 PIN DIP
10
12
C2
13
14
0.1uF
5
18
19
21
6
4
22
17
C1
0.1uF
RESERVED
RESERVED
/DCD1
/CTS1
/RTS1
SOUT1
11
C6
C2+
C2-
V-
15
0.1uF
T1 IN
T2 IN
T3 IN
T4 IN
R1 OUT
R2 OUT
R3 OUT
R4 OUT
V+
T1 OUT
T2 OUT
T3 OUT
T4 OUT
R1 IN
R2 IN
R3 IN
R4 IN
2
1
24
20
7
3
23
16
8
+5VD
C1+
C1-
GND
0.1uF
VCC
C3
C4
0.1uF
U1
MAX208ECNG
J1
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
J2
L1
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
/DSR1
/DTR1
SIN1
HEADER 8X2
5
9
3.9uH
4
8
D1
D2
3
7
2
6
DIODE SCHOTTKY
1
DIODE SCHOTTKY
DB9M
RS232 DAUGHTER BOARD
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
POWER SUPPLY PARTS LOCATOR
6-39
6-40
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
Plus15V
Lug
1
CR19
2
1N4734A
5.6v Zener
1
C3
2
100 F, 25v
10%
6.8V Transorb
20%
1
CR17
1
C10
1
2
0.1 F, 50v
20%
C11
2
(Monitor) Plus5VA
U4
1
CR20
2
1N4734A
5.6v Zener
1
2
100 F, 25v
10%
C2
1
CR18
6.8V Transorb
CR14
1N4004
AGND
DGND
DirtyGnd
-5v Reg
MC79M05CT
+RAW
Minus5VA
3
0.1 F, 50v
20%
C6
1
1
2
2
2.2 F, 35v
20%
1
J2
C7
6
1
3
0.1 F, 50v 20%
5
1
2
2
4
C15
1
Minus15V
Mounting
Kit
+5VD
15025.000.01
2
2
J4
Minus15V
Mounting
Kit
1
15025.000.01
V2
To: Base Board
AGND
1
6
5
4
V1
J5
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
4
2
5
3
6
4
2
3
1
1
2
1
2
22V Transorb
1
100 F, 25v10%
CR16
2
2
3
2
115v/230v
(Monitor) Minus5VA
RED
1
J1
(Monitor) Minus15V
AGND
3
2.2 F, 35v
20%
3
2
2
2
2
U2 -15v Reg
MC79M15CT
C16
4
C8
1
2
1
2
C17
CR10 33V Transorb
1N4004
MinusRAW
BLACK
1
(Monitor) Plus15V
AGND
AGND
1
Plus5VA
3
2
1
1
1
C20
1
C19
2
2
1
2
CR9 33V Transorb
1
1000 F, 35v 20%
C18
2
1
2
1N4004
1N4004
RED/WHITE
CR12
2
1
F1
1/2 A, Slow Blow Blow
Fuse
BROWN
1000 F, 35v 20%
C_Gnd
Cap
1
CR7
ORANGE
2
2
1
3
2
BLUE
CR6
ORANGE/WHITE
1
1N4004
WHITE
SW1
Plus15V
15025.000.01
(off board)
4
H7
AGND
YELLOW/WHITE
YELLOW
H6
1
Toroid Assy
Line Filter Assembly
Fuse Holder
CR5
1
1N4004
Power Transformer
A1
2
CR8
Chassis Ground Pigtail, 3" long
(Lug w/Green AWG 18)
3
2
1
2
PlusRAW
0.1 F, 50v
20%
AGND
Mounting
Kit
U3 +5v Reg
MC78M05CT
+15v Reg
MC78M15CT
U1
CR13 22V Transorb
15025.000.01
2
2
1N4004
20%
1
0.1 F, 50v
2
1N4004
C9 100 F, 25v 10%
C21
R1
1
1
2
N/C
CR15
2
0.1 F, 50v
Mounting
Kit
3
2
1
1
0.1 F, 50v
20%
SW2
CR11
2
Gnd Lift
AGND
+5VD
AGND
DGND
AGND
Plus15V
J7
1
2
MinusRAW
DGND
Plus15V
+5VD
3
4
5
6
C_Gnd
Minus15V
7
8
Plus5VA
9
10
Minus5VA
CR22
Minus15V
PlusRAW
1
Minus5VA
Plus5VA
To: I/O Board
+RAW
Testing Access
2
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
J3
Dual Schotkey
CR23
1
+RAW
2
5
DGND
15025.000.01
1
CR4
2
7.7uH, 4A
6.8V Transorb
2
1
1
470 F, 16v, HFS
1
2
C4
1
C5
2
40v, 3A
Schottky
1
CR3
470 F, 16v, HFS
2
100uH, 3A
GND
+5VD
L2
L1
1
100 F, 16v, HFS
OUT
2
C1
4
2
FDBK
LM2576T
2
VIN
3
0.1 F, 50v 20%
2
C12
1
100 F, 50v, Low ESR
DGND
2
1
1
C22
1
2
CR2
1
22V Transorb
Dual Schotkey
6800 F, 16v 20%
C14
3
2
1
2
2
1
Heatsink Bar, 8300
50286.000.01
U5
/ON
Dual Schotkey
CR21
C13
32181.000.02
6800 F, 16v 20%
FAB
DGND
3
Ref: PCB
+RAW
Mounting
Kit
+5VD
DGND
+RAW
1
2
DGND
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
To: DSP Board
J6
(optional fan)
3
DGND
*
DirtyGnd
DirtyGnd
(Isolated return path for LCD backlight current.)
POWER SUPPLY
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
8382 I/O Board Parts Locator
6-41
6-42
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
LEFT ANALOG INPUT
C103
1
OPA2134PA
R138
150OHM
1%
1
OPA2134UA
2
+15V
C113
R140
1.50K
1%
R142
1.00M
1%
R143
E203
13
IN4
14.7K
1%
8
IN3
9
1
5.62K
1%
R129
OPA2134PA
DD7
C107
1.50K 1%
R145
3.65K
0.1%
AGND4
9
7
VCOML
R151
150OHM
1%
3.65K 0.1%
C124
0.1UF
50V
11
19
HPFE
AINR+
+ C122
10UF
20V
C115
4700PF
5%,50V
C116
4700PF
5%,50V
C125
0.1UF
50V
C126
0.1UF
50V
AINRVCOMR
LRCK
VREFR
SDATA
27
GNDR
AGND4
TEST
-15V
IC106A
2
1
IC105B
5
3
7
OPA2134UA
6
+15V
17
8.192MHZA
14
IN_BCLK
13
IN_FCLK
15
R158
20
75OHM
1%
R155
249OHM
1%
TP105
R149
249OHM
1%
AGND4
OPA2134UA
A/D GND
C117
R152
1.00M
1%
AGND4
AGND4
E204
+5VD
AGND4
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
(SHT4)
D[0..7]
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
IC108
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
DD0
DD1
DD2
DD3
DD4
DD5
DD6
DD7
AGND6
AGND5
AGND4
AGND3
AGND
Drawing Number Ver.
62230
000
Rev.
01
Sheet
1
of
4
DD[0..7]
74HC374
/INGAINCS
Left and Right Analog Inputs
(SHT4)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
16
FSYNC
26
28
249OHM
1%
R147
3.65K
0.1%
R148
C123
0.1UF
50V
(SHT3)
NC
12
AINL+
AINL-
/RSTAD
18
DFS
SMODE1
SCLK
AGND4
R150
AGND4
0.47UF
25V
DD[4..7]
GNDL
47PF
5%,100V
CLK
R122
5.36K
0.1%
11
4.99K
1%
C106
0.001UF
1KV
20
1200uH
5%
VCC
CR105
TRANSZORB
1.00K H
1%
OE
1000PF
1.62K
1%
5
DD4
3
2
1
7
R146
R126
768OHM
1%
R127
TP103
OPA2134UA
TP104
6
S4
47PF
5%,100V
IC106B
7
2.10K
1%
R128
11
S3
DD6
IC102B
6
R121
14
S2
GND
AGND4
3
S1
D1
D2
D3
D4
5
4.99K
1%
L107
5
10
RST
AGND5
4
2
15
10
7
IC103
ADG222
Vdd
AGND4
R124
R120
12
WR
R123
82.5K
1%
DO NOT STUFF
6
1.62K
1%
6
ZCAL
MCLK
C114
R157
IN1
AGND4
L106
FILTER
5
+ C130
10UF
20V
IC107
AK5383
SMODE2
R141
1.50K
1%
1.50K 1%
R153
C128
0.1UF
50V
CAL
25
8
4.99K
1%
CR106
1N4148W
VREFL
21
-15V+15V
CR107
1N4148W
R125
R118
AGND4
4
R117
5.36K
0.1%
-15V
Vss
2
C105
47PF
5%,100V
2
24
10.0K
1%
R119
604OHM
1%
+ C112
10UF
20V
1
1
TRANSZORB
IC102A
OPA2134PA
3
4.99K
1%
C104
0.001UF
1KV
IN2
CR104
R116
16
1200uH
5%
C121
0.1UF
50V
1
R144
3.65K
0.1%
DD5
3
1000PF
L105
1.00K H
1%
C120
0.1UF
50V
C119
0.1UF
50V
3
C111
0.1UF
50V
GND
2
SHELL
R115
AGND4
C118
0.1UF
50V
4
10
3
+ C131
10UF
20V
+5VA
OPA2134UA
E202
8
1
249OHM
1%
47PF
5%,100V
4
2
TP102
R139
10OHM
1%
C127
0.1UF
50V
VD
3
0.47UF
25V
+15V
L104
FILTER
R154
+ C129
10UF
20V
23
8
1
3
-15V
C110
4700PF
5%,50V
VA
IC104A
2
IC105A
5.62K
1%
R114
C109
4700PF
5%,50V
-15V
AGND3
J103
FEMALE
1
4
AGND3
+15V
DD[0..3]
R109
5.36K
0.1%
+5VA
R136
3.65K
0.1%
5
AGND3
RIGHT ANALOG
1.50K 1%
R133
3.65K
0.1%
AGND3
14.7K
1%
249OHM
1%
DGND
CR103
TRANSZORB
4.99K
1%
C102
0.001UF
1KV
R135
3.65K
0.1%
8
1200uH
5%
S4
1.62K
1%
TP101
6
R137
OPA2134UA
R134
R111
768OHM
1%
R112
TP100
7
BGND
1.00K H
1%
7
R108
5
DD3
2
1000PF
L103
1.62K
1%
47PF
5%,100V
IC104B
2.10K
1%
R113
11
S3
DD0
R107
14
S2
IN1
AGND3
3
S1
GND
6
3
6
4
5
IC100B
IC101
ADG222
D1
D2
D3
D4
4.99K
1%
1
12
WR
2
15
10
7
R105
L102
FILTER
CR101
1N4148W
R132
R156
AGND3
DO NOT STUFF
C108
4
4.99K
1%
10.0K
1%
R106
604OHM
1%
1.50K 1%
8
CR102
1N4148W
R110
R103
R104
82.5K
1%
AGND3
R131
3.65K
0.1%
AGND
-15V+15V
IN4
R102
5.36K AGND3
0.1%
TRANSZORB
-15V
8
C100
0.001UF
1KV
4
CR100
1
2
C101
47PF
5%,100V
13
4.99K
1%
Vdd
1200uH
5%
R130
E201
IN3
1.00K H
1%
3
9
R101
DD2
3
1000PF
L101
Vss
2
SHELL
R100
IN2
3
16
1
DD1
2
IC100A
OPA2134PA
4
1
4
8
L100
FILTER
22
+15V
J100
FEMALE
(SHT5)
AIN_DATA
(SHT5)
E205
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
R211
R212
R213
8.45K 1%
8.45K 1%
24.9K 1%
IC202A
1
2
C218
470PF
1%,50V
16
3
R217
R218
3.48K
1%
8.45K
1%
R234
11.3K
1%
R214
R215
R216
8.45K 1%
8.45K 1%
24.9K 1%
5
AGND6
C220
470PF
1%,50V
4
+15V
3
AGND5
3.48K
1%
3
IC207
DRV134PA
1000PF
CR202
TRANSZORB
1.0UF
IC204B
L205
JM391K
L201
FILTER
1
3.9UH
R225
1.00M
1%
3
1000PF
CR203
TRANSZORB
50V
6
7
Servo
f 3dB = 0.15Hz
5
OPA2134UA
AGND6
3
AGND5
VD+
14.3K
1%
R223
AGND5
49.9K C224
1%
TP203
L200
FILTER
1
3.9UH
IC204A
OPA2134UA
1
R224
R220
R219
11.3K
1%
+15V
3
AGND5
IC202B
OPA2134UA
7
6
8
OPA2134UA
+15V
AK4393VF
ZCEN
AGND6 AGND5
TP201
VR200
10K
2
AGND5
AGND5
1500PF
1%,50V
12PF 5%
LEFT
OUTPUT
TRIM
1
4
SHELL
L204
JM391K
TP205
CS3310
AGND6
AGND6
AGND5
AGND6
Q200
2 SST113 1
+5VD
RIGHT ANALOG
OUTPUT
IC210A
4
2
5
R240
49.9K
1%
(SHT4)
14
1000PF 1%,50V
Q203
2 SST113 1
AGND6
5
AGND6
3.9UH
R241
49.9K
1%
1000PF
CR205
TRANSZORB
3
AGND6
4
12PF 5%
R227
2
14.3K
1%
3
CW
R242
49.9K
1%
R236
150OHM
1%
AGND6
+15V
RIGHT
OUTPUT
TRIM
VR201
10K
IC206A
OPA2134UA
1
8
11
LM339
49.9K 1%
C229
AGND6
13
12
3
R228
IC210D
10
3
L203
FILTER
1
9
LM339
1000PF
CR204
TRANSZORB
L207
JM391K
2
(SHT2)
3
IC208
DRV134PA
3
C228
74HC374
(SHT4)
4
L202
FILTER
1
1500PF 1%,50V
IC210C
8
+15V
/MISCANLGCS
3.9UH
1
LM339
L206
JM391K
8
7
75uS LEFT
50uS LEFT
75uS RIGHT
50uS RIGHT
/MUTELROUTS
/RSTAD
/RSTDA
/SRCRST
C227
Q202
2 SST113 1
3
IC209
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
+15V
3
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
AGND6
1000PF 1%,50V
7
1
1
4
SHELL
2
3
6
20
VCC
OE
D[0..7]
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
GND
(SHT4)
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
IC210B
2
C226
2
R244
10.0K
1%
1500PF 1%,50V
Q201
2 SST113 1
6
R239
49.9K
1%
LM339
+5VD
J202
MALE
C225
3
R243
10.0K
1%
CLK
VREFL
C222AGND5
4
E304
AGND5
2
49.9K 1%
C223
2
24.9K 1%
14.3K
1%
2
R209
8.45K 1%
150OHM
8
R207
11
J201
MALE
(SHT4)
1
20
E303
21
R208
8.45K 1%
C219
470PF
1%,50V
R233
11.3K
1%
3.48K
1%
11
AOUTR
AOUTR+
22
E302
23
R206
11.3K
1%
AOUTR
AGND5
GAINDATAO
R222
6
8.45K
1%
AOUTL
AINR
R221
7
3.48K
1%
AINL
R235 1%
2
OPA2134UA
+15V
R205
9
R210
TP204
14
LEFT ANALOG
OUTPUT
4
3
R204
8
NC
E301
6
MUTE
C216
10UF
20V
8
25
TP200
IC201A
1
8
IC201B
OPA2134UA TP202
7
16
C215
0.1UF
50V
CW
C217
470PF
1%,50V
17
5
AGNDR
4
1500PF
1%,50V
C214
0.1UF
50V
AGND5
7
SDATAO
AGNDL
24.9K 1%
AGND5
13
VA
CS
SDATAI
SCLK
10
8.45K
1%
2
3
6
DGND
8.45K
1%
AGND6
/OUTGAINCS
GATESDO
GATESCK
5
R203
VCOM
24
18
AVDD
AOUTL+
DIF0
DIF1
DIF2
CKS0
CKS1
CKS2
R202
2
AGND6
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
/MUTELROUTS
C221
R201
BVSS
C202
0.1UF
50V
DEM0
DEM1
AVSS
+ C200
1.0UF
35V
26
27
28
AOUTL
15
12
13
14
P/S
19
10
11
DVDD
2
10.0K 1%
VREFH
DVSS
R237
MCLK
PD
BICK
SDATA
LRCK
SMUTE
DFS
1
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
/RSTDA
AOUT_BCLK
AOUT_DATA
AOUT_FCLK
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IC211
3
Butterworth
f 3dB = 40KHz
C203
0.1UF 50V
15
C233
0.1UF 50V
R200
10OHM
1%
10
C231
33PF
5%,100V
+ C213
10UF
20V
C212
0.1UF
50V
IC203
VA+
1
C211
0.1UF
50V
4
+
+ C210
10UF
20V
+
C232
1.0UF
35V
+5VA
+
R238
110OHM
1%
C201
1.0UF
35V
12
R232
10OHM 1%
MCLK
5
+5VA
(SHT6)
R230
Drawing Number Ver.
14.3K 1%
R229
AGND6
49.9K
C230
1%
R231
1.00M
1%
62230
000
Rev.
01
Sheet
2
of
4
1.0UF TH 50V
IC206B
6
7
5
OPA2134UA
AGND6
Servo
f 3dB = 0.15Hz
Left and Right Analog Output
6-43
6-44
8
4
R500
1%
110OHM
3
1000PF
4
TP503
+5VD
5
2
1
C517
1000PF
1%,50v
C501
0.1UF
C503
0.047UF
5%,50V
7
8
10
11
AESINRMCK
12
/SRCRST
(SHT3)
6
9
C518
2200PF
1%,50V
R502
3.01K
1%
+5VD
2
3
2
L501
FILTER
IC500
1
+ C516
1.0UF
35v
13
R504
14
SDA/CDOUT
AD0/CS
EMPH
RXP
RXN
VA+
AGND
FILT
RST
RMCK
RERR
SCL/CCLK
AD1/CDIN
TXP
TXN
H/S
VD+
DGND
OMCK
U
INT
SDOUT
ILRCK
OLRCK
ISCLK
OSCLK
SDIN
TCBL
28
TP504
1
R514
110OHM
1%
27
26
25
+5VD
E538
E539
24
23
C502
0.1UF
22
21
19
C511
(SHT5)
R524
E501
INTA
DIN_DATA
75OHM 1%
17
16
0.047UF
5%,50V
IN_FCLK
IN_BCLK
15
(SHT5)
E533
U
RMCK
INT
RERR
12
13
(SHT5)
49.9K 1%
OMCK
RST
11
14
R531
DGND
FILT
10
8.192MHZA
VD+
AGND
9
(SHT5)
H/S
VA+
8
(SHT5)
TXP
TXN
RXN
6
2200PF
1%,50V
AD1/CDIN
RXP
5
R515
3.01K
1%
49.9K 1%
R530
18
4
C512
SCL/CCLK
EMPH
7
MCLK
20
AD0/CS
3
C521
1000PF
1%,50v
C510
0.1UF
SDA/CDOUT
2
TP505
+5VD
R517
1
5
110OHM
1%
4
8
IC502
PICSDO
SDOUT
ILRCK
OLRCK
ISCLK
OSCLK
SDIN
TCBL
28
27
3
26
DOUT_FCLK
(SHT5)
E522
3
23
1
+5VD
22
21
R526
19
INTB
+5VD
C513
0.1UF
50V
MCKOUT
20
1000PF
49.9K
1%
IC507
18
17
SYNCOUTLRCK
16
SYNCOUTSCLK
15
RB1_SEL 11
RB2_SEL 10
9
RB3_SEL
/MCKOUTEN
7
12.288MHZA
16.9344MHZ
AESINRMCK
18.432MHZA
4
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
A
B
C
S
E534
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
CS8420
(SHT5)
E551
DOUT_DATA
(SHT5)
1
4
SHELL
L505
FILTER
24
DOUT_BCLK
(SHT5)
2
TP501
25
10OHM 1%
CS8420
1
1000PF
16
1
3
T500
SC937
5
J502
MALE
L504
FILTER
T502
SC937
(SHT5)
R527
10.0K
1%
Y
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
W
IC503
PIC16C67
C507
0.047UF
5%,50V
7
8
10
11
12
13
SYNCINSCLK
E555
E521
E554
SYNCINLRCK
R508
/SRCRST
14
RXP
RXN
VA+
AGND
FILT
RST
RMCK
RERR
TXP
TXN
H/S
VD+
DGND
OMCK
U
INT
SDOUT
ILRCK
OLRCK
ISCLK
OSCLK
SDIN
TCBL
26
25
E536
E537
AESINSYNCEN
+5VD
24
(SHT5)
23
C506
0.1UF
22
21
19
E553
IN_FCLK
16
IN_BCLK
35
OSC1/CLKIN
OSC2/CLKOUT
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
RB1_SEL
RB2_SEL
RB3_SEL
INTA
INTB
B1
B2
B3
B4
R522
10OHM
1%
+5VD
+5VD
VSS
IC509
MCP809T 450iTT
YA1
YA2
YA3
YA4
YB1
YB2
YB3
YB4
18
16
14
12
GATESCK
9
7
5
3
SYNCOUTSCLK
SYNCOUTLRCK
(SHT3)
GATESDO
(SHT3)
74HC241A
AESINSYNCEN
E532
VDD
11
13
15
17
IC504
J504 *
PICPWR
3
SYNCINSCLK
SYNCINLRCK
A1
A2
A3
A4
* DO NOT STUFF J504.
49.9K 1%
+ C515
1.0UF
35V
20
2
R521
1.00K
1%
CR500
CS8420
GAINDATAO
4
2
MCLR/Vpp
5082
(SHT3)
1
2
4
6
8
VCC
5
36
37
38
39
41
42
43
44
RB0/INT
RB1
RB2
RB3
RB4
RB5
RB6
RB7
+5VD
49.9K 1%
17
15
15
(SHT5)
R532
E500
NC
14
RA0
RA1
RA2
RA3
RA4/T0CKI
RA5/SS
R519
10.0K
1%
MCLK
20
18
12.288MHZA
E513
+5VD IC508
74AHC1G32
GND
6
9
C509
2200PF
1%,50V
R507
3.01K
1%
(SHT3)
E512
3
4
5
6
7
8
D[0..7]
10
C508
1000PF
1%,50v
C505
0.1UF
EMPH
(SHT3)
(SHT2)
(SHT3)
27
(SHT2,3)
/MISCANLGCS
/INGAINCS
/OUTGAINCS
/MCKOUTEN
BEN
5
AD1/CDIN
PICSDO
AEN
+5VD
AD0/CS
28
1
2
3
4
TP507
SYNCRMCK
1000PF
4
2
1
3
SCL/CCLK
+5VD
19
8
L503
FILTER
2
SDA/CDOUT
R520
49.9K
1%
3
1
IC501
1
/AESINCS
/AESOUTCS
/SYNCCS
PICSCK
PICSDI
PICSDO
SIN
(SHT5)
SOUT
(SHT5)
/CTS
(SHT5)
/RTS
(SHT5)
E515
2
5
R505
1%
110OHM
VSS
T501
SC937
3
1000PF
0.1UF
34
3
VSS
SHELL
1
16
18
19
20
25
26
27
29
9
10
11
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
RC1/T1OSI/CCP2
RC2/CCP1
RC3/SCK/SCL
RC4/SDI/SDA
RC5/SDO
RC6/TX/CK
RC7/RX/DT
RE0/RD
RE1/WR
RE2/CS
PICSCK
C504
2
2
RD0/PSP0
RD1/PSP1
RD2/PSP2
RD3/PSP3
RD4/PSP4
RD5/PSP5
RD6/PSP6
RD7/PSP7
13
L502
FILTER
R506
49.9K
1%
21
22
23
24
30
31
32
33
NC
NC
NC
NC
TP506
J501
FEMALE
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
/RST
AES/EBU
SYNC
INPUT
1
4
E552
/SYNCCS
6
L
1
17
28
40
PICSDI
MCKOUT
VDD
VDD
12
PICPWR
5
74HC151
8
(SHT5)
33.8688MHZ
SYNCRMCK
36.864MHZA
VCC
0.1UF
TP500
GND
3
R513
49.9K
1%
3
1
1000PF
PICSCK
2
SHELL
PICSDO
C500
2
2
AES/EBU
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
PICSCK
2
L500
FILTER
PICSDI
/AESOUTCS
R501
49.9K
1%
TP502
J500
FEMALE
1
4
E550
/AESINCS
AES/EBU
DIGITAL
INPUT
ORBAN MODEL 8382
2
PICSDI
TECHNICAL DATA
1
2
3
4
5
HDR1X5
UNSHRDED
/OUTGAINCS
Drawing Number Ver.
62230
000
(SHT3)
Rev.
01
Sheet
3
1
Control and Digital I/O
of
4
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
DSP BOARD
CONNECTOR
IC603C
6
(SHT4)
5
(SHT2)
(SHT4)
74HC14A
14
+5VD
HEADER 14
24.576MHZA
7
74HC14A
10
11
D
CLK
CLR
33.8688MHZ
1.00K 1%
E610
+5VD
J601
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
+15V
1
19
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
12.288MHZA
(SHT4)
G
G
E606
74HC14A
IC603E
11
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
AOUT_DATA
COMP_BCLK
AOUT_FCLK
MCLK
IN_BCLK
IN_FCLK
AOUT_BCLK
10
8.192MHZA
(SHT2,4)
(SHT3)
+5VD
(SHT3)
(SHT3,4)
(SHT2,4)
(SHT2,4)
(SHT3)
2
3
D
CLK
E609
74HC14A
IC604A
Q
Q
5
6
74AHCT244
+5VD
C653
1000PF
1%,50V
+5VD
R600
+5VA
-5VA
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
E605
12
-15V
(SHT4)
13
R603
1.00K
1%
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTOR
DOUT_DATA
IC603F
12
75OHM
1%
IC601
IDC HEADER 2X13
74HC74
+5VD
14
75OHM
1%
R606
R602
1.00K
1%
36.864MHZA
IC604B
IC603A
VCC
R605
AIN_DATA
DIN_DATA
8
4
E612
18.432MHZA
75OHM
1%
(SHT4)
IC603D
9
PR
R601
1.00K
1%
GND
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
(SHT4)
R604
PR
SIN
SOUT
/RTS
/CTS
7
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
CLR
JP600
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
1
74HC14A
DOUT_FCLK
18.432MHZ
36.864MHZ
24.576MHZ
33.8688MHZ
DOUT_BCLK
20
(SHT4)
VCC
3
C652
1000PF
1%,50V
GND
4
18.432MHZA
+5VD
J600
13
(SHT4)
BASE BOARD
CONNECTOR
IC603B
10
E607
Q
Q
1
9
E611
2
16.9344MHZ
(SHT4)
74HC14A
8
74HC74
(SHT4)
+5VA
-5VA
-15V
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
+15V
+5VD
IDC HEADER 2X10
+5VD
M1
+ C645
10UF
20V
C600
0.1UF
C601
0.1UF
C603
0.1UF
C604
0.1UF
C605
0.1UF
C606
0.1UF
C607
0.1UF
C608
0.1UF
C609
0.1UF
C642
0.1UF
C643
0.1UF
C644
0.1UF
+ C646
10UF
20V
C616
0.1UF
C618
0.1UF
C621
0.1UF
C649
0.1UF
C617
0.1UF
C619
0.1UF
C620
0.1UF
C622
0.1UF
C623
0.1UF
C624
0.1UF
C625
0.1UF
+ C647
10UF
20V
C632
0.1UF
C634
0.1UF
C637
0.1UF
AGND6
C650
0.1UF
C633
0.1UF
C635
0.1UF
AGND5
C636
0.1UF
C638
0.1UF
AGND4
C639
0.1UF
C640
0.1UF
C641
0.1UF
-15V
C648
0.1UF
C651
0.1UF
M5
M4
M21 M33 M34 M35
Drawing Number Ver.
62230
000
Rev.
01
Sheet
4
of
4
TP607
TEST_POINT
+15V
TP600
TEST_POINT
C602
0.1UF
M3
M2
AGND3
Interface and Power Distribution
6-45
6-46
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
DSP BOARD PARTS LOCATOR DRAWING
32170.000.14
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
6-47
E50
FSYNCB
BCLKB
EXTALB
IC101A
DSP56362-120
+3.3V
N/C
N/C
C101
11
10
13
15
17
55
59
61
45
46
47
SD10
SD11
FSR
SCKR
HCKR
EXTAL
CLKOUT
PINIT/NMI
VCCP
PCAP
GNDP
SDO0
SDO1
FST
SCKT
HCKT
SDO2/SD13
SDO3/SD12
MODA/IRQA
MODB/IRQB
MODC/IRQC
MODD/IRQD
E28
4
5
12
14
16
6
7
137
136
135
134
N/C
SD_00
SD_01
(SHT7)
IC102A
DSP56362-120
E29
(SHT7)
+3.3V
(SHT7)
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+3.3V
C103
8200PF
C102
11
10
13
15
17
55
59
61
45
46
47
SD10
SD11
FSR
SCKR
HCKR
EXTAL
CLKOUT
PINIT/NMI
VCCP
PCAP
GNDP
SDO0
SDO1
FST
SCKT
HCKT
SDO2/SD13
SDO3/SD12
MODA/IRQA
MODB/IRQB
MODC/IRQC
MODD/IRQD
E30
(SHT7)
4
5
12
14
16
(SHT7)
N/C
SD10
6
7
SD11
137
(SHT7)
136
+3.3V
135
134
+3.3V
(SHT7)
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
C105
11
10
13
15
17
55
59
61
45
46
47
SD10
SD11
FSR
SCKR
HCKR
EXTAL
CLKOUT
PINIT/NMI
VCCP
PCAP
GNDP
SDO0
SDO1
FST
SCKT
HCKT
SDO2/SD13
SDO3/SD12
MODA/IRQA
MODB/IRQB
MODC/IRQC
MODD/IRQD
E32
IC104A
DSP56362-120
E33
4
5
12
N/C
14
N/C
16
(SHT7)
N/C
N/C
+3.3V
SD20
6
7
SD21
N/C
137
(SHT7)
136
+3.3V
135
C107
134
11
10
13
15
17
55
59
61
45
46
47
SD10
SD11
FSR
SCKR
HCKR
EXTAL
CLKOUT
PINIT/NMI
VCCP
PCAP
GNDP
E34
SDO0
SDO1
FST
SCKT
HCKT
SDO2/SD13
SDO3/SD12
MODA/IRQA
MODB/IRQB
MODC/IRQC
MODD/IRQD
4
5
12
14
16
6
7
137
136
135
134
0.47UF
+3.3V
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
C109
SDO0
SDO1
FST
SCKT
HCKT
SDO2/SD13
SDO3/SD12
MODA/IRQA
MODB/IRQB
MODC/IRQC
MODD/IRQD
E36
R105
0 OHM
E37
4
5
12
N/C
14
N/C
16
(SHT7)
N/C
N/C
6
SD40
+3.3V
7
SD41
N/C
137
(SHT7)
136
+3.3V
135
C111
134
8200PF
C112
(SHT7)
+3.3V
FSYNCB
BCLKB
EXTALB
(SHT7)
+3.3V
R101
100K 1%
8200PF
C110
0.47UF
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
IRQB1
BCLKA
IC105A
DSP56362-120
SD10
SD11
FSR
SCKR
HCKR
EXTAL
CLKOUT
PINIT/NMI
VCCP
PCAP
GNDP
SD30
SD31
0.47UF
+3.3V
11
10
13
15
17
55
59
61
45
46
47
E35
FSYNCA
EXTALA
(SHT7)
N/C
IRQB1
0.47UF
11
10
13
15
17
55
59
61
45
46
47
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
8200PF
C108
8200PF
C106
0.47UF
IRQB2
IC103A
DSP56362-120
E31
8200PF
C104
0.47UF
FSYNCA
BCLKA
EXTALA
IBCLK
IFSYNC
IDATA1
IDATA0
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
+3.3V
IC106A
DSP56362-120
SD10
SD11
FSR
SCKR
HCKR
EXTAL
CLKOUT
PINIT/NMI
VCCP
PCAP
GNDP
SDO0
SDO1
FST
SCKT
HCKT
SDO2/SD13
SDO3/SD12
MODA/IRQA
MODB/IRQB
MODC/IRQC
MODD/IRQD
E38
IC107A
DSP56362-120
E39
4
5
12
N/C
14
N/C
16
(SHT7)
N/C
N/C
6
+3.3V
SD50
7
SD51
N/C
137
(SHT7)
136
+3.3V
135
C113
134
8200PF
C114
0.47UF
11
10
13
15
17
55
59
61
45
46
47
SD10
SD11
FSR
SCKR
HCKR
EXTAL
CLKOUT
PINIT/NMI
VCCP
PCAP
GNDP
SDO0
SDO1
FST
SCKT
HCKT
SDO2/SD13
SDO3/SD12
MODA/IRQA
MODB/IRQB
MODC/IRQC
MODD/IRQD
E40
IC108A
DSP56362-120
E41
4
5
12
14
16
(SHT7)
N/C
N/C
6
+3.3V
SD60
7
SD61
N/C
137
(SHT7)
136
+3.3V
135
C115
134
11
10
13
15
17
55
59
61
45
46
47
SD10
SD11
FSR
SCKR
HCKR
EXTAL
CLKOUT
PINIT/NMI
VCCP
PCAP
GNDP
SDO0
SDO1
FST
SCKT
HCKT
SDO2/SD13
SDO3/SD12
MODA/IRQA
MODB/IRQB
MODC/IRQC
MODD/IRQD
+3.3V
100K 1%
4
5
12
14
16
6
7
137
136
135
134
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
R102
100K 1%
R103
(SHT7)
SD62
SD63
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
R104
100K 1%
ODATA2
ODATA3
OFSYNCA
OBCLKA
N/C
SD70
SD71
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
+3.3V
8200PF
C116
0.47UF
IRQB2
DSP ESAI SCHEMATIC
62170.000.12
(SHT7)
6-48
(SHT6)
(SHT6,7)
ORBAN MODEL 8382
A[0..2]
D[0..7]
IC101B
DSP56362-120
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
IC102B
DSP56362-120
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
A2
A1
A0
HRD
(SHT6)
DSPEN0
(SHT6)
N/C
HACK
(SHT6)
HWR
(SHT6)
DSPRST
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
(SHT6)
IC105B ?
DSP56362-120
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
*
TECHNICAL DATA
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
NOTE:
IC 104 & IC 105
ARE NOT POPULATED
IN 2300 BUILD.
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
IC103B
DSP56362-120
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
A2
A1
A0
HRD
(SHT6)
DSPEN1
(SHT6)
N/C
HACK
(SHT6)
HWR
(SHT6)
DSPRST
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
(SHT6)
IC106B
DSP56362-120
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
A2
A1
A0
HRD
(SHT6)
DSPEN4
(SHT6)
N/C
HACK
(SHT6)
HWR
(SHT6)
DSPRST
(SHT6)
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
IC104B
DSP56362-120
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
A2
A1
A0
HRD
(SHT6)
DSPEN2
(SHT6)
N/C
HACK
(SHT6)
HWR
(SHT6)
DSPRST
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
(SHT6)
IC107B
DSP56362-120
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
A2
A1
A0
HRD
(SHT6)
DSPEN5
(SHT6)
N/C
HACK
(SHT6)
HWR
(SHT6)
DSPRST
(SHT6)
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
A2
A1
A0
HRD
(SHT6)
DSPEN3
(SHT6)
N/C
HACK
(SHT6)
HWR
(SHT6)
DSPRST
(SHT6)
IC108B
DSP56362-120
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
A2
A1
A0
HRD
(SHT6)
DSPEN6
(SHT6)
N/C
HACK
(SHT6)
HWR
(SHT6)
DSPRST
(SHT6)
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
34
35
36
37
40
41
42
43
H7
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
H0
HA2
HA1
HA0
HRD
HCS
HOREQ
HACK
HWR
RESET
31
32
33
22
30
24
23
21
44
A2
A1
A0
HRD
(SHT6)
DSPEN7
(SHT6)
N/C
HACK
(SHT6)
HWR
(SHT6)
DSPRST
(SHT6)
DSP HOST INTERFACE SCHEMATIC
62170.000.12
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
N/C
N/C
25
8
VCCS
38
57
65
VCCC
VCCH
TMS
TRST
DE
N/C
28
27
29
141
140
139
142
138
53
60
SCK
SDO
SDI
SS4
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
*
60
N/C
N/C
N/C
VCCS
25
38
8
57
65
VCCC
VCCH
TDO
TMS
TRST
DE
N/C
GNDS
53
N/C
TDI
26
138
N/C
TCK
GNDS
142
N/C
TIO0
GNDH
139
N/C
ADO
9
140
N/C
SCK
MISO
MOS1
SS
HREQ
ACI
39
N/C
141
N/C
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
GNDP1
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
GNDC
DE
29
N/C
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
48
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
VCCC
25
8
VCCS
38
57
65
VCCC
VCCH
TRST
27
N/C
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
66
N/C
TMS
28
SCK
SDO
SDI
SS7
GNDC
N/C
TDO
1
144
143
2
3
58
60
N/C
TDI
GNDS
53
N/C
TCK
GNDS
138
N/C
TIO0
9
142
N/C
ADO
26
139
N/C
SCK
MISO
MOS1
SS
HREQ
NOTE:
IC 104 & IC 105
ARE NOT POPULATED
IN 2300 BUILD.
IC108D
DSP56362-120
+3.3V
+3.3V
ACI
GNDH
140
N/C
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
GNDP1
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
39
N/C
141
N/C
VCCC
25
8
VCCS
38
65
VCCC
57
VCCC
VCCH
DE
29
N/C
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
48
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
GNDC
N/C
TRST
27
N/C
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
66
N/C
TMS
28
SCK
SDO
SDI
SS6
GNDC
60
N/C
TDO
1
144
143
2
3
58
53
N/C
TDI
GNDS
GNDS
26
GNDS
9
GNDH
N/C
138
N/C
TCK
26
DE
142
N/C
TIO0
GNDS
TRST
139
N/C
ADO
9
TMS
140
N/C
SCK
MISO
MOS1
SS
HREQ
IC107D
DSP56362-120
+3.3V
+3.3V
ACI
GNDH
TDO
141
N/C
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
GNDP1
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
39
TDI
29
N/C
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
48
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
GNDC
TCK
27
N/C
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
66
TIO0
28
SCK
SDO
SDI
SS5
GNDC
ADO
1
144
143
2
3
58
ACI
39
GNDC
+3.3V
SCK
MISO
MOS1
SS
HREQ
IC106D
DSP56362-120
+3.3V
25
8
VCCS
VCCH
VCCC
65
57
VCCC
GNDC
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
GNDP1
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
66
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
48
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
58
+3.3V
38
IC105D
DSP56362-120
+3.3V
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
GNDS
N/C
TDI
TDO
1
144
143
2
3
26
60
N/C
TCK
GNDS
53
N/C
TIO0
GNDH
138
N/C
ADO
9
142
N/C
SCK
MISO
MOS1
SS
HREQ
ACI
39
139
N/C
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
GNDP1
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
GNDC
140
N/C
VCCC
25
8
VCCS
38
57
65
VCCC
VCCH
N/C
141
N/C
IC104D
DSP56362-120
66
N/C
DE
29
N/C
GNDC
N/C
TRST
27
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
48
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
58
N/C
TMS
28
SCK
SDO
SDI
SS3
GNDS
60
N/C
TDI
TDO
GNDS
53
N/C
TCK
9
138
N/C
TIO0
1
144
143
2
3
26
N/C
142
N/C
SCK
MISO
MOS1
SS
HREQ
ADO
GNDH
DE
139
N/C
VCCC
25
8
VCCS
38
VCCH
65
VCCC
57
58
TRST
140
N/C
+3.3V
ACI
39
N/C
TMS
141
N/C
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
GNDP1
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
GNDC
N/C
TDI
TDO
29
N/C
+3.3V
IC103D
DSP56362-120
66
N/C
GNDS
60
N/C
TCK
27
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
48
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
GNDC
53
N/C
26
GNDS
9
39
GNDH
N/C
138
N/C
TIO0
28
SCK
SDO
SDI
SS2
58
DE
142
N/C
ADO
1
144
143
2
3
GNDS
TRST
139
N/C
SCK
MISO
MOS1
SS
HREQ
26
TMS
140
N/C
+3.3V
ACI
GNDS
TDI
TDO
141
N/C
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
GNDP1
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
9
TCK
29
N/C
GNDH
TIO0
27
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
48
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
39
ADO
28
SCK
SDO
SDI
SS1
GNDC
ACI
1
144
143
2
3
+3.3V
IC102D
DSP56362-120
66
SCK
MISO
MOS1
SS
HREQ
VCCC
+3.3V
GNDC
25
8
VCCS
38
VCCH
65
VCCC
GNDC
GNDC
VCCD
VCCD
VCCA
VCCA
VCCA
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQH
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
VCCQL
GNDP1
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDQ
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDD
GNDD
58
129
119
111
103
86
80
74
95
49
20
126
91
56
18
48
19
54
90
127
75
81
87
96
104
112
120
130
+3.3V
IC101D
DSP56362-120
66
+3.3V
VCCC
57
+3.3V
1
144
143
2
3
SCK
SDO
SDI
SS8
28
IOLINK
27
29
141
140
139
142
138
53
60
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
N/C
(SHT7)
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
DSP SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE,
POWER, AND GROUND SCHEMATIC
62170.000.12
6-49
6-50
TECHNICAL DATA
IC503
EPM7064AETC44-10
IC502
74LVX4245
+3.3V
+3.3V
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
(SHT5)
SA9
SA8
SA7
SA6
SA5
SA4
SA3
3
5
20
6
8
10
11
AEN
12
SMEMR 13
SMEMW 14
BIOR
15
BIOW
18
RESET 19
PTCK
26
P2TDI
32
4
29
17
VCCINT
R502
100K
1%
VCCINT
GCLRn
TCK
TDO
GND
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
N/C
(SHT7)
(SHT7)
TMS
OE2
RN501
100K-RESNET
DO NOT STUFF J503
OE1
GCLK1
41
2
44
43
42
35
34
33
31
30
28
39
27
25
23
22
21
38
37
R503
100K
1%
J503 ?
HDR 2X2
1 2
3 4
UNSHRD
DSPEN7
DSPEN6
DSPEN5
DSPEN4
DSPEN3
DSPEN2
DSPEN1
DSPEN0
DSPRST
(SHT3,7)
BUSEN
PLDEN
(SHT7)
R/W
START
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT7)
GND
SS1
SS2
SS3
SS4
SS5
SS6
SS7
SS8
VCCINT
VCC
2
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
7
40
*
+3.3V
R506
75.0 OHM
J503
36
(SHT3,7)
Q0
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
PTMS
24
D[0..7]
+3.3V
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
GND
OE
GND
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
3
4
7
8
13
14
17
18
CLK
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
11
D[0..7]
(SHT3,7)
BUSEN
9
1
TDI
20
VccB
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
10
1
12
NC
OE
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
SA[3..9]
IC504
74HC374
(SHT7)
13
B to A
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
GND
GND
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
+3.3V
GND
24
1
VccA
R/W
BD0
BD1
BD2
BD3
BD4
BD5
BD6
BD7
P1TDI
(SHT7)
GND
+3.3V
+5VB
BD[0..7]
ORBAN MODEL 8382
I/O ADDRESS SPACE
NONE
3XX
1 - 2
2XX
3 - 4 (R506)
1XX
IC501
74AHC541
+3.3V
BD0
SMEMW
SMEMR
BIOR
(SHT5)
SDO
R510
10.0K
1%
(SHT5)
SCK
DRQ1
SA9
SA8
SA4
SA3
SA1
SA0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
20
BD7
+3.3V
BD5
BD2
BD1
AEN
R505
75.0 OHM
1%
BIOW
BIOR
BIOW
SA0
SA1
SA2
+3.3V
R508
75.0 OHM
1%
DACK1
R504
100K
1%
/SPI_CS
1
19
DACK1
SDI
SA6
SA7
SA5
SA2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
E1
E2
VCC
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
10
RESET
/SPI_CS
BD6
BD4
BD3
+5VB
GND
J504
(SHT5)
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
HRD
HWR
A0
A1
A2
HACK
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
J500
DRQ1
1
2
HDR 2
R509
100K
1%
R507
10.0K
1%
HDR 20X2
SHRD
BASE BOARD
CONNECTOR
DSP ISA BUS 8-BIT I/O SCHEMATIC
62170.000.12
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
+5V
(SHT6)
P1TDI
R603
100K
1%
ODATA0
75.0 OHM
R612
ODATA1
75.0 OHM
1
19
DACBCLK
OE1
OE2
16
14
R808
E48
33.2OHM
IDATA0
IDATA1
IDATA2
18
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
2
1
20
19
RST
C801
10UF 20V
74LVC2244
6
5
0.1UF
16
MODE
ML/SR01
MC/FS1
MD/FS0
Vddb
R801
10.0K
1%
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
* DO NOT STUFF
MCKO
MCKO
RSV
XT1
XT2
PTCK
PTDO
J616
R601
100K
1%
N/C
NO
YES
NO
1
3
5
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
HDR 5X2
UNSHRD
JTAG PORT
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
N/C
N/C
OFSYNCB
OBCLKB
ODATA0
ODATA1
ODATA2
ODATA3
DOUTFSYNC
DOUTBCLK
2
4
6
8
11
13
15
17
1
19
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
OE1
OE2
24.576MHzB
PLL1700E
10
11
9
E42
E43
N/C
12
14
17
13
5
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
18
16
14
12
9
7
5
3
74LVC2244
15
7
R807
33.8688MHz
33.2OHM
74AHCT04
IC807A
1
2
R809
18.432MHzA
33.2OHM
C804
74AHCT04
10UF 20V
+3.3V
6
N/C
IC807B
+
IC602
+3.3V
J603
4
YES
YES
R806
IC807C
SCK01
SCK02
SCK03
SCK04
0.1UF
C805
3
0.1UF
4
R811
36.864MHzB
33.2OHM
R810 74AHCT04
33.2OHM
L2
4
NO
1
C3
0.1UF
OE
R802
150OHM
36.864MHz
IC804
GND +3
J615_1-2
C803
+3.3V
OTHER
20
9400
8
IC801
?
JUMPERS
INSTALL
24.576MHz
IC807D
9
15
7
Gndb
Gndp
E46
E47
HDR 2
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y7
Y8
C809
0.1UF
7
Vddb
Vddp
8
3
Vdd
Gnd
4
12
14
17
13
+5V
8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
IC807G
74AHCT04
N/C
Gndb
R611
DACFSYNC
2
4
6
8
11
(SHT5)IOLINK
13
DACFSYNC 15
DACBCLK
17
J616
Vddp
75.0 OHM
IFSYNC
IBCLK
IMCLK
9
1
2
R812*
IC601
E44
E45
0.1UF
C806
Gndp
PILOTDATA
10
11
74AHCT04
+3.3V
75.0 OHM
R609
PILOTWCLK
XT2
PLL1700E
33.2OHM
RIBBON CABLE_26P
*
C810
5
RSV
SCK01
SCK02
SCK03
SCK04
XT1
3
OFSYNCB
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
OSC
2
+3.3V
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
PILOTWCLK
PILOTBCLK
PILOTDATA
C802
+3.3V
(SHT6)
R607
75.0 OHM
6
J601
18.432MHzA
36.864MHzB
24.576MHzB
33.8688MHz
(SHT2)
75.0 OHM
R610
PILOTBCLK
+3.3V
(SHT6)
C1 0.1UF
0.1UF
OFSYNCA
100
99
98
97
96
94
93
92
85
84
I/O BOARD
CONNECTOR
Vdd
*
1000PF
C600
IC802
MCKO
MCKO
MODE
ML/SR01
MC/FS1
MD/FS0
Gnd
1 2
3 4
J615_3-4
R602
100K
1%
PTMS
(SHT2)
OBCLKA
DACBCLK
C2 0.1UF
+
91
1
2
5
7
22
24
27
28
49
50
53
55
70
J615 ?
RST
2
1
20
19
+3.3V
C601 +3.3V
VCC
DOUTFSYNC
DOUTBCLK
TDI
TMS
TCK
TDO
18
GND
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
P2TDI
PTMS
PTCK
PTDO
IDATA2
SD62
SD63
N/C
CY2305
R606 75.0 OHMOBCLKB
R608
+5V
+3.3V_FILTERED
(SHT6)
GCLK1
GCLRn
OE1
OE2/GCLK2
75.0 OHM
1%
N/C
N/C
N/C
8
L1
Ferrite 0805
IMCLK
(SHT2)
R605 75.0 OHM
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
VSS
CLKOUT
IBCLK
IRQB1
IRQB2
SD_00
SD_01
SD10
SD11
SD20
SD21
SD30
SD31
SD40
SD41
SD50
SD51
SD60
SD61
SD70
SD71
CLK1
CLK2
CLK3
CLK4
10
36.864MHZ
6
8
9
10
12
13
14
16
17
19
20
87
89
88
90
11
26
38
43
59
74
86
95
4
15
62
73
71
75
76
83
77
51
66
82
68
67
65
64
63
61
60
58
57
56
54
52
48
47
46
45
44
42
41
40
37
36
35
33
32
31
30
29
25
23
21
81
80
79
78
72
R613
3
2
5
7
20
24.576MHZ
18
34
69
4
6
VCC
CLKREF
VCC
DSPRST
HWR
PLDEN
+3.3V
1
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
(SHT2)
GND
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
(SHT6)
START
EXTALA
EXTALB
FSYNCA
FSYNCB
BCLKA
BCLKB
IFSYNC
10
(SHT6)
39
3
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
+3.3V
IC604
IC603
EPM7256ATC100-10
6-51
3
CMX-309FBC-27.000000M
DSP SERIAL AUDIO INTERFACE
AND CLOCK GENERATION
62170.000.12
6-52
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
+3.3V
C709
0.1UF
C711
0.1UF
C712
0.1UF
C713
0.1UF
C714
0.1UF
C715
0.1UF
C716
0.1UF
C718
0.1UF
C719
0.1UF
C720
0.1UF
C723
0.1UF
C724
0.1UF
C725
0.1UF
C726
0.1UF
C727
0.1UF
C732
0.1UF
C733
0.1UF
C734
0.1UF
C739
0.1UF
C740
0.1UF
C741
0.1UF
C742
0.1UF
C744
0.1UF
C751
0.1UF
C754
0.1UF
C756
0.1UF
C758
0.1UF
C759
0.1UF
C761
0.1UF
C762
0.1UF
C771
1000PF
C772
1000PF
C773
1000PF
C774
1000PF
+3.3V
+3.3V
C701
0.1UF
C702
0.1UF
C703
0.1UF
C704
0.1UF
C705
0.1UF
C706
0.1UF
C707
0.1UF
C708
0.1UF
C710
0.1UF
C728
0.1UF
C729
0.1UF
C743
0.1UF
C752
0.1UF
C753
0.1UF
C755
0.1UF
C757
0.1UF
C760
0.1UF
+ C4
10UF 20V
+ C5
10UF 20V
+ C6
10UF 20V
+ C7
10UF 20V
+ C8
10UF 20V
+ C9
10UF 20V
POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTOR
+3.3V
+5V
CR700
6.8V
J701
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
TP703
TP-DUAL
+RAW
1
IC807F
13
2
11
250UH
C749
0.1UF
10
74AHCT04
TP702
TP-DUAL
HS703
HEAT_SINK
5
+RAW
+ C776
100UF
50V
C775
0.1UF
VIN
4
+3.3V
GND
CR702
33V
FDBK
3
1
IC703
/ON
+ C736
22UF
12
74AHCT04
IC807E
HDR 2X8
SHROUDED
L701
+5VB
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
OUT
*
L700
2
CR703
31DQ04
PE-53113
150UH
+ C777
470UF
16V
+ C778
470UF
16V
DSP POWER DISTRIBUTION
62170.000.12
+ C10
10UF 20V
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
IC101C
DSP56362-120
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+3.3V
N/C
R301
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
70
69
51
50
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
AA0/RAS0
AA0/RAS1
AA0/RAS2
AA0/RAS3
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
10.0K
1%
IC102C
DSP56362-120
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+3.3V
N/C
R302
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
70
69
51
50
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
AA0/RAS0
AA0/RAS1
AA0/RAS2
AA0/RAS3
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
10.0K
1%
IC104C?
DSP56362-120
IC103C
DSP56362-120
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+3.3V
N/C
R303
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
70
69
51
50
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
10.0K
1%
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
AA0/RAS0
AA0/RAS1
AA0/RAS2
AA0/RAS3
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
6-53
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
70
69
51
50
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
AA0/RAS0
AA0/RAS1
AA0/RAS2
AA0/RAS3
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+3.3V
R304
10.0K
1%
IC105C?
DSP56362-120
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+3.3V
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
70
69
51
50
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
AA0/RAS0
AA0/RAS1
AA0/RAS2
AA0/RAS3
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
IC106C
DSP56362-120
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+3.3V
R306
R305
10.0K
1%
10.0K
1%
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
70
69
51
50
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
AA0/RAS0
AA0/RAS1
AA0/RAS2
AA0/RAS3
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
IC107C
DSP56362-120
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+3.3V
R307
10.0K
1%
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
70
69
51
50
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
AA0/RAS0
AA0/RAS1
AA0/RAS2
AA0/RAS3
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
IC108C
DSP56362-120
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
+3.3V
R308
10.0K
1%
99
98
97
94
93
92
89
88
85
84
83
82
79
78
77
76
73
72
70
69
51
50
52
68
67
62
63
71
64
A17
A16
A15
A14
A13
A12
A11
A10
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
AA0/RAS0
AA0/RAS1
AA0/RAS2
AA0/RAS3
CAS
RD
WR
TA
BR
BG
BB
D23
D22
D21
D20
D19
D18
D17
D16
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
133
132
131
128
125
124
123
122
121
118
117
116
115
114
113
110
109
108
107
106
105
102
101
100
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
*
NOTE:
IC 104 & IC 105
ARE NOT POPULATED
IN 2300 BUILD.
DSP NO-CONNECT SCHEMATIC
62170.000.12
6-54
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382
DISPLAY BOARD PARTS LOCATOR
OPTIMOD-TV DIGITAL
TECHNICAL DATA
DISPLAY BOARD
6-55
6-56
TECHNICAL DATA
ORBAN MODEL 8382